TW201038127A - Portable lighting devices - Google Patents
Portable lighting devices Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TW201038127A TW201038127A TW099101153A TW99101153A TW201038127A TW 201038127 A TW201038127 A TW 201038127A TW 099101153 A TW099101153 A TW 099101153A TW 99101153 A TW99101153 A TW 99101153A TW 201038127 A TW201038127 A TW 201038127A
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- flashlight
- mode
- controller
- switch
- portable
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 43
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 37
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 39
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 claims description 30
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 30
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 claims description 30
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000007514 turning Methods 0.000 claims description 7
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 claims description 6
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 206010011469 Crying Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 claims 2
- 230000000881 depressing effect Effects 0.000 claims 2
- 101100008049 Caenorhabditis elegans cut-5 gene Proteins 0.000 claims 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 208000003580 polydactyly Diseases 0.000 claims 1
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 73
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 36
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 33
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 33
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 32
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 32
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 32
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 31
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 22
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 17
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 17
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000012811 non-conductive material Substances 0.000 description 16
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 14
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 241001465382 Physalis alkekengi Species 0.000 description 5
- 238000013037 co-molding Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000007743 anodising Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 description 4
- 210000000887 face Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 4
- 235000015429 Mirabilis expansa Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 244000294411 Mirabilis expansa Species 0.000 description 3
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 210000005069 ears Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 235000013536 miso Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000002991 molded plastic Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium ion Chemical compound [Li+] HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010407 anodic oxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000003811 finger Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000002683 foot Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229910052734 helium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000001307 helium Substances 0.000 description 2
- SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium atom Chemical compound [He] SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910001416 lithium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000004377 microelectronic Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052755 nonmetal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000002028 premature Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011253 protective coating Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004904 shortening Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000003813 thumb Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 2
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910000881 Cu alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010061218 Inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000282376 Panthera tigris Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000003251 Pruritus Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000239226 Scorpiones Species 0.000 description 1
- 229910052770 Uranium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003423 ankle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003323 beak Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 125000000484 butyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009194 climbing Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003750 conditioning effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002305 electric material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001061 forehead Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000011389 fruit/vegetable juice Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000004247 hand Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004054 inflammatory process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007803 itching Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004297 night vision Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011017 operating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003296 saliva Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000010187 selection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000000130 stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000002470 thermal conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- ANRHNWWPFJCPAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M thionine Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(N)=CC2=[S+]C3=CC(N)=CC=C3N=C21 ANRHNWWPFJCPAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- JFALSRSLKYAFGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N uranium(0) Chemical compound [U] JFALSRSLKYAFGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21L—LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF, BEING PORTABLE OR SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR TRANSPORTATION
- F21L4/00—Electric lighting devices with self-contained electric batteries or cells
- F21L4/02—Electric lighting devices with self-contained electric batteries or cells characterised by the provision of two or more light sources
- F21L4/022—Pocket lamps
- F21L4/027—Pocket lamps the light sources being a LED
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/04—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches
- F21V23/0407—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches for flashing
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/04—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches
- F21V23/0414—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches specially adapted to be used with portable lighting devices
- F21V23/0421—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches specially adapted to be used with portable lighting devices the switch being part of, or disposed on the tail cap portion thereof
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/04—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches
- F21V23/0442—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches activated by means of a sensor, e.g. motion or photodetectors
- F21V23/0492—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches activated by means of a sensor, e.g. motion or photodetectors the sensor detecting a change in orientation, a movement or an acceleration of the lighting device, e.g. a tilt switch
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/37—Converter circuits
- H05B45/3725—Switched mode power supply [SMPS]
- H05B45/375—Switched mode power supply [SMPS] using buck topology
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/395—Linear regulators
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2115/00—Light-generating elements of semiconductor light sources
- F21Y2115/10—Light-emitting diodes [LED]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/37—Converter circuits
- H05B45/3725—Switched mode power supply [SMPS]
- H05B45/38—Switched mode power supply [SMPS] using boost topology
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02B—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
- Y02B20/00—Energy efficient lighting technologies, e.g. halogen lamps or gas discharge lamps
- Y02B20/30—Semiconductor lamps, e.g. solid state lamps [SSL] light emitting diodes [LED] or organic LED [OLED]
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Arrangement Of Elements, Cooling, Sealing, Or The Like Of Lighting Devices (AREA)
- Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)
- Battery Mounting, Suspending (AREA)
Abstract
Description
201038127 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明大體上係關於可攜式照明裝置之領域,其包括 (例如)手電筒、提燈及頭燈,及其電路。 本申请案基於且主張2009年1月16曰申請之美國臨時申 請案第61/145,120號之優先權,該案之揭示内容如同完全 陳述於本文中一樣以引用的方式併入。本申請案亦為部分 接續申請案,且基於且主張2〇〇9年7月2〇日申請之美國申 請案第12/505,555號之優先權,美國申請案第12/5〇5,555號 又為2009年7月14日申請之美國申請案第12/502,237號之部 分接續中請案’該等中請案之揭示内容如同完全陳述於本 文中一樣以引用的方式併入。 【先前技術】 各種掌上型或可攜式照明裝置(包括+電筒)在此項技術 中係已知的。此等照明裝置通常包括具有正電極及負電極 之一或多個乾電池組。在電池室或外殼中串聯或並聯地電 配置電池。電池室有時亦充當照明裝置之手柄,在手電筒 兄下尤為如此,其中筒身含有電池且亦用於固持手電 筒。經由導電構件自—電池電極建立一電路,該等導電構 件與諸如燈泡或發光二極體(「LED」)之光源的一電極電 揭接,在穿過光源之後,電路繼續穿過與導電構件電接觸 的該光源之第二電極’該等導電構件又與電池之另一電極 該電路包括_或閉合電路之開關。致動該 以閉合電路使電流能夠傳遞穿過燈泡、咖或其他光源-且 145907.doc 201038127 在白熾燈泡之狀況下穿過燈絲·藉此產生光。 式12可攜式㈣裝置針對不㈣要提供多種操作模 Ϊ,=:’除正常「全功率」或「標準功率」模式以 式、、 、’、〒已貫施功率降低模 \、:工及/或SOS模式。在此等可攜式照明襄置中, 使用者通常藉由操縱使用者介面(;通常A t π 操作模式。舉例而言…攜主開關)選擇所要 田了攜式照明裝置在正常操作槿彳 ❹ ❹ 或省電操作模式中時,可藉由操縱主開關以、斷; =恢復「接通」可攜式照明裝置使可攜式照明裝置斷轉 另一操作模式’諸如,sos模式。在其他裝置中,可 需要麼下主開關且保持達某一時段以使照明裝置變換至下 操作模式。包括進階功能性之可攜式照明裝置可包括由 微控制器或微處理器控制之電 性。 市』之電子電源開關以提供所要功能 =具有多種功能之可攜式照明裝置的_潛在問題在於 ,用者需要以某方式操縱主開關以便進人至新操作模式 二例如)手電筒之筒身上’則按壓及釋放 ;開關之序列可使正運作之手電筒之指向遠離預期照明 區。 =開關用作使用者介面以進入新操作模式相關聯的另 °過在於所需#縱序列通常複雜或容易花費太長時間以 致不能指引通過不同操作模式。與主開關做法相關聯的又 =題在於頻繁操縱主開關以指引通過不同操作模式可使 開關之機械零件過早磨損,從而縮短可攜式照明裝置之使 145907.doc 201038127 用焉命。 因此,存在對具有改良之使 从♦* 有力面之可攜式照明裝置 的需要,該可攜式照明裝置不需 開關以指引通過該可攜式昭:二複或複雜地操縱機械 ㈣τ攜式照明裝置可提供之各種操作模 式。 手電筒及其他可攜式照明裝置 你直Μ伐已在手電筒之主電源 電路中採用機械電源開關以「接 Γ ^ ^ 乂 筏通」且「切斷」可攜式照 :裝置。當使用者「接通」可攜式照明裝置時,使用者通 常向下壓或另外操縱機械電源開關以機械連接兩個觸點以 閉合開關且完成電源電路,藉此允許電流自電池之正極端 子穿過光源且流動至電池之負極端子1制I「切斷」 可攜式照明裝置時,使用者再次操縱機械開關以斷開開關 之兩個觸點且藉此斷開開關且中斷電源電路。此等裝置中 之機械電源電路因此在完成電源電路時充當導體且因此 在可攜式照明裝置之整個操作程序中傳導電流。 因為機械電源開關形成照明裝置之電路之一部分,所以 此等開關之觸點傾向於相當重負冑。所以,此等開關傾向 於需要顯著量之力以便閉合及斷開其觸點。結果,在延長 之時段内將具有機械電源開關之可攜式照明裝置用作發^ 號裝置可為困難的。舉例而言,在「接通」與「切斷」位 置之間操,縱開關所需的力在將可攜式照明裝置用於發信號 應用之延長之時段之後可使使用者疲勞。此外,使用一些 機械電源開關,可能容易花費太多時間以致不能閉合及斷 開機械電源開關以便「接通」及「切斷」可攜式照明裝置 145907.doc 201038127 以執行某些發信號應用。 。使用可攜式照明裝置之主開關以實施使用者實施之發信 號模式之另—問題在於重複操縱主開關以「切斷」且接著 恢復「接通」肖明裝置可使開關之機械零件過早磨損,從 而縮短照明裝置之使用壽命。 ' ❹201038127 VI. Description of the Invention: TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention generally relates to the field of portable lighting devices, including, for example, flashlights, lanterns, and headlights, and circuits thereof. The present application is based on and claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/145,120, filed on Jan. 16, 2009, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. This application is also a partial succession application and is based on and claims the priority of US Application No. 12/505,555 filed on July 2, 2009, US Application No. 12/5〇5,555 Part of the continuation of the U.S. Application Serial No. 12/502,237, filed on Jul. 14, 2009, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. [Prior Art] A variety of handheld or portable lighting devices (including + flashlights) are known in the art. Such illumination devices typically include one or more dry battery packs having a positive electrode and a negative electrode. The battery is electrically configured in series or in parallel in the battery compartment or housing. The battery compartment sometimes also acts as a handle for the lighting device, especially under the flashlight, where the barrel contains the battery and is also used to hold the flashlight. Forming a circuit from the battery electrode via the conductive member, the conductive member being electrically connected to an electrode such as a light source of a bulb or a light emitting diode ("LED"), and after passing through the light source, the circuit continues to pass through the conductive member The second electrode of the light source that is in electrical contact, the conductive member and the other electrode of the battery, includes a switch that _ or a closed circuit. Actuate this to close the circuit so that current can pass through the bulb, coffee or other light source - and 145907.doc 201038127 through the filament under incandescent bulbs. The portable (4) device of the formula 12 is not required to provide a variety of operation modes. =: 'In addition to the normal "full power" or "standard power" mode, the power, mode, and mode have been applied. And / or SOS mode. In these portable lighting devices, the user usually selects the desired lighting device in normal operation by manipulating the user interface (usually the A t π mode of operation. For example, carrying the main switch). ❹ ❹ or in the power-saving mode of operation, by manipulating the main switch to break, = "return" the portable lighting device to turn the portable lighting device into another operating mode 'such as the sos mode. In other devices, the main switch may be required and held for a certain period of time to cause the lighting device to shift to the lower mode of operation. Portable lighting devices including advanced functionality may include electrical control controlled by a microcontroller or microprocessor. City's electronic power switch to provide the desired function = portable lighting device with multiple functions _ potential problem is that the user needs to manipulate the main switch in some way to enter the new operating mode 2, for example, the flashlight barrel body' Then press and release; the sequence of switches can direct the flashlight that is operating away from the intended illumination zone. = The switch is used as a user interface to enter the new mode of operation. The additional sequence is often complex or easily takes too long to guide through different modes of operation. The problem associated with the main switch practice is that the main switch is frequently manipulated to direct premature wear of the mechanical parts of the switch through different modes of operation, thereby shortening the life of the portable lighting device. Therefore, there is a need for a portable lighting device with improved power from the ♦* power surface, which does not require a switch to guide the portable (4) τ-carrying through the portable Various operating modes are available for the lighting device. Flashlights and other portable lighting devices You have used the mechanical power switch in the main power circuit of the flashlight to "connect Γ ^ ^ 筏 」通" and "cut off" the portable device: device. When the user "turns on" the portable lighting device, the user typically presses down or otherwise manipulates the mechanical power switch to mechanically connect the two contacts to close the switch and complete the power circuit, thereby allowing current from the positive terminal of the battery. When passing through the light source and flowing to the negative terminal 1 of the battery to "cut" the portable lighting device, the user again manipulates the mechanical switch to open the two contacts of the switch and thereby open the switch and interrupt the power circuit. The mechanical power supply circuit in such devices thus acts as a conductor when the power supply circuit is completed and thus conducts current throughout the operational sequence of the portable lighting device. Because the mechanical power switches form part of the circuitry of the lighting device, the contacts of such switches tend to be quite heavy. Therefore, such switches tend to require a significant amount of force to close and open their contacts. As a result, it can be difficult to use a portable lighting device having a mechanical power switch as the transmitting device for an extended period of time. For example, between the "on" and "off" positions, the force required for the vertical switch can be fatigued by the user after the extended period of use of the portable lighting device for signaling applications. In addition, with some mechanical power switches, it may be easy to spend too much time closing and disconnecting the mechanical power switch to "on" and "cut off" the portable lighting device 145907.doc 201038127 to perform certain signaling applications. . Another problem with the use of the main switch of the portable lighting device to implement the signalling mode implemented by the user is that the main switch is repeatedly operated to "cut" and then resumes the "on" mode. The mechanical parts of the switch can be premature. Wear and tear, thus shortening the service life of the lighting device. ' ❹
用於可攜式電子照明裝置中之一些開關可需要較小力來 操縱’因為其通常不形成照明I置之主電源電路之一部分 且因此不作為重負冑。雖然此情形在發信號應用中自使用 者疲勞觀點而言為潛在有利的,但多模式可攜式電子裝置 針對使用者實施之發信號模式呈現其自身的—系列問題。 舉例而言’在多模式電子可攜式照明I置中,各種操作 模式可藉由使用者㈣照明裝置歷時小於_預定時段(諸 如’ 1至2秒)的時段且接著再次恢復接通照明裝置來選 擇。回應於此短暫切斷時段,照明裝置變換至下一模式。 所以難以將以此方式組態之多模式可攜式電子昭明裝置 用於使用者實施之發信號模式。此係因為使用者在恢復接 通照明裝置之前必須等待大於該預定時段的時段否則其 將自動變換至下—操作模式,藉此干擾❹者之預期發作 賴作。換言之’將阻止使用者藉由有光及無光之短暫交 替時段發信號以經由(例如)莫士碼通信。 因此’存在對改良之可攜式電子照明裝置之需要,該改 良之可攜式電子照明裝置可在不操縱機械開關以重複「接 通」及「切斷」照明裝置的情況下用於使用者實施之發信 號模式中。 145907.doc 201038127 羅盤適用於各種戶外運動或業餘愛好,包括(例如)背包 旅行(backpacking)、徒步旅行(hiking)、爬山、划船等。傳 統磁羅盤包括磁緘以指示地球磁北之方向。然而,在黑暗 中,在無光源輔助n兄下可難以看見磁M指肖之方向。 在一些羅盤中,磁緘及羅盤面之部分塗布有螢光材料以改 良夜視及使用。然巾,在極黑暗的條件下,此等螢光塗層 可能不充分。一些進階羅盤設置有内裝光源以在需要時接 通然而,匕等羅盤傾向於較昂貴且較可能為較小_ U =戶外愛好者擁有。此外,出現以下許多情形:個人將受 益於具有-羅盤但由於各種原因完全不具有羅盤,但其確 只持有手電筒或其他可攜式照明裝置。 所以,存在對諸如+電筒或頭燈之可攜式照明裝置的需 要纟可攜式恥明裝置提供羅盤功能。有利的是,該裝置 在白天與黑夜期間皆可使用。此類裝置將適用於廣泛類別 之個人,包括戶外愛好者以及戶外新手。 碩插入至牆壁中之夜燈為習知的。然而,此等夜燈孟 二為可攜式的’因此使多個房間中所需的夜燈提供充分安 全性。-些個人將手電筒或其他可攜式照明裝置用作 2較Μ知牆壁插人式夜燈以外亦㈣手電筒或其他 ° /’、、、月裝置。然而,若整夜使習知手電筒或可攜式昭 明裝置保持接通以趄 文… 丧逋以提供恆疋光,則可能快速耗盡照 之電池。 W衣且 或者;6·切斷可攜式照明農置以節省電池電力 暗中確定昭明# m 、彳仕黑Some of the switches used in portable electronic lighting devices may require less force to operate 'because they typically do not form part of the main power circuit for illumination I and therefore do not act as a heavy load. While this situation is potentially advantageous in signalling applications from the perspective of user fatigue, multi-mode portable electronic devices present their own series of problems for the signaling patterns implemented by the user. For example, in a multi-mode electronic portable illumination I, various operation modes may be resumed by the user (4) illumination device for a period of less than a predetermined period (such as '1 to 2 seconds) and then resumed to be turned on again. Come choose. In response to this brief cut-off period, the lighting device changes to the next mode. Therefore, it is difficult to use the multi-mode portable electronic display device configured in this manner for the signal mode implemented by the user. This is because the user must wait for a period of time greater than the predetermined period of time before restoring the lighting device, otherwise it will automatically switch to the next-operating mode, thereby interfering with the expected episode of the latter. In other words, the user will be prevented from signaling via a short-lived period of light and no light to communicate via, for example, a Moss code. Therefore, there is a need for an improved portable electronic lighting device that can be used for users without having to manipulate mechanical switches to repeat "on" and "cut" lighting devices. Implemented in the signaling mode. 145907.doc 201038127 Compass is suitable for a variety of outdoor sports or hobbies, including (for example) backpacking, hiking, climbing, boating, etc. The conventional magnetic compass includes a magnetic field to indicate the direction of the earth's magnetic north. However, in the dark, it is difficult to see the direction of the magnetic M finger shawl without the light source assisting n brother. In some compasses, the magnet and the surface of the compass are coated with a fluorescent material to improve night vision and use. However, in extremely dark conditions, these fluorescent coatings may not be sufficient. Some advanced compasses are equipped with built-in light sources to be turned on when needed. However, the compasses tend to be more expensive and more likely to be smaller _ U = owned by outdoor enthusiasts. In addition, there are many situations in which an individual will benefit from having a compass but for all reasons not having a compass at all, but it does only have a flashlight or other portable lighting device. Therefore, there is a need for a portable illuminating device such as a flashlight or a headlight to provide a compass function for the portable mascara device. Advantageously, the device can be used during both day and night. Such devices will be suitable for a wide range of individuals, including outdoor enthusiasts and novice outdoorrs. The night lights that are inserted into the wall are well known. However, these night lights are portable, thus providing sufficient security for the night lights required in multiple rooms. - Some people use flashlights or other portable lighting devices as 2 (not more) flashlights or other (4) flashlights or other ° / ',, and monthly devices. However, if the conventional flashlight or portable camcorder is kept on overnight to provide a constant light, the battery may be quickly depleted. W clothing and or; 6 · cut off the portable lighting farm to save battery power, secretly determined Zhao Ming # m, 彳仕黑
、裴置之位置可能有問題。在一些情形下,A 145907.doc 201038127 使用者搜尋可攜式照明裝置時,確定照明裳置之位置甚至 可導致損傷,在緊急情形下尤為如此。 因此’存在對可攜式照明裝置之需要,該可攜式照明裂 置具有作為夜燈之改良之功能性。 在多模式可攜式電子照明裝置中,照明裝置之電子器件 可包括許多預先程式化之功能。此等模式可包括「標準功 率」模式、功率降低模式、閃爍模式及⑽模式。然而, π能調整此等習知多模式裝置之各種個別模式。結果,可There may be a problem with the location of the device. In some cases, A 145907.doc 201038127 When searching for portable lighting devices, users can determine the location of the lighting and even cause damage, especially in emergency situations. Therefore, there is a need for a portable lighting device that has improved functionality as a night light. In a multi-mode portable electronic lighting device, the electronics of the lighting device can include a number of pre-programmed functions. These modes may include "standard power" mode, power down mode, blink mode, and (10) mode. However, π can adjust various individual modes of such conventional multi-mode devices. Result, can
攜式照明裝置之多用本V 0Έ 5H 使用者必須間単地選擇最適合其需要的特 定無作模式。 ' 解決此問題之-做法為將額外操作模式程式化至照明裝 置中。舉例而言,代替具有單功率降低模式,可攜式照明 裝置可具備兩個離散功率降低模式,諸如,㈣功率降低 模式及5〇%功率降低模式。然而,對該問題之此離散做法 可月匕並非極_實用,因為隨著將每一新操作模式添加至可 ❹冑式’’、、月裝置’而要更多時間以指引通過不同離散操作模 式所以甚至使付使用者將較不可能使用照明裝置之進階Multi-purpose portable lighting devices V 0Έ 5H Users must choose the most suitable mode for their needs. The solution to this problem is to program the extra mode of operation into the lighting unit. For example, instead of having a single power reduction mode, the portable lighting device can be provided with two discrete power reduction modes, such as (4) power reduction mode and 5〇% power reduction mode. However, this discrete approach to this problem is not extremely practical, as more time is required to guide through different discrete operations as each new operating mode is added to the squatting '', month device' Mode so even the user will be less likely to use the lighting device
功能性。使用者介而f L (4如’早一開關)亦不提供用於包括 許多操作模式之實用選項。實際上,對於一些設計,試圖 在(例如)四個或五個離散操作模式内存取將為麻須的。 因此’存在對多模式可攜式照明裝置之需要,該多模式 可攜式照明裝置實現使用者可調整之操作模式。 當接通諸如手電筒或頭燈之可攜式照明裝置時,消耗電 池電力。結果,若無意中使照明裝置保持「接通」,則可 145907.doc 201038127 浪費在乾電池組狀況下的電池電力或電池使用壽命。此产 形不幸地可使可攜式照明裝置在其可實際上被需要時^ 或具有降低之效能。為了減輕此問題,一些可攜式照明裝 置已設置有一自動切斷特徵,其在一預定時段已㈣ 自動切斷照明裝詈。缺& 、 , _ …、而,以此方式實施,自動切斷特徵 可為危險的,因為可搞式昭 # π」堝式照明裝置可在使用者仍需要 照明裝置之照明時自動「切斷」。 因此’存在對具有改良之自動切斷特徵之 置的需要。 策 因為現代可攜式電子昭明奘罢、3 m ; ',、月裝置通㊉採用需要比採用習知 機械電源開關之手電筒小的 刀不啟動之開關,所以在儲存 期間’此等電子照明裝 情形可導致完全電池乾含 忍中接通」。此 < 雖然一些可攜式電子照明裝置 5又罝有如上所註明之白私 〜入^ 之自動切斷特徵’但此非為以上問題之 元全令人滿意之解決方幸, ^ 口為在自動切斷照明裝置之前 將相失一些電池電力。卜 斗、 ,右以使主開關啟動照明裝置 之方式再次推擠可攜式昭明 壯w古s A 馬飞…月裝置,則可再次「接通」照明 衣置直至自動切斷特徵再 電池耗盡。 刀斷裝置為止,從而導致額外 因此,存在對改良之可攜4 降低蔣紐咅“ 式電子照明裝置之需要,其彳 丨伞低將無意中「接诵,昭 丧逋」照明裝置之可能性。 在許多現有可攜式照明裝 OJ如车贵狀 置令,电池含有於裝置之外殼 (例如’手電筒的筒身)中。 可再充電雷、也叮人士 在了再充電手電筒之狀況下, 丹充電電池可含有於電池 r 已進仃其他試圖以形成 145907.doc 201038127 含有用於對照明裝置供電之所有電池的電池組或電池盒, 以便允許谷易-次插入及移除該等電池。然而,此等電池 組及電池盒常包含需要多個螺紋扣件以組裝之外殼從而 導致複雜且昂貴的電池組或電池盒。此外,在可再充電電 池組之狀況下,若任何電子器件結合再充電來使用,則該 等電子器件可能不含有於電池組中。所以,通常需要額外 連接,其可增加製造成本及設計複雜性。 & 因此,在不可再充電與可再充電情形兩者下,皆存在對 改良之電池組之需要。 【發明内容】 々提供許多可攜式照明裝置及其操作方法。大體而言,該 等可攜式照明裝置可為任何類型之可攜式照明裝置,包括 (例如)手電筒、頭燈、提燈等。 為實例提供-種經組態以使用_可攜式電源操作 之可攜式照明裝置,其中該可攜式照明裝置包含—主電源 © 電路、一慣性感測器及一控制器。該主電源電路包括—光' 源、一電子電源開關且經組態以將該光源電連接至該可攜 f電源。該慣性感測器具有至少一信號輸出。該控制器以 容許該控制器控制穿過主電源電路中之電子電源開關及光 源之電力流的方式電連接至該電子電源開關。該控制器亦 電連接至來自該慣性感測器之至少一輸出。該控制器_ 式化以基於自該慣性感測器之至少一輸出接收之—或多個 信號來控制穿過該光源之電力流。另外,舉例而言,該控 制器可經权式化以基於自該慣性感測器之至少一輸出接收 145907.doc 201038127 之輪入進入至新操作模式中。 操作諸如手電筒或頭燈之可攜式照明裝置之—潛在方法 涉及以第-預定方式移動該照明裝置以使該照明褒置進L 新才呆作模式。該方法可進一步包括在第二預定方向 明裝置以調整該操作模式。舉例而言,該可攜式照明 裝置可繞該光源之投射主軸在第一方向上旋轉以使其進入 新知作模式。此外,繞該投射主轴在相反方向上之 用於調整選定之模式。以上方法之有利之處在於可在益主 開關之按壓及釋放序列的情況下選擇新操作模式。同樣 地,該等方法亦將在不實施主開關之複雜按壓及釋放序列 的情況下實現選定之模式之㈣。以第—預定方式及第二 預定方式進行之移動亦可包含除繞該投射主軸旋轉以外的 移動。舉例而言,其可包含某搖動序列。 作為一實例,提供一種經組態以使用—可攜式電源操作 之可攜式照明裝置,其中兮·^接1⑽ 具中°亥可攜式照明農置包含一主電源 電路、一磁性感測器及-控制器。該主電源電路包括一光 源及一電子開關且經組態以將該光源電連接至該可攜式電 源。該磁性感測器具有至少-信號輸出。該控制器亦以容 許該控制器控制穿過該主電源電路中之電子電源開關及光 源之電力流的方式電連接至該電子電源開關。該控制器亦 電連接至來自該磁性感測器之至少—輸出,其中該控制器 經組態以基於自該磁性感測器之至少—輸出接收之輸入輸 出-控制信號。在-實施例中,該控制信號傳達至該電子 開關以控制穿㈣光源之電力流且產生—預定視覺回應。 145907.doc 201038127Feature. The user does not provide a practical option for including many modes of operation, such as the 'early switch'. In fact, for some designs, attempts to access in, for example, four or five discrete modes of operation will be numb. Thus there is a need for a multi-mode portable lighting device that implements a user-adjustable mode of operation. Battery power is consumed when a portable lighting device such as a flashlight or headlight is turned on. As a result, if the lighting device is inadvertently kept "on", then 145907.doc 201038127 can be wasted battery power or battery life under dry battery conditions. This type of production unfortunately enables portable lighting devices to have reduced performance when they are actually needed. To alleviate this problem, some portable lighting devices have been provided with an automatic cut-off feature that automatically (4) automatically cuts off the lighting fixture for a predetermined period of time. The lack of & , , _ ..., and in this way, the automatic cut-off feature can be dangerous, because the 式 昭 埚 照明 照明 照明 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动 自动Broken." Therefore, there is a need for an improved automatic cutoff feature. Because of the modern portable electronic Zhaoming 奘, 3 m; ',,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, The situation can lead to a complete battery drain. This < Although some portable electronic lighting devices 5 have the automatic cutting feature of the white private-input ^ as noted above, this is not a satisfactory solution for the above problems. Some battery power will be lost before the lighting device is automatically turned off. Budou, right, push the portable display device in the way that the main switch activates the lighting device. Then, the device can be "turned on" again until the feature is automatically cut off. Do it. So far, the knife is broken, which leads to the extra. Therefore, there is a need for the improved portable 4 to reduce the need for the "Electronic illuminating device", and the low umbrella will inadvertently "adjacent, 逋 逋 逋" lighting device possibility . In many existing portable lighting installations, the battery is contained in the casing of the device (e.g., the body of the flashlight). Rechargeable thunder, also in the case of rechargeable flashlights, Dan rechargeable battery can be included in the battery r has been pushed into other battery packs that attempt to form 145907.doc 201038127 containing all the batteries used to power the lighting device or A battery compartment to allow the valley to insert and remove the batteries. However, such battery packs and battery packs often contain a housing that requires multiple threaded fasteners to assemble, resulting in a complicated and expensive battery pack or battery pack. In addition, in the case of a rechargeable battery pack, if any of the electronic devices are used in conjunction with recharging, the electronic devices may not be included in the battery pack. Therefore, additional connections are often required which can increase manufacturing costs and design complexity. & Therefore, there is a need for an improved battery pack in both non-rechargeable and rechargeable situations. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION A number of portable lighting devices and methods of operation thereof are provided. In general, the portable lighting devices can be any type of portable lighting device including, for example, a flashlight, a headlight, a lantern, and the like. A portable lighting device configured to operate with a portable power supply is provided for the example, wherein the portable lighting device includes a main power source circuit, an inertial sensor, and a controller. The main power circuit includes a light source, an electronic power switch, and is configured to electrically connect the light source to the portable f power source. The inertial sensor has at least one signal output. The controller is electrically coupled to the electronic power switch in a manner that allows the controller to control the flow of electrical power through the electronic power switch and the light source in the main power circuit. The controller is also electrically coupled to at least one output from the inertial sensor. The controller is configured to control the flow of power through the source based on - or a plurality of signals received from at least one output of the inertial sensor. Additionally, for example, the controller can be weighted to receive a round-up into the new mode of operation based on at least one output from the inertial sensor receiving 145907.doc 201038127. Operating a portable lighting device such as a flashlight or headlight - a potential method involves moving the lighting device in a first predetermined manner to place the lighting device in a new mode. The method can further include adjusting the mode of operation in the second predetermined direction. For example, the portable lighting device can be rotated in a first direction about the projection axis of the light source to enter a new known mode. In addition, the opposite direction is used to adjust the selected mode around the projection axis. The above method is advantageous in that a new operating mode can be selected with the pressing and releasing sequence of the main switch. Similarly, these methods will also implement the selected mode (4) without implementing the complex press and release sequence of the main switch. The movement in the first predetermined manner and the second predetermined manner may also include movement other than rotation about the projection spindle. For example, it can include a shaking sequence. As an example, a portable lighting device configured to operate using a portable power supply is provided, wherein the °·^1 (10) has a main power supply circuit and a magnetic sensing device. And controller. The main power circuit includes a light source and an electronic switch and is configured to electrically connect the light source to the portable power source. The magnetic sensor has at least a signal output. The controller is also electrically coupled to the electronic power switch in a manner that allows the controller to control the flow of electrical power through the electronic power switch and the light source in the main power circuit. The controller is also electrically coupled to at least an output from the magnetic sensor, wherein the controller is configured to output an input-output control signal based on at least the output from the magnetic sensor. In an embodiment, the control signal is communicated to the electronic switch to control the flow of power through the (four) light source and to generate a predetermined visual response. 145907.doc 201038127
❹ 在f-實施例中,該控制信號傳達至一音訊裝置以產生一 預疋音訊回應。在另一實施例中,該控制信號傳達至一電 動機以產生m動回應。當該照明裝置上之一座標標 ^己旋轉以與不同基本座標對料可產生不同命令信號^ 分別藉由該光源或音訊裝置引起不同視覺、音訊或振動回 應在f施例中’該座標標記包含該可攜式照明裝置之 光源之投射主軸。在其他實施财,該座標標記包含在該 可攜式照明裝置之外部部分上之實體標記。 操作諸如具有羅盤特徵之手電筒之可攜式照明裝置的一 潛在方法可涉及繞大體上正交於該照明裝置之座標標纪之 旋轉軸旋轉該可攜式照明裝置以在該照明裝置之座標標記 面向地球磁北極時使該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置輸出一視 覺、音訊及/或振動回應。在—實施例中,該座標標記包 含該光源之投射主軸。在另一實施例中,該座標標記包含 在該可攜式照明裝置之外部部分上之實體標記。 在-實施例中’該照明裝置在該座標標記朝向地球磁北 極旋轉時逐漸變得較亮且在該座標標記遠離地球磁北極朝 向地球磁南極旋轉時逐漸變得較暗。因此,該可攜式照明 裝置能夠藉由在該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置指向不同方向 時基於光源提供不同視覺回應來提供羅盤之功能。 作為-實例’當該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置面向地球之 磁北極座標時,該光源之亮度可增加,且t該手電筒或可 攜式照明裝置正對地球之磁北極座標時,該光源提供最亮 光。 U5907.doc -13- 201038127 作為-實例,當該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之投射主輛 在地球之磁基本座標中之一者之5。角度内時,該光源產生 閃爍信號。 〇 作為-實例一種可攜式照明裝置可經組態以使用一可 攜式電源操作,該可攜式照明褒置包含:一包括一光源之 主電源電路、一慣性感測器及-控制器。該主電源電路可 經組您以將該光源電連接至該可攜式電源。該慣性感測器 I具有複數個信號輸出°該控”可以料該控制器控制 過该主電源電路中之光源之電力流的方式電連接至該主 電路。該控制器亦可電連接至該慣性感測器之輸出, 之=控制器經程式化以基於自該慣性感測器之輪出接收 之^唬以各種位準控制穿過該光源之電力流。 投或:攜式照明裝置之—潛在方法為沿光源之 射主軸向右(或取決於使用者組態向左)旋轉該 可攜式照明裝置以接通該手電筒或可攜式照 L二3 :投射主軸向左(或取決於使用者組態向轉 π式照明裝置以切斷該手電筒或可攜式照明裝:因 “妾通或切斷該手電筒或可攜式照明 非係必需的。 了筏鈕亚 方二實例,操作手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之-潛在 光源之投射主軸向右(或取決於使 旋轉該手電筒或可攜式照„置錢 戈:向左) 明裝置轡猓舫古二 卞电同或可攜式照 震置變付較冗而沿光源之投射主軸 者組態向右)旋轉該手電筒或可攜 使,用 衣置以使該手電 145907.doc -14 - 201038127 攜式照明裝置變得較暗。因此,當以各種亮度轉動 ^同或I攜式照明裳置時,按紐並非係必需的。 :實例,操作手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之-潛在 2沿域之投射主軸向右(或取決於使用者組態向左) 兮丰:Γ電同或可攜式照明裝置以便以較高閃爍速率轉動 =筒或可攜式照明裝置而沿光源之投射主軸向左(或 Ο ❹ 柄Ζ使用者組態向右)旋轉該可攜式照明裝置以便以較 2閃爍速率轉動該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置。所以當以 t種閃燦速率轉動該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置時,按钮並 非係必需的。 2為f例’—種可攜式照明裝置可經組態以使用一可 =電源操作,該可攜式照明裝置包含:-包括一光源之 主電源電路、—僧成、0丨η 貝性感測态及一控制器。該主電源電路可 二=以將該光源電連接至該可攜式電源。該慣性感測器 複數個信號輸出。該控制器可以容許該控制器控制 亥主電源電路中之光源之電力流的方式電連接至該主 2源電路1控制器亦可電連接至該慣性感測器之輸出, …控制器經程式化以基於自該慣性感測器之輸出接收 之#號開始穿過該光源之電力流。 =手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之一潛在方法為以夜燈模 “疋該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置以使得當該手電筒 攜式照明裝置偵測到移動時,其自動變得較亮。 作為-實例,—種可攜式照明裝置可經組態以使用 攜式電源操作’該可攜式照明裝置包含:一包括一光源之 I45907.doc 201038127 主電源電路、一慣性感測器及一控制器。該主電源電路可 經組態以將該光源電連接至該可攜式電源。該慣性感測器 可具有複數個信號輸出。該控制器可以容許該控制器控制 穿過該主電源電路中之光源之電力流 電源電路。該控制器亦電連接至該慣性感= = 中該控制器基於自該慣性感測器之輸出接收之信號將一可 調整參數儲存於一記憶體中。❹ In the f-embodiment, the control signal is communicated to an audio device to generate an advanced audio response. In another embodiment, the control signal is communicated to a motor to generate a m-action response. When a coordinate mark on the illuminating device rotates to align with different basic coordinates, different command signals can be generated. ^ respectively, the light source or the audio device causes different visual, audio or vibration responses. In the embodiment, the coordinate mark is used. A projection spindle comprising a light source of the portable lighting device. In other implementations, the coordinate mark contains an physical indicia on an exterior portion of the portable lighting device. A potential method of operating a portable lighting device such as a flashlight having a compass feature may involve rotating the portable lighting device about a coordinate axis substantially orthogonal to the coordinate of the lighting device to mark the coordinate of the lighting device The flashlight or portable lighting device outputs a visual, audio and/or vibration response when facing the Earth's magnetic north pole. In an embodiment, the coordinate mark includes a projection spindle of the light source. In another embodiment, the coordinate mark comprises a physical indicia on an outer portion of the portable lighting device. In an embodiment, the illumination device gradually becomes brighter as the coordinate mark rotates toward the earth's magnetic north pole and gradually becomes darker as the coordinate mark rotates away from the earth's magnetic north pole toward the earth's magnetic south pole. Therefore, the portable lighting device can provide the function of the compass by providing different visual responses based on the light source when the flashlight or the portable lighting device is pointing in different directions. As an example - when the flashlight or portable lighting device faces the magnetic north pole coordinates of the earth, the brightness of the light source can be increased, and when the flashlight or the portable lighting device is facing the magnetic north pole coordinate of the earth, the light source provides the brightest light. . U5907.doc -13- 201038127 As an example, when the flashlight or the portable lighting device projects the main vehicle in one of the magnetic coordinates of the earth. The source produces a blinking signal within the angle. As an example, a portable lighting device can be configured to operate using a portable power supply, the portable lighting device comprising: a main power circuit including a light source, an inertial sensor and a controller . The main power circuit can be grouped to electrically connect the light source to the portable power source. The inertial sensor I has a plurality of signal outputs. The control can be electrically connected to the main circuit in such a manner that the controller controls the power flow of the light source in the main power circuit. The controller can also be electrically connected to the controller. The output of the inertial sensor, the controller is programmed to control the flow of power through the source at various levels based on the round-robin reception from the inertial sensor. - The potential method is to rotate the portable lighting device along the main axis of the light source (or to the left depending on the user configuration) to turn on the flashlight or portable L 2: Projecting the main axis left (or depending on The user configures the π-type lighting device to cut off the flashlight or the portable lighting device: it is necessary to "cut or cut the flashlight or the portable lighting." Or the portable lighting device - the projection of the potential light source is the main axis right (or depending on whether the flashlight or the portable photo is rotated): the device is the same or portable. The light is set to be more cumbersome and the light source is cast Spindle configuration to the right) Rotate the flashlight or carry it, so that the flashlight 145907.doc -14 - 201038127 portable lighting device becomes darker. Therefore, when rotating with various brightness or When the lighting is on, the button is not required. Example: operating a flashlight or portable lighting device - the projection of the potential 2 along the main axis is right (or depending on the user configuration to the left) 兮丰:Γ An electric or portable illuminating device for rotating at a higher flashing rate = a canister or a portable illuminating device to rotate the portable illumination along the projection main axis of the light source (or Ζ Ζ Ζ user configuration to the right) The device is configured to rotate the flashlight or the portable lighting device at a rate of 2 blinking. Therefore, when the flashlight or the portable lighting device is rotated at a t-flash rate, the button is not necessary. 2 is f-type The portable lighting device can be configured to operate using a power supply, the portable lighting device comprising: - a main power circuit including a light source, - a 、, a 0 丨 性感 sexy measurement state, and a controller. The main power circuit can be two = to the source Connected to the portable power source. The inertial sensor has a plurality of signal outputs. The controller can allow the controller to control the power flow of the light source in the main power circuit to be electrically connected to the main source circuit 1 controller The controller can also be electrically coupled to the output of the inertial sensor, ... the controller is programmed to begin the flow of power through the source based on the # received from the output of the inertial sensor. = Flashlight or portable lighting device One potential method is to "turn on the flashlight or the portable lighting device in a night light mode so that when the flashlight portable lighting device detects movement, it automatically becomes brighter. As an example, a portable lighting device can be configured to operate using a portable power supply. The portable lighting device includes: an I45907.doc 201038127 main power circuit including a light source, an inertial sensor, and a Controller. The main power circuit can be configured to electrically connect the light source to the portable power source. The inertial sensor can have a plurality of signal outputs. The controller can allow the controller to control the power flow circuit through the light source in the main power circuit. The controller is also electrically coupled to the sense of inertia = = wherein the controller stores an adjustable parameter in a memory based on a signal received from the output of the inertial sensor.
手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之組態之—潛在方法為將該 電筒或可攜式照明裝置指向上且沿光源之投射主軸向右; 轉該手電筒或可攜式照明裝置以將該手電筒或可搞式照, 裝置設定為慣用右手組態而將該手電筒或可攜式照明裝 指向上且沿光源之投射主軸向左旋轉該可攜式照明裝置』 將該可攜式照明裝置設定為慣用左手組態。因此,… 筒或其他可攜式照明裝置可基於由使用者執行之組態程: 谷易調適成由慣用右手或慣用左手之使用者使用。Configuration of a flashlight or portable lighting device - the potential method is to point the flashlight or portable lighting device upwards and project the main axis right along the light source; turn the flashlight or portable lighting device to turn the flashlight or In the case of the right-handed configuration, the flashlight or the portable lighting device is pointed upward and the portable lighting device is rotated to the left along the projected main axis of the light source. The portable lighting device is set to the left hand. configuration. Thus, the cartridge or other portable lighting device can be based on a configuration process performed by the user: Gu Yi is adapted to be used by a right-handed or left-handed user.
作為一實例,-種可攜式照明裝置可經組態以使用— 操作,該可攜式照明裝置包含:一包括一光& 主電源電路、一慣性感測器及一控制器。該主電源電則 該光源電連接至該可攜式電源。該慣性感測器 穿過…個“虎輪出。該控制器可以容許該控制器控制 源電財之光源之電力流的方式電連接至該主 =電路。㈣器亦可電連接至該慣性感測器之輸出, 之r::::經程式化以基於自該慣性感測器之輸出接收 之尨唬V止穿過該光源之電力流。 145907.doc •16· 201038127 *操作手電筒或可攜式照明裝置之一潛在方法為當該手電 冋或可攜式照明裝置在預定義時段内不移動時,其自動切 斷作為另一實例,自動切斷特徵可由使用者啟動或撤銷 啟動。 在另一態樣中,提供一種可再充電電池組。該可再充電 電池組包括—外殼,其具有一前端及一後端;一可再充電 電也/、位於5亥外殼内;一電路板,其位於該外殼内且包 0 肖^電路板電觸點;—前端帽蓋總成,其安裝於該外殼之 鈾縞處且包括耦接至該等前電路板電觸點之複數個前端帽 蓋電觸點,及一後端帽蓋總成,其安裝於該外殼之後端處 且包括耦接至该等後電路板電觸點之複數個後端帽蓋電觸 點。 在又一態樣中’提供一種可再充電電池組,其包括一外 殼、一可再充電電池及一加速計。 在又一態樣中’提供一種可攜式照明裝置,其包含上述 Q 類型之可再充電電池組。 在另一態樣中’提供一種可再充電電池組,其包括一外 设、一可再充電電池及一用以提供羅盤功能之磁控管。 在另一態樣中,提供一種電池盒,該電池盒包括一前外 • 殼;一後外殼;至少一後外殼電觸點,其在該電池盒之一 端處設置負電極;及一中央連接器,其耦接該前外殼及該 後外殼且在該電池盒之兩端處設置正電極。當該前外殼及 該後外殼接合時形成複數個槽(bay)。 根據另一態樣,提供一種可攜式照明裝置,其包含一電 145907.doc •17· 201038127 池盒。 自結合附圖考慮之以下描述,將更好地理解本發明之其 他態樣、目標及所要特徵及優點,在附圖中藉由實例來說 明所揭示之發明的各種實施例。“,應清楚地理解該 等圖式僅用於達成說明之目的且並非意欲作為對本發明二 限制的界定。 【實施方式】 現將參看圖式描述實施例。為促進描述,表示_圖中之 -元件的任何參考數字在任何其他圖巾將表示相同元件。 此外’在以下描述中,對—組件之前部、前方或朝前側之 參考應大體上意謂該組件之面向手電筒或其他可攜式照明 裝置之前端的一側。同樣地’對一組件之後部、背部、後 方或朝後侧之參考應大體上意謂該組件之面向可攜式照明 裝置之後部(例如,尾部帽蓋位於手電筒之殼中之方向)的 一侧0 結合圖1至圖ιοί及圖u至圖19D描述例示性手電筒丨〇〇、 300。例示性手電筒1〇〇、3〇〇中之每一者併有許多不同態 樣。雖然此等不同態樣全部已以各種組合併入至手電筒 100、300中’但本發明之範轉不限於本文中所描述之手電 筒100、300。實情為,本發明係針對在下文個別地及以各 種組合描述之手電筒〗00、3〇〇的發明特徵中之每一者。此 外’如對於熟習此項技術者而言在審閱本發明之後將變得 顯而易見’本發明之-或多個態樣亦可併入至包括⑽如) 頭燈及提燈之其他可攜式照明裝置中。 145907.doc 201038127 圖1展示例示性手電筒1 〇〇。該例示性手電筒丨〇〇大體上 包括筒身124、位於筒身124之前端處之頭部總成1〇4及位 於筒身124之後端處之開關及尾部帽蓋總成1〇6。該頭部總 . 成104圍繞筒身124之前端安置,且該開關及尾部帽蓋總成 106封閉筒身124之後端。 圖2為沿由102-102所指示之平面所截取的圖手電筒 100之部分橫截面圖。圖3為穿過由1〇2_1〇2所指示之平面 ❹戶 =取的圖^之手電筒⑽之前區段的放大部分橫截面圖。 (橫截面中未展示與電池組13〇相關之圖2至圖4之部分。) 參看圖2及圖3,一光源101安裝至該筒身124之前端。在 本實施例中,該光源101經安裝以使得其安置於反射器ιΐ8 之後端處。在其他實施例中,可省略該反射器118,或其 形狀改變。 筒身124為適用於收容一可攜式電源(諸如,可再充電電 池組130)之空心管狀結構。因此,筒身124充當一外殼, 〇 其用於收納一具有正電極及負電極之可攜式電源。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身124經大小設計以容納一電 池組130,該電池組130含有單一鋰離子電池。然而,在其 他實施例中,代替該可再充電電池組13〇,可使用各種大 小之一或多個鹼性乾電池或其他類型之可再充電電池。因 此,筒身124可經大小設計以容納所要大小之電池組或其 他電源。此外,若採用複數個電池,則取決於實施方案, 其可並聯或串聯地電連接。此外,亦可使用其他適當可攜 式電源,包括(例如)高容量儲存電容器。 145907.doc -19· 201038127 在所說明之實施例中,筒身124包括一前部分125,其在 、’且〇頭。卩及面部帽蓋112下延伸以使得該頭部總成104之外 ,面與該筒身124之外表面大體上齊平。該前部分Π5之内 一】於該同身124之剩餘部分之内徑。且,該前部分125之 外裎可小於該筒身124之剩餘部分之外徑,以使得當組裝 手電疴100時,組合頭部及面部帽蓋i i 2之外部部分及筒身 124之外部部分可形成大體上均一圓柱表面。或者,組合 頭部及面部帽蓋112及筒身124可具有不同形狀。 筒身124較佳由鋁製成,但可使用其他適當材料。在筒 身形成手電筒之導電路徑之一部分的某些實施例中,較佳 茼身124及其他組件包含導電材料或包括導電路徑。在其 他實施例(諸如下文結合手電筒100所描述之實施例)中,筒 身124不需要形成主電源電路之一部分。在此實施例中, 琦身124可由金屬或非金屬(例如,塑膠)材料製成。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身124包括在其前部分125之外 位上之外螺紋174及在其後端之内徑上之内螺紋丨3丨(最佳 見於圖4中)。本實施例之筒身124亦包括形成於前部分125 之後端處之環形肩狀物182。環形肩狀物182充當安置於該 筒身124之月I』端中之肩式環(shoulder ring)126的止件。 同身124可包括沿其長度之一部分的一或多個刻花表面 1〇8。該刻花表面可輔助使用者抓持筒身124。在本實施例 中’刻t表面10 8可藉由拉削提供或者可由機械加工滾花 或其他製程形成。任何所要圖案均可用於刻花表面1〇8。 圖5A為圖1之手電筒100之頭部總成104、筒身ι24及其他 145907.doc •20· 201038127 組件的分解透視圖。 參看圖3及圖5A,本實施例之頭部總成104包括組合頭部 及面部帽蓋112、透鏡116及反射器118。 組合頭部及面部帽蓋112之内表面可用於收容某些組 件’包括(例如)透鏡116及反射器118。反射器U8及透鏡 116操作性地安裝至該組合頭部及面部帽蓋112之内徑。在 本實施例中,反射器118包括自其前端延伸之彈簧夾片177 〇 以使得反射器118可搭扣至形成於組合頭部及面部帽蓋丄i 2 之内部部分之前端附近的相應環形凹部117中。在環形凹 部117之後端處設置環形肩狀物119以一旦彈簧夾片177擴 展至環形凹部117中便將反射器118附接至該組合頭部及面 部帽蓋112。透鏡116介入於反射器118之面向前之凸緣與 該組合頭部及面部帽蓋丨丨2之向内捲之唇緣之間。以此方 式,反射器118及透鏡116鎖定於該組合頭部及面部帽蓋 112 内。 〇 反射器U8可包括圍繞反射器118之外周邊分布之翼片 176以將結構完整性提供至反射器118且幫助在筒身124之 前部分125之内表面内適當對準反射器118。 組合頭部及面部帽蓋112可包括内螺紋172,其經組態以 與筒身124之前端上之外螺紋174嚙合。然而,在其他實施 方案中,可採用其他形式之附接。組合頭部及面部帽蓋 112較佳由陽極氧化鋁製成,但可使用其他適當材料。 諸如〇形環114之密封元件可位於組合頭部及面部帽蓋 112與透鏡116之間的界面處以提供不透水密封。亦可使用 145907.doc •21 - 201038127 諸如單向闊之其他防水構件。0形環114可包含橡膠或其他 適當材料。 如最佳見於圖3及圖5Α中,反射器118之反射輪廓121較 佳為經金屬化以確保高精度光學性質之一段電腦產生之最 佳抛物線。在一實施例中,該輪廓121可由具有小於0.080 英对且更佳在0.020英吋與0〇5〇英吋之間的焦距之抛物線 界定。此外’在界定輪廓12 i之抛物線之頂點與反射器U8 之後開口之間的距離可為〇 〇8〇至〇 13〇英吋,且更佳為 0.105至0.115英吋。該反射器U8之前端之開口可具有〇7 至0.8英时且更佳〇741至0.743英付之直徑,且該反射器 Π8之後端之開口可具有〇 2至〇 3英吋且更佳〇 24〇至〇 25〇 英叫·之直徑。此外,自頂點至反射器118之後端之開口之 距離與焦距之間的比率可在1 5 ··丨及6.5:1之範圍内,且更佳 為3.0:1至3.4:1。此外’自頂點至反射器Π8之前端之開口 之距離與焦距之間的比率可在及4〇:丨之範圍内,且更 佳為26·· 1至3 1:1。應注意此等值僅為實例,且稍後提供其 他值。 反射器118較佳包含射出成形之塑膠,但可使用其他適 當材料。 返回參看圖3 ’雖然本文中所揭示之實施例說明大體上 平坦之透鏡116 ’但該手電筒ι〇〇替代地可包括具有彎曲表 面以進一步改良該手電筒100之光學效能之透鏡。舉例而 言’該透鏡可在整個或部分透鏡表面中包括雙凸輪廓或平 凸輪廓。 145907.doc -22- 201038127 /看囷及圖5A,〇形環122可在組合頭部及面部帽蓋I】〗 與简身124之前部分125之間的界面處位於設置於筒身⑶ 之外表面中之環形凹槽123中以提供不透水密封。亦可使 • 用諸如單向閥或唇緣密封件之其他防水構件。 本實施例之手電筒1〇〇包括安裝於筒身124之前端處之肩 式環126内的燈模組128以使得光源ι〇ι安置於反射器ιΐ8之 後鈿處燈模組128可具有投射主軸11〇,其可與手電筒 ❹ ⑽之反射器軸及/或縱軸重合。蓉於以上配置,自燈模組 128發射之光之焦點可藉由相對於筒身124扭轉頭部總成 104來調整,該扭轉可由配合之螺紋172、174提供。燈模 組128之光源1〇1包括經由第二電路板135與可壓縮正觸點 133(見圖3及圖20)電連通之第一正電極及與散熱片外殼188 電連通之第二負電極,該散熱片外殼188亦充當燈模組128 之負觸點。 該光源101可為產生光之任何適當裝置。舉例而言該 Q 光源1〇1可為LED燈、白熾燈或弧光燈。在所說明之實施 例中,该光源1 〇 1為LED燈且燈模組128為led模組。燈模 組128之LED 137(圖20)較佳大體上以小於18〇。之球面角輻 射出光。在其他實施例令,可使用具有其他輻射角之 LED’包括以大於180。之角輻射之led。 可用於燈模組12 8之LED模組之結構詳細描述於Anth〇ny Maglica之同在申請中之美國專利申請案第12/188,2〇1號 中’該申請案之内容以引用的方式併入本文中。 圖20為單獨的燈或LED模組128之橫截面圖。圖2〇中所 145907.doc -23· 201038127 示之橫截面圖以相對於圖3中所示之橫戴面圖之9〇。截取。 本實施例之燈模組128包括一作為光源1〇1之LED 137、一 第一電路板139、一由可壓縮正觸點133及下方絕緣體ι29 形成之下方總成141、該第二電路板135、一由上方絕緣體 145及上方正觸點ίο及上方負觸點155(見圖3)形成之上方 總成143及一由外部散熱片外殼188及接觸環151形成之散 熱片149’該接觸環151較佳由金屬製成。 參看圖3及圖20,多餘起見,該可壓縮正觸點133較佳包 括用於與第二電路板135電接觸之兩個夾片153,該等夾片 153中之者在圖20中所提供之橫截面圖中在頁面之前移 位。該第二電路板135與上方正觸點147及上方負觸點或接 地觸點155(見圖3)電接觸,該等觸點較佳焊接連接至該第 一電路板139之底側。多餘起見,該上方正觸點147較佳包 括兩個夾片157,該等夾片157中之一者在圖2〇中所提供之 視圖中在頁面之前移位。上方接地觸點亦包㈣於與該第 二電路板135電接觸之兩個夾片157,該等夾片157中之一 者在圖2G中所示之上方正觸點之夾片157之後移位且該等 爽片m中之-者在圖2〇中所提供之視圖中在頁面之前移 位。該上方正觸點147經由該第一電路板139與led Η?之 正電極電連通且該上方接地觸點經由該第__電路板⑼與 該散熱片149電連通。 、 —该LED 137及該散熱片149較佳經由烊接連接附著至該第 —電路板139。該第-電路板139促進自該咖137至該散 熱片⑽之快速且有效率的熱傳遞,該第—電路板139較佳 1459〇7.doc -24- 201038127 為具有由熱介孔連接之複數個導熱層之金屬包層電路板。 該LED 137可為可焊接至印刷電路板之任何發光二極 體。較佳地,該LED 137可使用網版塗覆焊膏及回焊爐而 焊接至該第一電路板139。更佳地,該LED 137為可購自As an example, a portable lighting device can be configured to use-operate, the portable lighting device comprising: a light & main power circuit, an inertial sensor, and a controller. The main power source is electrically connected to the portable power source. The inertial sensor passes through a "tiger wheel. The controller can allow the controller to control the power flow of the source of the source money to be electrically connected to the main = circuit. (4) the device can also be electrically connected to the The output of the sexy sensor, r:::: is programmed to receive power flow through the light source based on the output from the output of the inertial sensor. 145907.doc •16· 201038127 * Operation flashlight or One potential method of portable lighting devices is that when the flashlight or portable lighting device does not move for a predefined period of time, its automatic cutoff is another example, and the automatic cutoff feature can be initiated or deactivated by the user. In another aspect, a rechargeable battery pack is provided. The rechargeable battery pack includes a housing having a front end and a rear end, and a rechargeable battery also located in the 5 hoist housing; a board, which is located within the housing and includes a circuit board electrical contact; a front end cap assembly mounted to the uranium weir of the housing and including a plurality of electrical contacts coupled to the front circuit board Front cap electrical contact, and a rear cap assembly Mounted at the rear end of the housing and including a plurality of rear end cap electrical contacts coupled to the rear circuit board electrical contacts. In yet another aspect, a rechargeable battery pack is provided that includes a A housing, a rechargeable battery, and an accelerometer. In another aspect, a portable lighting device is provided that includes the above-described Q-type rechargeable battery pack. In another aspect, 'provides a reusable The rechargeable battery pack includes a peripheral device, a rechargeable battery, and a magnetron for providing a compass function. In another aspect, a battery case is provided, the battery case including a front outer case; a rear housing; at least one rear housing electrical contact, wherein a negative electrode is disposed at one end of the battery case; and a central connector coupled to the front housing and the rear housing and disposed at both ends of the battery box The electrode forms a plurality of bays when the front outer casing and the rear outer casing are joined. According to another aspect, a portable lighting device is provided, which comprises an electric 145907.doc • 17· 201038127 pool box. The drawings consider the following description, The various embodiments of the disclosed invention are described by way of example in the accompanying drawings in the claims. The description is for the purpose of illustration and not as a limitation of the invention. [Embodiment] Embodiments will now be described with reference to the drawings. To facilitate the description, any reference numeral of the element in the <RTI ID=0.0> </ RTI> </ RTI> figure will represent the same element in any other figure. Further, in the following description, reference to the front, front or front side of the assembly shall generally mean the side of the assembly facing the front end of the flashlight or other portable lighting device. Similarly, reference to the rear, back, rear or rear side of a component should generally mean that the component is facing the rear of the portable lighting device (eg, the direction in which the tail cap is located in the casing of the flashlight). Side 0 An exemplary flashlight 丨〇〇, 300 is described in conjunction with FIGS. 1 through ιοί and FIGS. u through 19D. Each of the exemplary flashlights 1〇〇, 3〇〇 has many different aspects. While all of these different aspects have been incorporated into the flashlights 100, 300 in various combinations, the invention is not limited to the flashlights 100, 300 described herein. In fact, the present invention is directed to each of the inventive features of the flashlights 00, 3, described individually and in various combinations below. Further, 'as will become apparent to those skilled in the art after reviewing the present invention' - or a plurality of aspects of the present invention may also be incorporated into other portable lighting including (10) such as headlamps and lanterns. In the device. 145907.doc 201038127 FIG. 1 shows an exemplary flashlight 1 〇〇. The exemplary flashlight cartridge generally includes a barrel 124, a head assembly 1〇4 at a forward end of the barrel 124, and a switch and tail cap assembly 1〇6 at a rear end of the barrel 124. The head portion 104 is disposed about the front end of the barrel 124, and the switch and tail cap assembly 106 closes the rear end of the barrel 124. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flashlight 100 of the drawing taken along the plane indicated by 102-102. Fig. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a section before the flashlight (10) of Fig. 1 taken through the plane indicated by 1〇2_1〇2. (The portions of Figs. 2 to 4 associated with the battery pack 13A are not shown in the cross section.) Referring to Figures 2 and 3, a light source 101 is mounted to the front end of the barrel 124. In the present embodiment, the light source 101 is mounted such that it is placed at the rear end of the reflector ι8. In other embodiments, the reflector 118 can be omitted, or its shape can be changed. The barrel 124 is a hollow tubular structure suitable for receiving a portable power source, such as a rechargeable battery pack 130. Therefore, the barrel 124 serves as a housing for accommodating a portable power source having a positive electrode and a negative electrode. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 124 is sized to accommodate a battery pack 130 that contains a single lithium ion battery. However, in other embodiments, instead of the rechargeable battery pack 13A, one or more alkaline dry batteries of various sizes or other types of rechargeable batteries may be used. Thus, the barrel 124 can be sized to accommodate a battery pack of any desired size or other power source. Furthermore, if a plurality of batteries are employed, they may be electrically connected in parallel or in series depending on the implementation. In addition, other suitable portable power sources can be used including, for example, high capacity storage capacitors. 145907.doc -19· 201038127 In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 124 includes a front portion 125 that is at the 'and hoe'. The ankle and face cap 112 extends downwardly such that the face assembly 104 is substantially flush with the outer surface of the barrel 124. The inner portion of the front portion Π5 has an inner diameter of the remainder of the same body 124. Moreover, the outer portion 125 may be smaller than the outer diameter of the remaining portion of the barrel 124 such that when the flashlight 100 is assembled, the outer portion of the head and face cap ii 2 and the outer portion of the barrel 124 are combined. A substantially uniform cylindrical surface can be formed. Alternatively, the combination head and face cap 112 and barrel 124 can have different shapes. The barrel 124 is preferably made of aluminum, but other suitable materials can be used. In some embodiments in which the barrel forms part of the conductive path of the flashlight, it is preferred that the body 124 and other components comprise or comprise a conductive path. In other embodiments, such as the embodiments described below in connection with flashlight 100, the barrel 124 need not form part of a main power circuit. In this embodiment, the body 124 can be made of a metal or non-metal (eg, plastic) material. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 124 includes external threads 174 at the outer portion of the front portion 125 and internal threads 丨3丨 (best seen in Figure 4) on the inner diameter of the rear end thereof. The barrel 124 of the present embodiment also includes an annular shoulder 182 formed at the rear end of the front portion 125. The annular shoulder 182 acts as a stop for the shoulder ring 126 disposed in the I" end of the barrel 124. The body 124 can include one or more engraved surfaces 1 〇 8 along a portion of its length. The engraved surface assists the user in grasping the barrel 124. In the present embodiment, the 'etched surface 10' may be provided by broaching or may be formed by machining knurling or other processes. Any desired pattern can be used to engrave the surface 1〇8. 5A is an exploded perspective view of the head assembly 104, the barrel ι 24, and other 145907.doc • 20· 201038127 components of the flashlight 100 of FIG. 1. Referring to Figures 3 and 5A, the head assembly 104 of the present embodiment includes a combined head and face cap 112, a lens 116 and a reflector 118. The inner surface of the combined head and face cap 112 can be used to house certain components' including, for example, the lens 116 and the reflector 118. Reflector U8 and lens 116 are operatively mounted to the inner diameter of the combined head and face cap 112. In the present embodiment, the reflector 118 includes a spring clip 177 延伸 extending from the front end thereof such that the reflector 118 can be snapped to a corresponding ring formed near the front end of the inner portion of the combined head and face cap 丄i 2 In the recess 117. An annular shoulder 119 is provided at the rear end of the annular recess 117 to attach the reflector 118 to the combined head and face cap 112 once the spring clip 177 is expanded into the annular recess 117. Lens 116 is interposed between the forwardly facing flange of reflector 118 and the inwardly rolled lip of the combined head and face cap 丨丨2. In this manner, reflector 118 and lens 116 are locked within the combined head and face cap 112. The reflector U8 can include fins 176 distributed around the outer periphery of the reflector 118 to provide structural integrity to the reflector 118 and to assist in properly aligning the reflector 118 within the inner surface of the front portion 125 of the barrel 124. The combination head and face cap 112 can include internal threads 172 that are configured to engage external threads 174 on the forward end of the barrel 124. However, in other embodiments, other forms of attachment may be employed. The combined head and face cap 112 is preferably made of anodized aluminum, although other suitable materials may be used. A sealing element such as a beak ring 114 can be located at the interface between the combination head and face cap 112 and lens 116 to provide a watertight seal. It can also be used 145907.doc •21 - 201038127 Other waterproof components such as one-way wide. The O-ring 114 can comprise rubber or other suitable material. As best seen in Figures 3 and 5, the reflective profile 121 of the reflector 118 is preferably the best parabola produced by a computer that is metallized to ensure high precision optical properties. In an embodiment, the profile 121 may be defined by a parabola having a focal length of less than 0.080 inches and more preferably between 0.020 inches and 0 inches 5 inches. Further, the distance between the apex of the parabola defining the contour 12 i and the opening after the reflector U8 may be 〇 8 〇 to 13 〇 且, and more preferably 0.105 to 0.115 吋. The opening at the front end of the reflector U8 may have a diameter of 〇7 to 0.8 liters and more preferably 〇741 to 0.743 inch, and the opening at the rear end of the reflector Π8 may have 〇2 to 吋3 inches and is better. The diameter of 24 〇 to 〇 25 〇 English. Further, the ratio between the distance from the vertex to the opening of the rear end of the reflector 118 and the focal length may be in the range of 1 5 ··丨 and 6.5:1, and more preferably 3.0:1 to 3.4:1. Further, the ratio between the distance from the vertex to the opening of the front end of the reflector Π 8 and the focal length may be in the range of 4 〇: ,, and more preferably 26·· 1 to 3 1:1. It should be noted that these values are only examples and other values are provided later. The reflector 118 preferably comprises an injection molded plastic, but other suitable materials can be used. Referring back to Fig. 3', although the embodiments disclosed herein illustrate a substantially flat lens 116', the flashlight may alternatively include a lens having a curved surface to further improve the optical performance of the flashlight 100. By way of example, the lens may include a lenticular or convex profile in all or part of the lens surface. 145907.doc -22- 201038127 / see 囷 and Figure 5A, the 〇 ring 122 can be located outside the barrel (3) at the interface between the combined head and face cap I] and the front portion 125 of the body 124 The annular groove 123 in the surface is provided to provide a watertight seal. It can also be used with other waterproof components such as check valves or lip seals. The flashlight 1〇〇 of the present embodiment includes a lamp module 128 mounted in the shoulder ring 126 at the front end of the barrel 124 such that the light source ι〇 is disposed after the reflector ι 8 and the lamp module 128 can have a projection spindle 11〇, which coincides with the reflector axis and/or the longitudinal axis of the flashlight ❹ (10). In the above configuration, the focus of the light emitted from the lamp module 128 can be adjusted by twisting the head assembly 104 relative to the barrel 124, which can be provided by the mating threads 172, 174. The light source 101 of the lamp module 128 includes a first positive electrode in electrical communication with the compressible positive contact 133 (see FIGS. 3 and 20) via a second circuit board 135 and a second negative electrical connection with the heat sink housing 188. The heat sink housing 188 also acts as a negative contact for the lamp module 128. The light source 101 can be any suitable device that produces light. For example, the Q light source 1〇1 can be an LED light, an incandescent light or an arc light. In the illustrated embodiment, the light source 1 〇 1 is an LED light and the light module 128 is a led module. The LEDs 137 (Fig. 20) of the lamp module 128 are preferably substantially less than 18 turns. The spherical angle radiates light. In other embodiments, LEDs having other angles of radiation may be used to include greater than 180. The angle of radiation is led. The structure of the LED module that can be used in the lamp module 126 is described in detail in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/188, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Incorporated herein. 20 is a cross-sectional view of a separate lamp or LED module 128. The cross-sectional view shown in Fig. 2 145 145907.doc -23· 201038127 is 9 〇 relative to the cross-sectional view shown in Fig. 3. Intercept. The lamp module 128 of the present embodiment includes an LED 137 as a light source 101, a first circuit board 139, a lower assembly 141 formed by a compressible positive contact 133 and a lower insulator ι29, and the second circuit board. 135. An upper assembly 143 formed by the upper insulator 145 and the upper positive contact ίο and the upper negative contact 155 (see FIG. 3) and a heat sink 149' formed by the outer fin housing 188 and the contact ring 151 are in contact with each other. Ring 151 is preferably made of metal. Referring to Figures 3 and 20, for the sake of redundancy, the compressible positive contact 133 preferably includes two clips 153 for electrical contact with the second circuit board 135, the one of the clips 153 being in Figure 20 The cross-sectional view provided is shifted before the page. The second circuit board 135 is in electrical contact with the upper positive contact 147 and the upper negative contact or ground contact 155 (see Fig. 3), which are preferably soldered to the bottom side of the first circuit board 139. To the extent that the upper positive contact 147 preferably includes two clips 157, one of the clips 157 is displaced in front of the page in the view provided in Figure 2A. The upper ground contact also includes (iv) two clips 157 in electrical contact with the second circuit board 135, one of the clips 157 being moved rearwardly of the clip 157 of the upper positive contact shown in FIG. 2G. The bits in the tiles m are shifted before the page in the view provided in Figure 2〇. The upper positive contact 147 is in electrical communication with the positive electrode of the LED via the first circuit board 139 and the upper ground contact is in electrical communication with the heat sink 149 via the first circuit board (9). The LED 137 and the heat sink 149 are preferably attached to the first circuit board 139 via a splicing connection. The first circuit board 139 facilitates rapid and efficient heat transfer from the coffee 137 to the heat sink (10). The first circuit board 139 preferably has 1459 〇 7. doc - 24 - 201038127 having a thermal mesoporous connection. A metal clad circuit board of a plurality of thermally conductive layers. The LED 137 can be any light emitting diode that can be soldered to a printed circuit board. Preferably, the LED 137 can be soldered to the first circuit board 139 using a screen coated solder paste and a reflow oven. More preferably, the LED 137 is commercially available
Philips Lumileds Lighting Company,LLC 之 LUXEON®Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, LLC's LUXEON®
Rebel產品。Rebel products.
該第二電路板135包括用於驅動LED 137之電路。在本實 施例中,該第二電路板135包括線性降壓式調節電路以降 低燈模組128之驅動電壓,因為由組裝電路板24〇輸送之電 廢顯著高於LED 137之操作電壓。然而,在其他實施方案 中,該第二電路板135可包括一線性升壓式調節電路,其 用於在燈模組128之驅動電壓低於待驅動之一或多個 13 7之操作電壓時將適當電壓提供至LED i37〇換言之,第 二電路板135可取決於負載及電池電壓之需要而提供降壓 式或升壓式操作。若電池電壓高,則將執行降壓式操作。 另一方面,若電池電壓低,則將執行升壓式操作。在一些 實施方案中’最初可執行降壓式操作,而在電池之電壓: 降低至低於某位準之後提供升壓式操作。 該下方總成141較佳藉由將可壓縮正觸點133及下方絕 體129共同模製在—起而形成。同樣地,該上方總成⑷較 =糟由將上方、絕緣體145及上方正觸點147及上方負㈣ 、同模製在一起而形成。因此,上方絕緣體及下方絕 緣體較佳由具有適合於該應用之結構及熱品質之可射出成 形塑膠形成。 J耵出成 145907.doc •25- 201038127 該上方總成143之上方正觸點及負觸點焊接至該第一電 路板139之底部,該第一電路板139之前側又焊接至接觸環 151,該接觸環151可壓入裝配及/或焊接至散熱片外殼 188。因此,在本實施例中,該上方總成143牢固地固持於 散熱片外殼188内。此外,散熱片外殼188之圓周捲曲至該 下方絕緣體129之環形凹部161中。將散熱片外殼188捲曲 至裱形凹部161中會將下方絕緣體129且因此將下方總成 141固持於散熱片外殼188内。 當手電筒1〇〇處於接通狀態中時,該散熱片外殼188熱耦❹ 接且電耦接該光源101及該肩式環126。另外,該散熱片外 殼188將該第二電路板135之接地路徑電耦接至該肩式環 126。該散熱片外殼188因此充當該燈模組128之負觸點或 接地觸點。此外,藉由如圖3中所示配置散熱片外殼188以 使付其與該肩式環126良好熱接觸(該肩式環126如下更全 面也解釋又與筒身124良好熱接觸),當該手電筒1〇1接通 時,由該光源ιοί產生之熱由該第一電路板139有效地吸收 及/或散逸至接觸環151、散熱片外殼188、肩式環126且最〇 終散逸至筒身124。因此,手電筒1〇1能夠有效地保護光源 ιοί免遭歸因於熱而損壞。較佳地,該散熱片外殼188由良. 好電與熱導體(諸如,鋁)製成。 · 違散熱片外殼1 88經形成以使得其在區域169中朝向該燈 模組m之背部或底部自具有第一直徑之第一區域163張開 至具有第二較大直徑之第二區域167。該第一區域163之直 徑經大小設計以使得該第_區域可緊密裝配於肩式環126 145907.doc -26 - 201038127 之環形唇緣186内,同時與其熱接觸。該環形唇緣186之面 向後之表面形成接觸表面丨87。該下方絕緣體i 29及該散熱 片外殼188之外桎經大小設計以使得在徑向上在該肩式環 126之内壁與該下方絕緣體129及該散熱片外殼188之間幾 乎無遊隙。以此方式,當在肩式環126内向前推動燈模組 128足夠遠以使得該散熱片外殼188之張開區域169與該環 形唇緣186之接觸表面187接觸時,該散熱片外殼188將分 ❹ 別在第一、第二及張開區域163、167、169中與肩式環126 熱接觸且電接觸。 該散熱片外殼188之外表面亦包括在該第一直徑之區域 163中之環形凹部171。該環形凹部m大體上垂直於該散 熱片及該筒身124之軸。另外,該環形凹部i 7丨經定位以在 該燈模組128在肩式環126中安裝於筒身124之前端内時收 納保持套環(retaining collar)120之鎖定突出部173(見圖 20A) 〇 Q 該散熱片外殼1 88之張開區域1 69較佳經形狀設計以沿儘 可能多的表面積與接觸表面187配合以促進在該燈模組ι28 與該肩式環126之間的電及熱連通。該散熱片外殼188之張 開區域169亦經大小設計以使得一旦安置於該肩式環126 中’該散熱片外殼188及因此該燈模組128在前向上之軸向 移動將由該肩式環126之環形唇緣186限制。 該下方絕緣體129包括在其背面175處之凹部178,其由 一環形肩狀物179圍繞以使得該凹部在中央定位。該凹部 178經尺寸設計以深於電池組13〇之頂部正觸點21仆之高 145907.doc -27- 201038127 度。然而,如圖2及圖3中所示,當抵靠該下方絕緣體i 29 之月.面1 7 5向肖I)推進该電池組13 0時,該電池組13 〇之頂部 正觸點214b與該可壓縮正觸點133嚙合。以此方式,該燈 模組128提供一簡單組態,其即使在該手電筒震動或落下 (其了使該電池組13 0突然在該筒身丨2 4内轴向移位)時仍增 強組件之間的電耦接。此外,因為該可壓縮正觸點丨33可 吸收歸因於(例如)誤操作所致之衝擊應力且凹部1 78深於電 池組13 0之頂部正觸點214b,所以在使用該手電筒1〇〇期間 良好保護該電池組13 〇及其在以下論述之電子器件免受實 體損壞。 且’因為可壓縮正觸點133安置在背面175之肩狀物179 的前方,所以若電池組13〇向後插入至該筒身124中,則不 形成與可壓縮正觸點133之電耦接。所以,該燈模組128之 組態及其在筒身i 24内之配置將幫助保護該手電筒之電子 器件免受反向電流影響或損壞。 保持套環120附接至該燈模組128之散熱片外殼188,且 尤其在自手電筒100移除電池組130時限制該燈模組128在 向後方向上之軸向移動。該保持套環120在該散熱片外殼 1 8 8之環形凹部i 7 i處附接至該燈模組丨2 8。 參看圖3、圖20A及圖20B,該保持套環12〇包括圓周鎖 疋犬出部173,其自該保持套環12〇之内表面向内突出;及 肋狀物181,其自該保持套環12〇之外表面向外突出。參看 圖3,該等鎖定突出部181中之每一者經大小設計以裝配至 «玄散熱片外殼1 88之外部上之環形凹部丨7丨中。複數個肋狀 145907.doc •28· 201038127 物m較佳圍繞該保持套環12〇之外圓周等距離隔開以便大 體上在該保持套環120之軸向上延伸。該等肋狀物181較佳 自該保持套環之前部延伸至稍微超過保持套環12〇之一半 #向長度。該等肋狀物181經尺寸設計以便將該燈模組128 之前端與該肩式環126之内徑之間的徑向遊隙之量限於所 要量。該等肋狀物181亦較佳經尺寸設計以自保持套環12〇 向外突出達相同於或大於與該等鎖定突出部173向内突出 ❹ 之距離的距離。藉由僅使該等肋狀物延伸至約該保持套環 120之中部,該保持套環12〇之後端183可在該肩式環内 在該散熱片外殼188之外表面上充分擴展直至圓周鎖定突 出部173搭扣至環形凹部171中為止(見圖3) ^ 一旦該等圓周 鎖定突出部173搭扣至環形凹部171中,該燈模組128之向 後移動便由該環形唇緣186限定。因此,藉由將該保持套 環120緊固至安置於該肩式環126中之燈模組128,在無安 裝於該手電筒100中之電池組13〇的情況下,該保持套環 ❹ 12〇阻止該燈模組128下降至該筒身124之後部並有可能自 該手電筒100之後端掉出。在較佳實施例中,該保持套環 120由諸如塑膠之絕緣體製成。 • 參看圖3’該肩式環Ϊ26形成大散熱片。此外,因為其具 ; 有大體上大於燈模組128之質量的質量,所以其快速將熱 自燈模組128之散熱片149引開。最終,將由肩式環126引 開之熱有效率地引至筒身124中,因為筒身124及肩式環 126較佳地在肩式環126之減小之直徑之前區域丨89中處於 密切金屬對金屬接觸。肩式環126可由金屬製成,且更佳 145907.doc -29- 201038127 由鍍鎳#呂製成以達成增強之熱性質、電性質及对姓性質。 肩式環126包括形成於減小之直徑之前區域1 89與增加之 直役之後區域191之界面處的肩狀物18〇。該前區域up包 括複數個鍵槽193 ’如最佳見於圖5A中。鍵槽193較佳圍繞 肩式環126之前區域189之一部分的圓周等距離隔開以便大 體上在肩式環126之軸向上延伸。肩式環126之前區域189 之外徑經尺寸設計以使得其將提供與筒身124之前部分125 之内壁的干涉裝配且使得當肩式環126壓入裝配至該筒身 124之前部分I25中時鍵槽193將切入至筒身1以之前部分 125之内壁中。 當肩式環126壓入裝配至筒身124之前部分125中時,鍵 槽193將斜削(splay)且切入至筒身ι24之前部分ι25之内徑 上的金屬中。鄰近於肩狀物126上之鍵槽193之前端及後端 »又置形釋放凹槽(annular relief groove)以自在壓入裝配 操作期間移位之筒身124收納金屬。以此方式,肩式環} % 永久鎖定於與筒身124之前部分125之金屬對金屬接觸中。 肩式環126之後區域191之直徑稍微小於筒身ι24之後部 分之内徑以使得其可容易地在筒身124内滑動而不損壞任 何保護塗層(諸如’由陽極氧化處理製程產生)。 以上配置亦為所要的,因為該等鍵槽193將切開設置於 筒身124之内部上之任何陽極氧化塗層,藉此如(例如)結合 以下所述之手電筒300而描述提供將筒身用作接地路徑的 可能性,而不必須進行切皮以移除陽極氧化物或在陽極氧 化處理之前遮蔽接觸區(以往在銘手電筒之情況下需要如 145907.doc •30· 201038127 此)。 例中肩式環126、燈模纽128及頭部總成 104不形成手電筒_之機械開關之一部分,但在其他實施 例中其可形成機械開關之一部分,如(例如)在由— 伽於卿年1月14日巾請之美國專财請案㈣353,396 號中所描述’該案之内容以引用的方式併人本文中。 燈模組12 8如下雪說4* e * λ*- 耦接至手電湾100。手電筒1〇〇可包括The second circuit board 135 includes circuitry for driving the LEDs 137. In the present embodiment, the second circuit board 135 includes a linear buck regulation circuit to reduce the drive voltage of the lamp module 128 because the electrical waste delivered by the assembled circuit board 24 is significantly higher than the operating voltage of the LED 137. However, in other embodiments, the second circuit board 135 can include a linear boosting adjustment circuit for when the driving voltage of the lamp module 128 is lower than the operating voltage of one or more of the 13 to be driven. The appropriate voltage is provided to the LED i37. In other words, the second circuit board 135 can provide buck or boost operation depending on the load and battery voltage requirements. If the battery voltage is high, a buck operation will be performed. On the other hand, if the battery voltage is low, a boosting operation will be performed. In some embodiments, the buck operation can be performed initially, and the boost operation is provided after the voltage of the battery: drops below a certain level. The lower assembly 141 is preferably formed by co-molding the compressible positive contact 133 and the lower permanent body 129. Similarly, the upper assembly (4) is formed by molding the upper portion, the insulator 145 and the upper positive contact 147, and the upper negative contact (4) together. Therefore, the upper insulator and the lower insulator are preferably formed of an ejectable plastic having a structure and thermal quality suitable for the application. J 耵 145 145 907.doc • 25- 201038127 The upper and lower contacts of the upper assembly 143 are soldered to the bottom of the first circuit board 139, and the front side of the first circuit board 139 is soldered to the contact ring 151. The contact ring 151 can be press fit into the assembly and/or soldered to the heat sink housing 188. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper assembly 143 is securely held within the heat sink housing 188. Further, the circumference of the fin case 188 is crimped into the annular recess 161 of the lower insulator 129. Curling the fin housing 188 into the dove recess 161 retains the lower insulator 129 and thus the lower assembly 141 within the fin housing 188. The heat sink housing 188 is thermally coupled and electrically coupled to the light source 101 and the shoulder ring 126 when the flashlight 1 is in an on state. Additionally, the heat sink housing 188 electrically couples the ground path of the second circuit board 135 to the shoulder ring 126. The heat sink housing 188 thus acts as a negative or ground contact for the light module 128. In addition, by configuring the fin housing 188 as shown in FIG. 3 to provide good thermal contact with the shoulder ring 126 (the shoulder ring 126 is more fully explained below and in good thermal contact with the barrel 124), When the flashlight 1〇1 is turned on, the heat generated by the light source ιοί is effectively absorbed and/or dissipated by the first circuit board 139 to the contact ring 151, the heat sink casing 188, the shoulder ring 126, and finally discharged to the The barrel 124. Therefore, the flashlight 1〇1 can effectively protect the light source ιοί from damage due to heat. Preferably, the heat sink housing 188 is made of a good electrical and thermal conductor such as aluminum. The defensive fin housing 1 88 is formed such that it opens from the first region 163 having the first diameter to the second region 167 having the second larger diameter toward the back or bottom of the lamp module m in the region 169 . The diameter of the first region 163 is sized such that the first region can fit tightly within the annular lip 186 of the shoulder ring 126 145907.doc -26 - 201038127 while in thermal contact therewith. The rearward surface of the annular lip 186 forms a contact surface 丨87. The lower insulator i29 and the fin housing 188 are sized to have substantially no play between the inner wall of the shoulder ring 126 and the lower insulator 129 and the fin housing 188 in the radial direction. In this manner, when the lamp module 128 is pushed forward within the shoulder ring 126 sufficiently farther that the flared region 169 of the fin housing 188 contacts the contact surface 187 of the annular lip 186, the fin housing 188 will The taps are not in thermal and electrical contact with the shoulder ring 126 in the first, second and flared regions 163, 167, 169. The outer surface of the fin housing 188 also includes an annular recess 171 in the region 163 of the first diameter. The annular recess m is substantially perpendicular to the heat sink and the shaft of the barrel 124. In addition, the annular recess i 7 is positioned to receive the locking projection 173 of the retaining collar 120 when the lamp module 128 is mounted in the front end of the barrel 124 in the shoulder ring 126 (see FIG. 20A). 〇Q The flared region 1 69 of the heat sink housing 88 is preferably shaped to cooperate with the contact surface 187 along as much surface area as possible to facilitate electrical communication between the light module ι 28 and the shoulder ring 126 And hot connection. The flared region 169 of the heat sink housing 188 is also sized such that once disposed in the shoulder ring 126, the heat sink housing 188 and thus the axial movement of the light module 128 in the forward direction will be by the shoulder ring The annular lip 186 of 126 is limited. The lower insulator 129 includes a recess 178 at its back side 175 that is surrounded by an annular shoulder 179 such that the recess is centrally positioned. The recess 178 is sized to be deeper than the top positive contact 21 of the battery pack 13 145907.doc -27- 201038127 degrees. However, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, when the battery pack 130 is advanced against the moon 1 surface of the lower insulator i 29, the top positive contact 214b of the battery pack 13 Engaged with the compressible positive contact 133. In this manner, the light module 128 provides a simple configuration that enhances the assembly even when the flashlight vibrates or falls (which causes the battery pack 130 to suddenly shift axially within the barrel 丨 24) Electrical coupling between. In addition, since the compressible positive contact port 33 can absorb the impact stress due to, for example, erroneous operation and the recess 1 78 is deeper than the top positive contact 214b of the battery pack 130, the flashlight 1 is used. The battery pack 13 and its electronics discussed below are protected from physical damage during the period. And because the compressible positive contact 133 is disposed in front of the shoulder 179 of the back side 175, if the battery pack 13 is inserted backward into the barrel 124, no electrical coupling with the compressible positive contact 133 is formed. . Therefore, the configuration of the lamp module 128 and its configuration within the barrel i 24 will help protect the electronics of the flashlight from reverse currents or damage. The retaining collar 120 is attached to the fin housing 188 of the lamp module 128, and in particular limits the axial movement of the lamp module 128 in the rearward direction when the battery pack 130 is removed from the flashlight 100. The retaining collar 120 is attached to the lamp module 丨28 at the annular recess i7i of the fin housing 186. Referring to Figures 3, 20A and 20B, the retaining collar 12 includes a circumferential lock dog out 173 that projects inwardly from the inner surface of the retaining collar 12; and a rib 181 that retains therefrom The outer surface of the collar 12 向外 protrudes outward. Referring to Fig. 3, each of the locking projections 181 is sized to fit into an annular recess 丨7丨 on the exterior of the stencil fin housing 188. A plurality of ribs 145907.doc • 28· 201038127 The objects m are preferably equally spaced around the outer circumference of the retaining collar 12〇 to extend generally in the axial direction of the retaining collar 120. The ribs 181 preferably extend from the front portion of the retaining collar to slightly more than one half of the length of the retaining collar 12〇. The ribs 181 are sized to limit the amount of radial play between the front end of the lamp module 128 and the inner diameter of the shoulder ring 126 to a desired amount. The ribs 181 are also preferably sized to project outwardly from the retaining collar 12A to a distance equal to or greater than the distance from the inwardly projecting turns of the locking projections 173. By extending only the ribs into the middle of the retaining collar 120, the retaining collar 12's rear end 183 can be fully expanded over the outer surface of the fin housing 188 within the shoulder ring until circumferentially locked The projection 173 is snapped into the annular recess 171 (see FIG. 3). Once the circumferential locking projections 173 are snapped into the annular recess 171, the rearward movement of the light module 128 is defined by the annular lip 186. Therefore, by fastening the retaining collar 120 to the lamp module 128 disposed in the shoulder ring 126, the retaining collar ❹ 12 without the battery pack 13 installed in the flashlight 100 The lamp module 128 is prevented from descending to the rear of the barrel 124 and may fall out from the rear end of the flashlight 100. In the preferred embodiment, the retaining collar 120 is formed from an insulator such as plastic. • Referring to Figure 3', the shoulder ring 26 forms a large heat sink. In addition, because it has a mass that is substantially greater than the mass of the lamp module 128, it quickly diverts the heat sink 149 from the lamp module 128. Finally, the heat drawn by the shoulder ring 126 is efficiently introduced into the barrel 124 because the barrel 124 and the shoulder ring 126 are preferably in close metal in the region 丨89 before the reduced diameter of the shoulder ring 126. Contact with metal. The shoulder ring 126 can be made of metal, and more preferably 145907.doc -29- 201038127 is made of nickel plated to achieve enhanced thermal, electrical, and surname properties. The shoulder ring 126 includes a shoulder 18〇 formed at the interface of the reduced diameter front region 1 89 and the increased immediate post-operation region 191. The front region up includes a plurality of keyways 193' as best seen in Figure 5A. The keyway 193 is preferably equally spaced about the circumference of a portion of the region 189 of the shoulder ring 126 to extend generally axially of the shoulder ring 126. The outer diameter of the front region 189 of the shoulder ring 126 is sized such that it will provide an interference fit with the inner wall of the front portion 125 of the barrel 124 and such that when the shoulder ring 126 is press fit into the portion I25 prior to the barrel 124 The keyway 193 will cut into the inner wall of the barrel portion 1 in the front portion 125. When the shoulder ring 126 is press fit into the front portion 125 of the barrel 124, the keyway 193 will be splayed and cut into the metal on the inner diameter of the portion ι25 before the barrel ι24. The front and rear ends of the keyway 193 adjacent to the shoulder 126 are again shaped to form a metal to accommodate metal from the body 124 displaced during the press-fit assembly operation. In this manner, the shoulder ring is permanently locked in metal-to-metal contact with the portion 125 of the barrel 124. The diameter of the region 191 after the shoulder ring 126 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear portion of the barrel ι 24 so that it can easily slide within the barrel 124 without damaging any protective coating (such as 'produced by an anodizing process). The above arrangement is also desirable because the keyways 193 will cut open any anodized coating placed on the interior of the barrel 124, thereby providing for the use of the barrel as described, for example, in connection with the flashlight 300 described below. The possibility of a grounding path, without having to cut the skin to remove the anodic oxide or to mask the contact area before the anodizing process (previously in the case of a flashlight, 145907.doc • 30· 201038127). The shoulder ring 126, the lamp die 128, and the head assembly 104 do not form part of the mechanical switch of the flashlight, but in other embodiments they may form part of a mechanical switch, such as, for example, by - gamma On January 14th of the Qing Dynasty, please refer to the US Special Accounts (4) No. 353,396. The content of the case is quoted in this article. The lamp module 12 8 is coupled to the flashlight 100 as follows: 4* e * λ*-. Flashlight 1〇〇 can include
可再充電電池組13〇’其包括電麵接至燈模組128之可壓縮 正觸點133之頂部正觸點214b。在電流傳遞穿過光源之 後,接地連接自該光源之負電極延伸穿過充當燈模組⑶ 之負觸點的散熱片外殼188及又電耦接至充當電池組13〇之 負電極之外環頂部觸點212的肩式環126。 圖4為牙過由102-1 〇2所指示之平面所截取的圖丄之手電 筒1〇〇之後區段的放大部分橫截面圖。(然而,在圖4中, 橫截面中未展示電池組13〇。)手電筒1〇〇之後區段大體上 包含開關及尾部帽蓋總成106。圖5B為開關及尾部帽蓋總 成106之分解透視圖。 參看圖4及圖5B,本實施例之開關及尾部帽蓋總成j 〇6較 佳包括扣環132、下方開關外殼134、接觸接腳136、138、 140、接觸接腳彈簧142、144、146、156、158、電路板 148、波形彈簧15〇、扣罩152、致動器154、上方開關外殼 、唇緣密封件162、内尾部帽蓋區段164、充電環166、 開關埠密封件168及外尾部帽蓋區段170。 下方開關外殼134較佳包括三個圓柱形通道193,其對下 145907.doc -31- 201038127 方外殼134之前端開放以用於收納且固持接觸接腳i36、 138、14〇中之一者。該等通道中之每一者連接至與通道 193軸向對準之圓柱形腔室195。每一圓柱形腔室I%之直 徑大於通道直徑以使得每一腔室可在接觸接腳136、138、 140上之肩狀物與電路板148之間收納且收容壓縮中之接觸 接腳彈簧142、丨44、146中之一者,如圖示。彈簧142、 144、146用以向前推動接觸接腳136、138、14〇直至其各 別肩狀物喃合其各別腔室195之端壁。在本實施例中,下 方開關外殼134較佳包含諸如塑膠之不導電材料,但可使 用其他適當材料。接觸接腳136、138、14〇及接觸接腳彈 簧M2、144、146較佳由金屬製成以便形成稍後描述之手 電筒Π)〇之電路徑之一部分。在本實施例中,接觸接腳 136、138、140可包含諸如鋁之導電金屬,而接觸接腳彈 簧142、144、146可包含諸如琴用鋼絲之適當導電彈簧金 屬0 下方開關外殼134之通道193經組態以與電池組13〇之底 部上之觸點對準。當安裝電池組13〇時,接觸接腳136可與 電池組130之底部中央觸點27仆(圖6)對準,接觸接腳138可 與電池組130之底部中環觸點276(圖6)對準,且接觸接腳 140可與電池組130之底部外環觸點278(圖6)對準。在此組 態中,如最佳見於圖5Β中,接觸接腳丨36電耦接至下文將 描述之電池組130中之印刷電路板24〇上之(}1^1)連接。同樣 地,如圖5Β中所示,接觸接腳138電耦接至Μ〇Μ觸點,且 接觸接腳140電耦接至電池組13〇之印刷電路板24〇之 145907.doc •32· 201038127 + 5VDC觸點。 電路板148較佳包括在其兩側上之觸點。電路板148亦可 包括安排路線穿過板丨4 8以耦接相對側上之觸點之導電介 孔。電路板148之前側(其面向下方開關外殼134)包括三個 接觸墊(圖7中標記為(^;〇、M〇M及+5VD 盆 接至接觸接聊彈黃—、146。電路板148之後:: 面向上方開關外殼16〇)包括三個相應接觸墊,其對應於 GNI^、厘⑽及+5 VDC且位於指定位置處。電路板148之前 側及後侧上之每一對相應觸點經由設置於電路板丨4 8中之 導電介孔或者安排路線之線電連接。 〇 上方開關外殼16〇包括一圓柱形通道197,其允許致動器 154在其内滑動。開關埠密封件168之環形緣邊固持於位於 :電筒1〇〇後端處之外尾部帽蓋170之環形唇緣199與充電 ,166之間。當使用者按壓在開關埠密封件Mg上時,致動 器154在通道197内向前移動且唾合扣罩152以使得電路板 148之後側上之M0M及GND接觸墊經由扣罩152電麵接。 當使用者釋放Μ埠密料16叫,電路板148之後側上之 MOM及GND接觸墊不再經由扣罩152電麵接。 在本實施例中,上方開關外殼16〇及致動器154較佳包含 諸如塑膠之不導電材料。開關痒密封件168較佳包含諸如 橡膠之可捷性不導電材料。扣罩152較佳包含導電彈簧金 屬。可使用其他適當材料。 145907.doc -33· 201038127 卜^充電單70之正觸點。該金屬充電觸點190可電連接 至徑向延伸至内尾部帽蓋區段164之狹槽198中之兩個耳狀 物196。耳狀物196較佳包含金屬以便形成再充電電路之導 電路徑之一部分。 較,包含不導電材料或導電材料上之不導電塗層之兩個 ”邑緣ί衣194可位於金屬充電觸點i 9〇之任一側上以防止充電 環166之導電部分(即,金屬充電觸點190及耳狀物196)電接 觸内尾部帽蓋區段164或外尾部帽蓋17〇。在本實施例中, 、、邑緣環194為模製塑膠,其較佳與充電觸點19〇共同模製。 、耳狀物196電接觸保持於形成於上方開關外殼⑽中之通 ❹之盤簧156' 158的後端。盤簧156、158之前端電連接 至電路板148之後側上之+5VDC接觸墊。如先前所描述, 電路板148之後側上之+5 VDC觸點進一步連接至電路板⑷ 之前侧上之+5VDC接觸墊。電路板148之前側上之+5VDC 接觸墊與保持於下方開關外殼Π4中之接觸接腳彈簧146接 觸。因此,充電觸點190經由充電環166之耳狀物196、彈 簧156、電路板148、接觸接腳彈簧146及接觸接腳14〇電耦 接至電池組130之底部上之+5VDC外環觸點212。 在本實施例中,充電電路之負觸點藉由内尾部帽蓋區段 164上之充電觸點192提供。包括充電觸點192之内尾部帽 蓋區段164較佳鍍鎳。雖然設置於内尾部帽蓋區段164上 (如見於圖4中),但充電觸點192形成手電筒100之外表面之 一部分。内尾部帽蓋區段164經由波形彈簧15〇電輕接至電 路板148之後側上之GND接觸墊。因此,負充電觸點192經 145907.doc -34- 201038127 由内尾部帽蓋區段164、波形彈簧150、電路板148、接觸 彈irl42及接觸接腳13@電耦接至電池纽13〇之底部上 GNDt央觸點274b。 之 如最佳見於圖4及圖5B中,充電觸點19〇、192充當外部 再充電單元與手電筒之可再充電電池組130之間的Z 面。雖然、此處未描矣會,但熟習此項技術者應瞭解,再充電 單元之底座應以與外部充電觸點19〇、192電接觸之方式形 0 成且當發生充電時將手電筒1〇〇固持於適當位置中。因為 充電觸點190、192較佳圍繞手電筒1〇〇之整個外圓周延 :申’所以可使用具有簡單底座設計之再充電單元。舉例而 3,可使用容許手電筒100以相對於其縱軸之任何徑向定 向置放至該再充電單元中且仍能夠與再充電單元之充電觸 ,:接觸的底座設計。因此,手電筒1〇〇不需要按壓至充電 單兀中以使得隱藏之插塞或突出部插入至手電筒⑽中以 便與再充電單元之充電觸點接觸。 〇 本實施例之充電觸點19〇、192較佳呈充電環之形式以簡 化再充電程序,亦即,允許將手電筒1〇〇以任何徑向定向 置放於底座中。然而,亦可制其他形式之充電觸點。 纟本實施例中’扣環132可置放於下方開關外殼134之前 ’緣與内尾部帽蓋區段164之間以防止下方開關外殼134向前 移動。 凡、乂彈簧150可3又置於電路板148之後緣與内尾部帽篕區 之裒开/唇緣之間以提供在兩者之間的可壓縮彈簧觸 ‘波开/彈簧150亦將偏壓力施加至電路板148,該電路板 145907.doc -35· 201038127 148又將偏壓力施加至下方開關外殼134,藉此用以將下方 開關外殼134按壓抵靠在扣環132上。 内尾部帽蓋區段1 6 4較佳包括在内尾部帽蓋區段i 6 4之前 部外表面上之螺紋165以用於與筒身124之後部内表面上之 螺紋131配合。 内尾部帽蓋區段164之後端201之外徑及外尾部帽蓋區段 1 70之内徑較佳經大小設計以使得外尾部帽蓋丨可永久壓The rechargeable battery pack 13'' includes a top positive contact 214b that is electrically connected to the compressible positive contact 133 of the lamp module 128. After the current is transmitted through the light source, the ground connection extends from the negative electrode of the light source through the heat sink housing 188 that acts as the negative contact of the lamp module (3) and is also electrically coupled to the outer ring that acts as the negative electrode of the battery pack 13 A shoulder ring 126 of the top contact 212. Figure 4 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of the section of the flashlight of Figure 1 taken through the plane indicated by 102-1 〇2. (However, in Figure 4, the battery pack 13A is not shown in cross section.) The flashlight 1〇〇 section generally includes the switch and tail cap assembly 106. Figure 5B is an exploded perspective view of the switch and tail cap assembly 106. Referring to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5B, the switch and tail cap assembly j 〇 6 of the present embodiment preferably includes a buckle 132, a lower switch housing 134, contact pins 136, 138, 140, contact pin springs 142, 144, 146, 156, 158, circuit board 148, wave spring 15 〇, buckle cover 152, actuator 154, upper switch housing, lip seal 162, inner tail cap section 164, charging ring 166, switch 埠 seal 168 and outer tail cap section 170. The lower switch housing 134 preferably includes three cylindrical passages 193 that are open to the front end of the lower 145907.doc -31 - 201038127 square housing 134 for receiving and retaining one of the contact pins i36, 138, 14 . Each of the channels is coupled to a cylindrical chamber 195 that is axially aligned with the channel 193. The diameter of each cylindrical chamber I% is larger than the diameter of the passage so that each chamber can be received between the shoulder on the contact pins 136, 138, 140 and the circuit board 148 and accommodates the contact spring in compression. One of 142, 丨 44, 146, as shown. Springs 142, 144, 146 are used to urge contact pins 136, 138, 14 forward until their respective shoulders mate with the end walls of their respective chambers 195. In the present embodiment, the lower switch housing 134 preferably comprises a non-conductive material such as plastic, but other suitable materials may be used. The contact pins 136, 138, 14A and the contact pin springs M2, 144, 146 are preferably made of metal to form part of the electrical path of the flashlight described later. In the present embodiment, the contact pins 136, 138, 140 may comprise a conductive metal such as aluminum, and the contact pin springs 142, 144, 146 may comprise a passage of a suitable conductive spring metal 0 lower switch housing 134, such as a piano wire. 193 is configured to align with the contacts on the bottom of the battery pack 13A. When the battery pack 13 is installed, the contact pins 136 can be aligned with the bottom center contact 27 of the battery pack 130 (FIG. 6), and the contact pins 138 can be connected to the bottom center contact 276 of the battery pack 130 (FIG. 6). Aligned, and the contact pins 140 can be aligned with the bottom outer ring contact 278 (FIG. 6) of the battery pack 130. In this configuration, as best seen in Fig. 5A, the contact pins 36 are electrically coupled to the (}1^1) connection on the printed circuit board 24 in the battery pack 130 which will be described later. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 5A, the contact pin 138 is electrically coupled to the Μ〇Μ contact, and the contact pin 140 is electrically coupled to the printed circuit board 24 of the battery pack 〇 145907.doc • 32· 201038127 + 5VDC contact. Circuit board 148 preferably includes contacts on both sides thereof. Circuit board 148 may also include conductive vias that route through the board 48 to couple the contacts on the opposite side. The front side of the circuit board 148 (which faces the lower switch housing 134) includes three contact pads (labeled as (^; 〇, M〇M and +5VD in the Figure 7 to the contact port yellow _, 146. Circuit board 148 After:: the upper facing switch housing 16) includes three corresponding contact pads corresponding to GNI^, PCT (10) and +5 VDC and located at the designated position. Each pair of corresponding contacts on the front side and the rear side of the circuit board 148 The dots are electrically connected via conductive vias or routing wires disposed in the circuit board 48. The upper switch housing 16A includes a cylindrical passage 197 that allows the actuator 154 to slide therein. The annular rim of 168 is held between the annular lip 199 of the tail cap 170 and the charge 166 at the rear end of the flashlight 1 。. When the user presses on the switch 埠 seal Mg, the actuator The 154 moves forwardly within the channel 197 and salivas the snap cover 152 such that the MOM and GND contact pads on the rear side of the circuit board 148 are electrically connected via the snap cover 152. When the user releases the adhesive 16 call, the circuit board 148 is followed. The MOM and GND contact pads on the side are no longer electrically connected via the snap cover 152. In the example, the upper switch housing 16 and the actuator 154 preferably comprise a non-conductive material such as plastic. The switch itching seal 168 preferably comprises a malleable electrically non-conductive material such as rubber. The buckle cover 152 preferably comprises a conductive spring metal. Other suitable materials may be used. 145907.doc -33· 201038127 The positive contact of the charging unit 70. The metal charging contact 190 is electrically connectable to a slot 198 that extends radially into the inner tail cap section 164. The two ears 196. The ears 196 preferably comprise metal to form part of the conductive path of the recharging circuit. In comparison, two non-conductive coatings on the non-conductive material or the conductive material are included. 194 may be located on either side of the metal charging contact i 9 以 to prevent the conductive portion of the charging ring 166 (ie, the metal charging contact 190 and the ear 196) from electrically contacting the inner tail cap section 164 or the outer tail cap In this embodiment, the rim ring 194 is a molded plastic, which is preferably molded together with the charging contact 19 。. The ear 196 is electrically contacted and held in the upper switch housing (10). The rear end of the coil spring 156' 158. The front ends of the springs 156, 158 are electrically connected to the +5 VDC contact pads on the rear side of the circuit board 148. As previously described, the +5 VDC contacts on the rear side of the circuit board 148 are further connected to the +5 VDC on the front side of the board (4). The contact pad. The +5 VDC contact pad on the front side of the circuit board 148 is in contact with the contact pin spring 146 held in the lower switch housing Π 4. Thus, the charging contact 190 passes through the ear 196 of the charging ring 166, the spring 156, the circuit The board 148, the contact pin spring 146 and the contact pin 14 are electrically coupled to the +5 VDC outer ring contact 212 on the bottom of the battery pack 130. In the present embodiment, the negative contacts of the charging circuit are provided by charging contacts 192 on the inner tail cap section 164. The inner tail cap section 164, including the charging contact 192, is preferably nickel plated. While disposed on the inner tail cap section 164 (as seen in Figure 4), the charging contacts 192 form a portion of the outer surface of the flashlight 100. The inner tail cap section 164 is electrically coupled to the GND contact pad on the rear side of the circuit board 148 via a wave spring 15 . Therefore, the negative charging contact 192 is electrically coupled to the battery button 13 via the inner tail cap section 164, the wave spring 150, the circuit board 148, the contact spring irl42, and the contact pin 13@ via 145907.doc -34- 201038127. The GNDt central contact 274b on the bottom. As best seen in Figures 4 and 5B, the charging contacts 19, 192 act as the Z-plane between the external recharging unit and the rechargeable battery pack 130 of the flashlight. Although not described here, those skilled in the art should understand that the base of the recharging unit should be formed in electrical contact with the external charging contacts 19〇, 192 and the flashlight should be turned on when charging occurs. 〇 Hold in place. Since the charging contacts 190, 192 preferably extend around the entire outer circumference of the flashlight 1 所以, a recharging unit having a simple base design can be used. For example, a base design that allows the flashlight 100 to be placed in the radial direction of its longitudinal axis and that is still capable of charging contact with the recharging unit can be used. Therefore, the flashlight 1 does not need to be pressed into the charging unit so that the hidden plug or projection is inserted into the flashlight (10) to come into contact with the charging contacts of the recharging unit. The charging contacts 19A, 192 of the present embodiment are preferably in the form of a charging ring to simplify the recharging procedure, i.e., to allow the flashlight 1 to be placed in the base in any radial orientation. However, other forms of charging contacts can be made. In the present embodiment, the retaining ring 132 can be placed between the front edge of the lower switch housing 134 and the inner tail cap section 164 to prevent the lower switch housing 134 from moving forward. The spring 150 can be placed between the trailing edge of the circuit board 148 and the split/lip edge of the inner tail cap region to provide a compressible spring contact between the two. The wave open/spring 150 will also be biased. Pressure is applied to the circuit board 148, which in turn applies a biasing force to the lower switch housing 134, thereby pressing the lower switch housing 134 against the buckle 132. The inner tail cap section 164 preferably includes threads 165 on the outer surface of the front portion of the inner tail cap section i 6 4 for mating with threads 131 on the inner surface of the rear portion of the barrel 124. The outer diameter of the inner end cap portion 164 and the outer end cap portion 1 70 are preferably sized so that the outer tail cap can be permanently pressed
入裝配至内尾部帽蓋區段164之後端2〇1上,藉此形成整體 開關及尾部帽蓋總成1 〇6。 内尾部帽蓋區段164較佳包含諸如鋁之導電材料。The assembly is fitted to the rear end 2〇1 of the inner tail cap section 164, thereby forming an integral switch and a tail cap assembly 1〇6. The inner tail cap section 164 preferably comprises a conductive material such as aluminum.
可在筒身124與開關及尾部帽蓋總成H)6之間的界面處, 置諸如唇緣密封件162之單向㈣提供不透水密封同時乂 許手電筒⑽内之過壓力排出至大氣。然而,可代替單卢 間162使用諸如°形環之其他形式之密封元件以形成不透^ 密封。唇緣密封件162較佳包含諸如橡膠之不導電材料。 丄可使用開關及尾部帽蓋總成1〇6之其他組態。舉例布 §,開關功能可包括於側面按钮開關或内部旋轉頭部總治 開關_,諸如在2〇〇Q:fci n 1/f , 〇9年1月14曰申請之美國專利申請案第 12/353,396號中所採用。 八' 現參看圖5A、圖6及圖7 I日、a· n〇 μ 圖,現進一步描述可再充電電池紐 130。大體上,電池組13 U較佳包括一可再充電電池;一電 路板’其含有諸如再充 + 2 充電電路及/或用於其他功能之電路 之電子器件丨及觸點,1田、 '' 其用以將電池組130電連接至丰雷 筒1 00或其他照明裝i 裝置之剩餘部分。因而,電池組130可大 145907.doc -36 - 201038127 體上表示自含單元,其可與圖5A中所示之其他組件一起插 入至筒身124之電池室127中。亦較佳的是,電池組13〇提 供對電子器件及其中之其他組件之保護。 如圖6中所示,電池組13〇包括前端或燈端帽蓋總成 210、電池外殼230、組裝電路板24〇、電池26〇及後部或尾 部帽蓋總成270。下文依次論述此等組件。 在本實施例中,前端或燈端帽蓋總成21〇包括前端帽蓋A one-way (four), such as lip seal 162, may be provided at the interface between the barrel 124 and the switch and tail cap assembly H) 6 to provide a watertight seal while permitting overpressure in the flashlight (10) to be vented to atmosphere. However, other forms of sealing elements such as a ring-shaped ring may be used instead of the single-lut 162 to form a seal. Lip seal 162 preferably comprises a non-conductive material such as rubber.其他 Other configurations of switch and tail cap assembly 1〇6 can be used. For example, the switch function can be included in the side button switch or the internal rotary head switch _, such as in the US Patent Application No. 12 of 2 〇〇 Q: fci n 1/f, 1 January 14, 曰Used in /353,396. 8' Referring now to Figures 5A, 6 and 7, I, n·n〇 μ, the rechargeable battery cartridge 130 will now be further described. In general, the battery pack 13 U preferably includes a rechargeable battery; a circuit board that contains electronic devices such as recharge + 2 charging circuits and/or circuits for other functions, and contacts, 1 field, ' 'It is used to electrically connect the battery pack 130 to the remainder of the Feng Lei tube 100 or other lighting device. Thus, the battery pack 130 can represent a self-contained unit, which can be inserted into the battery compartment 127 of the barrel 124, together with the other components shown in Figure 5A, on the body 145907.doc -36 - 201038127. It is also preferred that the battery pack 13 provides protection for the electronic device and other components therein. As shown in Figure 6, the battery pack 13 includes a front end or lamp end cap assembly 210, a battery housing 230, an assembled circuit board 24A, a battery 26A, and a rear or tail cap assembly 270. These components are discussed in turn below. In the present embodiment, the front end or the lamp end cap assembly 21 includes a front end cap
❹ 2U、外環頂部觸點212、通用頂部正觸點214、頂部正觸 點21 6及電池組彈簧21 8 每一觸點212、214、21 6較佳包 括如由夾片212a、214a、216a所示之電路板夾片。在組裝 時,外環頂部觸點212位於前端帽蓋21丨之外側或前側上, 而觸點2!4、216及電池組彈簧218位於前端㈣叫之内側 或後側上。 較佳以減少組裝組件所需之步驟之數目的方式製造前端 帽蓋總成21。。因此,前端帽蓋211可藉由射出成形由塑膠 或其他適當材料形《。此射出成形製程較佳包括觸點 212、214、216中之—或多者與末端帽蓋2ιι之共同模卜 亦即,觸點212、214、216可定位於射出成形機中以使得 其在所注入材料凝固時由所注入材料環繞或相對於彼此以 其他方式固持在適當位置中。因&,觸點較佳位於射出成 形機中以使得其結束在適當位置中以形成末端帽蓋總成 210及電路徑之相關部分,如稍後所描述。觸點⑴、 214、216亦可包括電路板夹片,其類似於前端帽芸中 所包括之觸點之電路板夾片。雖然上文共同模製製现程為較 145907.doc -37- 201038127 佳的,但前端帽蓋211及觸點212、214、216可藉由其他適 當手段組裝。此後,彈簧21 8可壓入裝配於設置於前端帽 蓋211之後側上之複數個保持壁之間,如同圖6中所示之在 後端帽蓋279上的保持壁271。 在組裝前端帽蓋總成210之後,其可壓入裝配至外殼230 之前端或燈端中。較佳地,末端帽蓋211及外殼230設置有 相互協作部件以將末端帽蓋211鎖定至外殼230。此等部件 可包括(例如)相對突出部290及孔29 1。其他實施例可採用 其他適當手段。 本實施例之後端或尾端帽蓋總成270包括電池組彈簧 272、底部負觸點274、内環觸點276、底部外環觸點278及 後端帽蓋279。每一觸點274、276、278可包括如由夾片 274a、276a、278a所示之電路板夾片。在組裝時,電池組 彈簧272及底部負觸點274可位於末端帽蓋279之前側或内 側上,而内環觸點276及底部外環觸點278可位於末端帽蓋 279之後側或外側上。 可如上所述共同模製後端帽蓋279及觸點274、276、278 中之一或多者,以使得該等觸點相對於彼此適當地定位以 形成末端帽蓋總成270及稍後描述之電路徑之相關部分。 或者,觸點274、276、278可藉由其他適當手段組裝。此 後,彈簧272可壓入裝配於設置於後端帽蓋279之前側上之 複數個保持壁271之間。 當組裝後端帽蓋總成270時,其可壓入裝配至外殼230之 後端或尾端中。較佳地,後端帽蓋279及外殼230設置有相 145907.doc -38- 201038127 互協作部件(諸如,相對突出部290及孔291)以將後端帽蓋 279鎖定至外殼23〇 ^此可經由在後端外殼27〇上之對應於 外设230中之孔的突出部或藉由其他適當手段發生。 础端帽蓋211及後端帽蓋279亦可包括電觸點導引件,其 位於每一末端帽蓋211、279之内側上。圖6展示後端帽蓋 279之内側上之導引件281、282、283。雖然圖6中未展 示,但前端帽蓋211可包括在其内表面上之導引件281、 ❹ 282、283。如稍後論述,此等導引件提供結構支撐且幫助 定位電觸點212、214、216、274、276、278之電路板失片 212a、214a、216a、274a、276a 及 278a以使得夾片適當地 嚙合組裝電路板240。導引件281、282、283可在射出成形 製程期間與末端帽蓋211、279鄰接地形成,或可藉由其他 適當手段附接至末端帽蓋。 電池外殼230較佳具有一外徑以裝配於手電筒之筒身 之内徑内。雖然圖中所描繪之電池外殼23〇及電池組13〇為 〇 圓柱形以適應於手電筒之筒身124,但電池組130可以其他 形狀組態以適應於不同類型之照明裝置外殼(例如,正方 形或矩形提燈)。 如圖6中所示,外殼230較佳包括圍繞其圓周或周邊延伸 之適當厚度之壁23卜壁23丨之厚度較佳足以將結構完整性 提供至總電池組130且藉此保護電子器件及其中所含有之 其他内含物。同樣地,外殼230較佳由塑膠或提供此保護 之其他足夠強之材料構造。 壁231較佳包括凹部232,其可沿外殼23〇之長度軸向延 145907.doc •39- 201038127 伸。凹部232可包括凹槽或凹口 233,其亦可沿外殼23〇之 長度軸向延伸。凹部232及凹口 233較佳經組態以(諸如)藉 由滑動裝配收納組裝電路板240。 因為組裝電路板240含有於外殼230内,所以電池26〇在 本實施例中偏心地定位以節省空間。此可藉由外殼23〇之 壁231之厚度的變化見於圖6中。如圖示,壁231之厚度在 定位組裝電路板240之位置附近增加。額外厚度允許凹部 232及凹口 233形成於壁231中。此額外厚度亦容許壁231之 内表面為圓柱形以與電池260之外表面相對應且實現適貼 裝配。且如圖示,外殼230之外表面亦為圓柱形以與手電 筒之筒身124之内徑相對應。 如上所3主明,在其他實施例中,電池组丨3 〇可以非圓柱 形組態形成以適應於非圓柱形照明裝置。若如此,則外殼 230及其壁23 1可經不同地組態以適應於電池電路板24〇以 及此等替代照明裝置之形狀。 組裝電路板240之作用區(亦即,大體上含有電子器件之 組裝電路板240之彼部分)較佳不延伸至板邊緣區241。當 組裝電路板240裝配於外殼230内時,邊緣區241較佳裝配 於凹口 233内’藉此將組裝電路板240緊固於外殼230内。 組裝電路板240包括前電觸點242a、242b、242c及後電 觸點244a、244b、244c。當組裝電池組130時,此等電觸 點電耦接至包括於前端帽蓋總成210及後端帽蓋總成270之 每一觸點上之電路板夾片以形成電池組13〇之導電路徑之 一部分。更具體言之,下文電路板夾片/電路墊連接形成 145907.doc -40- 201038127 於本實施例之電池組230中:212a/242a、216a/242b、 214a/242c及 276a/244a、274a/244b及 278a/244c。如圖 6 中 所示’母一電路板夹片包含夾持組裝電路板240之叉形 物。導引件281、282、283(及前端帽蓋211之内側上的前 端帽蓋導引件之内側上之類似導引件)可幫助定位且支撐 突出部以確保構成此等電連接且不損壞電路板夾片。❹ 2U, outer ring top contact 212, universal top positive contact 214, top positive contact 21 6 and battery spring 21 8 each contact 212, 214, 216 preferably includes, for example, clips 212a, 214a, The board clip shown in 216a. When assembled, the outer ring top contact 212 is located on the outer or front side of the front end cap 21, and the contacts 2! 4, 216 and the battery pack spring 218 are located on the inner or rear side of the front end (four). The front end cap assembly 21 is preferably manufactured in a manner that reduces the number of steps required to assemble the assembly. . Therefore, the front end cap 211 can be formed by plastic or other suitable material by injection molding. The injection molding process preferably includes - or a plurality of contacts 212, 214, 216 in common with the end cap 2, i.e., the contacts 212, 214, 216 can be positioned in the injection molding machine such that they are The injected material is surrounded by the injected material or otherwise held in place relative to each other as it solidifies. Because &, the contacts are preferably located in the injection molding machine such that they end in position to form the end cap assembly 210 and the associated portion of the electrical path, as described later. The contacts (1), 214, 216 may also include circuit board clips that are similar to the circuit board clips of the contacts included in the front end caps. Although the co-molding process described above is better than 145907.doc -37- 201038127, the front end cap 211 and the contacts 212, 214, 216 can be assembled by other suitable means. Thereafter, the spring 21 8 is press-fitted between a plurality of retaining walls provided on the rear side of the front end cap 211, like the retaining wall 271 on the rear end cap 279 shown in Fig. 6. After assembling the front end cap assembly 210, it can be press fit into the front end or the lamp end of the outer casing 230. Preferably, the end cap 211 and the outer casing 230 are provided with cooperating members to lock the end cap 211 to the outer casing 230. Such components may include, for example, opposing projections 290 and apertures 29 1 . Other embodiments may employ other suitable means. The rear or end cap assembly 270 of this embodiment includes a battery pack spring 272, a bottom negative contact 274, an inner ring contact 276, a bottom outer ring contact 278, and a rear end cap 279. Each contact 274, 276, 278 can include a circuit board clip as shown by clips 274a, 276a, 278a. When assembled, the battery pack spring 272 and the bottom negative contact 274 can be located on the front or inner side of the end cap 279, while the inner ring contact 276 and the bottom outer ring contact 278 can be located on the rear or outer side of the end cap 279. . One or more of the rear end cap 279 and the contacts 274, 276, 278 can be co-molded as described above such that the contacts are properly positioned relative to one another to form the end cap assembly 270 and later Describe the relevant part of the electrical path. Alternatively, contacts 274, 276, 278 can be assembled by other suitable means. Thereafter, the spring 272 can be press fitted between the plurality of retaining walls 271 disposed on the front side of the rear end cap 279. When the rear end cap assembly 270 is assembled, it can be press fit into the rear or rear end of the outer casing 230. Preferably, the rear end cap 279 and the outer casing 230 are provided with phase 145907.doc -38 - 201038127 inter-engaging components (such as opposing protrusions 290 and holes 291) to lock the rear end cap 279 to the outer casing 23 This may occur via a protrusion on the back end housing 27 that corresponds to a hole in the peripheral 230 or by other suitable means. The base cap 211 and the trailing cap 279 can also include electrical contact guides on the inside of each of the end caps 211, 279. Figure 6 shows the guides 281, 282, 283 on the inside of the rear end cap 279. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the front end cap 211 may include guides 281, 282, 283 on its inner surface. As discussed later, these guides provide structural support and help locate the circuit board tabs 212a, 214a, 216a, 274a, 276a, and 278a of the electrical contacts 212, 214, 216, 274, 276, 278 to cause the clips The assembled circuit board 240 is properly engaged. The guides 281, 282, 283 may be formed adjacent the end caps 211, 279 during the injection molding process, or may be attached to the end caps by other suitable means. The battery casing 230 preferably has an outer diameter for fitting into the inner diameter of the barrel of the flashlight. Although the battery housing 23 and the battery pack 13 depicted in the figures are cylindrical in shape to accommodate the barrel 124 of the flashlight, the battery pack 130 can be configured in other shapes to accommodate different types of lighting fixture housings (eg, squares) Or rectangular lanterns). As shown in FIG. 6, the outer casing 230 preferably includes a wall 23 of a suitable thickness extending around its circumference or periphery. The thickness of the wall 23 is preferably sufficient to provide structural integrity to the overall battery pack 130 and thereby protect the electronic device and Other inclusions contained therein. Similarly, outer casing 230 is preferably constructed of plastic or other sufficiently strong material that provides this protection. Wall 231 preferably includes a recess 232 that extends axially 145907.doc • 39-201038127 along the length of outer casing 23〇. The recess 232 can include a recess or recess 233 that can also extend axially along the length of the outer casing 23〇. Recess 232 and recess 233 are preferably configured to receive assembly circuit board 240, such as by sliding assembly. Since the assembled circuit board 240 is contained within the outer casing 230, the battery 26 is eccentrically positioned in this embodiment to save space. This variation of the thickness of the wall 231 by the outer casing 23 is shown in Fig. 6. As shown, the thickness of the wall 231 increases near the location where the assembled circuit board 240 is positioned. The extra thickness allows the recess 232 and the recess 233 to be formed in the wall 231. This extra thickness also allows the inner surface of the wall 231 to be cylindrical to correspond to the outer surface of the battery 260 and to achieve a snug fit. And as shown, the outer surface of the outer casing 230 is also cylindrical to correspond to the inner diameter of the barrel 124 of the flashlight. As indicated above, in other embodiments, the battery pack 丨3 〇 can be formed in a non-cylindrical configuration to accommodate non-cylindrical lighting devices. If so, the outer casing 230 and its wall 23 1 can be configured differently to accommodate the shape of the battery circuit board 24 and such alternative lighting devices. The active area of the assembled circuit board 240 (i.e., the portion of the assembled circuit board 240 that generally includes the electronic device) preferably does not extend to the board edge region 241. When the assembled circuit board 240 is assembled within the outer casing 230, the edge region 241 is preferably fitted within the recess 233' thereby securing the assembled circuit board 240 within the outer casing 230. The assembled circuit board 240 includes front electrical contacts 242a, 242b, 242c and rear electrical contacts 244a, 244b, 244c. When the battery pack 130 is assembled, the electrical contacts are electrically coupled to the circuit board clips included on each of the front end cap assembly 210 and the rear end cap assembly 270 to form a battery pack 13 One part of the conductive path. More specifically, the following board clip/circuit pad connections form 145907.doc -40- 201038127 in the battery pack 230 of the present embodiment: 212a/242a, 216a/242b, 214a/242c and 276a/244a, 274a/ 244b and 278a/244c. As shown in Figure 6, the 'parent-board clip contains a fork that grips the assembled circuit board 240. Guides 281, 282, 283 (and similar guides on the inside of the front cap guide on the inside of the front cap 211) can help position and support the tabs to ensure that such electrical connections are made and not damaged Board clips.
Ο 現參看圖6及圖7描述電池組13〇之導電路徑。如圖示, 可再充電電池260包括正端子262及負端子264。 正端子262經由電池組彈簧218、頂部正觸點216及形成 為頂部正觸點216之一部分之電路板夾片216a耦接至組裝 電路板240。電路板夾片2 16a較佳耦接至組裝電路板24〇上 之接觸墊242b。(應注意在圖7中,參考數字不展示實體組 件而替代地用於示意性指示藉此提供之電連接。) 此正路徑在電路板240上繼續至接觸墊242c,該接觸墊 242c耦接至形成為通用頂部正觸點2 14之一部分之電路板 夾片2 14a此路後穿過觸點214延伸至頂部中央正觸點 214b,在本實施例中,該頂部中央正觸點21仆為可形成為 觸點214之一部分之突部(]〇11113)。突部2141?較佳延伸至電池 ’’且130之外部且形成接觸該燈模組128之可壓縮正觸點η] 之正電極。此連接在圖7中表示為點線 燈模組128之散熱片外殼188接著經由肩式環126接地至 電池組130,該肩式環126又與形成電池組13〇之負電極之 外%頂部觸點212接觸。此連接在圖7中由點線21几表示。 電路板夹片212a接著耦接至組裝電路板24〇上之接觸墊 145907.doc -41 - 201038127 242a。 電池260之負端子264可經由電池組彈簧272、底部負觸 點274及形成為觸點274之一部分之電路板夾片27牦電耦接 至組裝電路板240。電路板失片274a較佳延伸穿過導引件 282且嚙合組裝電路板240上之接觸墊244b。The conductive path of the battery pack 13 is described with reference to Figs. 6 and 7. As shown, the rechargeable battery 260 includes a positive terminal 262 and a negative terminal 264. The positive terminal 262 is coupled to the assembled circuit board 240 via a battery pack spring 218, a top positive contact 216, and a circuit board clip 216a formed as part of the top positive contact 216. The board clip 2 16a is preferably coupled to the contact pads 242b on the assembled circuit board 24A. (It should be noted that in FIG. 7, the reference numerals do not show physical components and are instead used to schematically indicate the electrical connections provided thereby.) This positive path continues on circuit board 240 to contact pads 242c, which are coupled The circuit board clip 2 14a formed as part of the universal top positive contact 2 14 extends through the contact 214 to the top central positive contact 214b, which in this embodiment is the top central positive contact 21 It is a protrusion (] 〇 11113) that can be formed as part of the contact 214. The protrusion 2141 is preferably extended to the outside of the battery '' and 130 and forms a positive electrode that contacts the compressible positive contact η] of the lamp module 128. The heat sink housing 188, which is shown in FIG. 7 as the dotted light module 128, is then grounded to the battery pack 130 via the shoulder ring 126, which in turn is the top of the negative electrode that forms the battery pack 13〇. Contact 212 is in contact. This connection is indicated by the dotted line 21 in Fig. 7. The board clip 212a is then coupled to contact pads 145907.doc-41 - 201038127 242a on the assembled circuit board 24. The negative terminal 264 of the battery 260 can be electrically coupled to the assembled circuit board 240 via a battery pack spring 272, a bottom negative contact 274, and a circuit board clip 27 that is formed as part of the contact 274. The board loss piece 274a preferably extends through the guide member 282 and engages the contact pad 244b on the assembled circuit board 240.
此外,底部負觸點274之突部274b延伸至電池組13〇之外 部且形成用於經由接觸接腳136及接腳彈簧142與電路板 上之接地接觸墊進行外部接觸之負電極或突部27仆。 此連接在圖7中由展示為289b之點線表示。 關之電路徑如下亦可自組裝電路板240延伸 用於瞬時開 至開關及尾部帽蓋總成106。組裝電路板24〇上之電接觸墊 ⑽麵接至電路板爽片心,該電路板夾片278a形成為底 部外環觸點278之-部分且延伸穿過導引件加。外環觸點 278形成用於電池組13G之外部正充電觸點。其經由接觸墊 ⑷及接腳彈簧146㈣至開關及尾部帽蓋總成⑽内所含 有之電路板148上之+5VDC接觸墊。此電路路徑在圖7中由In addition, the protrusion 274b of the bottom negative contact 274 extends to the outside of the battery pack 13 and forms a negative electrode or protrusion for external contact with the ground contact pad on the circuit board via the contact pin 136 and the pin spring 142. 27 servants. This connection is represented in Figure 7 by the dotted line shown as 289b. The electrical path of the switch can also be extended from the self-assembled circuit board 240 for momentary opening to the switch and tail cap assembly 106. The electrical contact pads (10) on the assembled circuit board 24 are surface-contacted to the circuit board core, which is formed as a portion of the bottom outer ring contact 278 and extends through the guide. Outer ring contact 278 forms an external positive charging contact for battery pack 13G. It passes through the contact pad (4) and the pin spring 146 (4) to the +5 VDC contact pad on the circuit board 148 contained in the switch and tail cap assembly (10). This circuit path is shown in Figure 7
點線2 8 9 a表示。 另一電路徑如下自έ且奘 目、'且裝電路板240延伸。組裝電路板: 上之電接觸塾244a輕接至艰士 & ^ m 要至^成為内環觸點276之一部分 %路板夾片276a。内環縮麥上,从 ^ 义觸"· 276接者可經由接觸接腳138 接腳彈簧144耗接至開關艿 關及尾°卩帽蓋總成106内所含有之 路板148上之MOM電路執 办 褒電路板。塾此電路徑將瞬時開關輛接至 現進一 步描述手電筒100之 電路及其供應之功能 。手電 145907.doc -42· 201038127 筒100之電路包括用以對光源1〇1供電之主電源電路、用於 對控制器及組裝電路板240上之其他電子器件供電之控制 器電路及用於對可再充電電池26〇再充電之充電電路。 用於光源之主電源電路自正電極262穿過彈簧218、頂部 正觸點216、電路板夾片216a、接觸墊242b、組裝印刷電 路板240、接觸墊242c、電路板夾片214a、通用正觸點214 經由上文描述之由點線2 15a表示之電路路徑延伸至LED或 ❹ 其他光源。LED或其他光源接著經由上文描述之由點線 215b表不之電路路徑經由由外環頂部觸點212形成之負電 極接地至電池組130。電路接著穿過電路板夾片2i2a、接 觸墊242a組裝印刷電路板240、接觸塾244b、電路板炎 片274a、底部負觸點274及彈簧272延伸至可再充電電池 260之負端子264。 此電路與某些現有手電筒中所發現之電路之不同之處在 於其通常自含於電池組内。舉例而t,某些現有手電筒將 〇 筒身用作用於對光源供電之電路中的接地連接之一部分。 然而,本實施例之主電源電路不依賴於包括筒身、頭部或 尾部帽蓋以作為對光源101供電之主電源電路之一部分的 電路徑。此為有利的,因為在筒身用於完成電路之情況 下’通常需要移除或加工筒身表面以提供良好導電路徑之 製造步驟。然而,本發明之電源電路之自含性質避免任何 此類步驟,此情形可降低製造成本及複雜性。 用以對組裝電路板24〇之控制器供電之電路可自正電極 262延伸穿過彈簧218、頂部正觸點216、電路板炎片加 I45907.doc -43- 201038127 及組裝電路板240之接觸塾2421),其中可在必要時對該電 路加以指引。返回至電池26〇之負電極之接地路徑包括至 負電極264之接觸塾244b、電路板夾片274&、底部負觸點 274及彈簀272。此電路之有利之處亦在於對組裝電路板 240供電所需的電路完全提供於電池組13〇内且不需要將添 加其他成本及製造複雜性之外部電路路徑。 用以對電池260再充電之電路之高壓侧自正充電環19〇延 伸至盤簧156、158、印刷電路板148、接腳彈簧146、接觸 接腳140、經由底部外環觸點278至電池組13〇中且接著穿 過電路板夾278a、接觸墊244c、組裝電路板24〇、接觸墊 242b、電路板夾片216a、頂部正觸點216、彈簧218且最終 至電池260之正端子262。電路接著可自電池26〇之負端子 264返回至彈簧272、底部負觸點274、經由突部27朴至接 觸接腳136、接腳彈簧142、電路板、波形彈簧15〇、 158、接地充電環192。 當電池組130安裝至筒身124之電池室127中時,用於光 源101之完整電路徑(或電負載)可經由組裝電路板24〇上之 輸入墊242b由可再充電電池260之正端子形成,如上所 述。對應於圖7中之V—CELL+之輸入墊242b在組裝電路板 240上耦接至負載開關558、572(見圖9b、圖9C)。當負載 開關558、572閉合(或導電)時,對組裝電路板240上之輸出 墊242c通電。因為輸出墊242c耦接至電池組130之頂部中 央正觸點214b,所以電流自電池組130之頂部中央正觸點 214b傳遞至燈模組128之正觸點133且穿過光源。此電路徑 145907.doc -44 - 201038127 接著自燈模組128之散熱片外殼188延伸至電池組130之外 環頂部觸點212。電池組130之外環頂部觸點212電耦接至 可再充電電池260之負電極264,如上所述。 圖8為說明用於諸如結合圖1至圖7所說明且論述之手電 筒之可攜式照明裝置的組裝電路板240之較佳實施例之電 子電路的關係的方塊圖。然而,藉此提供之電路及運動敏 感使用者介面可用於除手電筒100以外的手電筒以及諸如 頭燈或提燈之其他可攜式照明裝置中。組裝電路板240較 佳包括充電系統502、電池保護電路504、MOSFET驅動器 及負載開關電路506、LDO線性調節器電路508、控制器電 路510、加速計電路512及磁力計電路514。在其他實施例 中,此等組件中之一或多者可在其功能性非本發明之特定 應用中所要時加以省略。 如上所指示,組裝電路板240包括較佳呈I/O墊之形式之 電觸點。如圖9A至圖9G中所示之組裝電路板240之詳細電 路示意圖中所反映,I/O墊可包括+5 VDC 244c、MOM 244a、底部 GND 244b、V_CELL + 242b、VLOAD 242c及頂 部 GND 242a。 圖9A展示充電系統502之電路示意圖。+5VDC信號線 516可電耦接至電池組130之組裝電路板240上之+5VDC輸 入墊244c。如先前所提及,+5VDC輸入墊244c可電耦接至 充電環166。+5VDC信號線516耦接至p通道金屬氧化物半 導體場效電晶體(PMOS)530。 PMOS 530之閘極可耦接至接地以使得PMOS 530可在 145907.doc -45- 201038127 + 5VDC I/O墊516耦接至諸如充電底座之正電源電壓時接 通。若+5 VDC I/O墊510意外地耦接至負電源電壓(諸如, 在手電_ 1 〇〇顛倒地置放於充電底座之情況下),則PM〇s 530將切斷以保護組裝電路板24〇上之電路之剩餘部分免受 顛倒極性損壞。 PMOS 530之源極532可耦接至充電保護電路536以提供 對電池組130中之電池260之保護使之免受歸因於充電電路 544所致之故障,此情形稍後將更詳細地加以描述。 k號線532可耦接至雙極電晶體534之集極,而雙極電晶 體534之基極可耦接至信號線丨―WIRE 63〇,該信號線 1_WIRE 630又為控制器電路51〇之輸出。 充電保護電路536可包括輸出v_wall_adAPTER 538, 其可耦接至充電電路544。 充電保護電路536可用於持續監視輸入電壓+5Vdc 516、輸入電流及電池電壓54〇。在可經歷過量輸入電壓 (例如,手電筒100置放於提供+ 12V DC輸入之充電底座)的 狀况下’充電保護電路536可藉由切斷充電保護電路536中 之内部開關自充電電路536移除電力。在過量電流情形之 狀况下,充電保護電路536可將系統電流限制在臨限值。 右過里電流情形持續’則充電保護電路536可在消隱時段 之後切斷傳遞元件。 在較佳實&例中’市售裝置(例如’由Texas 製ie之BQ243 14)可用於保護而免受過量電壓及電流且保護 處於刖端之電池充電器。 145907.doc 201038127 充電電路544可由V_WALL_ADAPTER 538供電且可用於 對位於電池組130内之可再充電電池260充電。在充電系統 502中,充電電路544可包括用以限制充電電流之電流敏感 電路及熱調節電路。充電電路544可具有輸出VCHARGE 538,其可最終耦接至可再充電電池260之正電極。 在較佳實施例中,可使用市售獨立充電管理器控制器 (例如,由Microchip Technology製造之MCP73832)。 來自控制器電路510之信號線DISABLE_CHARGE 624可 用於停用充電電路544。在此種情形下,V_WALL— ADAPTER 538顯示高阻抗以使得手電筒1〇〇經由信號線 1_^\¥11^ 63 0及+5¥〇€516與外部充電底座連通。 信號線CHG 63 0可用於指示充電狀態,該資訊可由控制 器電路510使用。當偵測到過功率情形時,雖然充電保護 電路536可用於保護組裝電路板240上之組件免受其他損 壞,但將此資訊傳輸至充電底座將為有利的。 在本實施例中,當偵測到過功率情形時,控制器602可 利用信號線1_WIRE 630以將順序信號發送至充電底座以作 為警告標誌。信號線1_WIRE 630可由控制器602拉動至高 以使得NPN雙極電晶體534之集極可被拉動至低。因此, 可將信號線530以及+5VDC 5 16拉動至低。因此,自手電 筒觀點而言,+5 VDC 5 16可自電力輸入線轉換至信號輸出 線。當+5VDC上之高信號為所要時,信號線1_WIRE 630 可由控制器602拉動至低以使得NPN雙極電晶體534之集極 以及信號線53 0將不再被拉動至低。因此,控制器602可將 145907.doc -47- 201038127 + 5VDC 616處理為用於發送一序列高或低信號之串列埠。 亦可由信號線540處之充電保護電路536監視電池電壓, 其係自VCHARGE 548反饋。 亦可使用除上述充電系統502以外的充電系統。 圖9B展示電池保護電路504之電路示意圖。電池保護電 路504可包括輸入VCHARGE 548,其在本實施例中自充電 系統502延伸。此輸入信號線VCHARGE 548耦接至PMOS 55〇之源極。PMOS 55〇之閘極經由電阻器耦接至輸入信號 線VCHARGE 548。且’ PMOS 550之閘極可經由反相器 5 68由内部信號線CO 564驅動。PMOS 550之没極可輛接至 信號線V_CELL+522,其可進一步耦接至組裝電路板24〇上 之 I/O 塾 V_CELL+242b。如上所述 ’ 1/〇 塾 v cELL + 242b 耗 接至電池組130中之可再充電電池260之正電極。信號線 V_CELL+522亦可經由二極體554由信號線VCHARGE 548 驅動。 k號線V—CELL+522耗接至負載開關558之輸入,而負載 開關558之輸出輕接至内部電源電壓信號vb AT 5 6 0,立又 經由信號線VLOAD 524(展示於圖9C中)及1/〇墊VLOAD 242c麵接至燈模組128之正觸點133。當在負載(例如,燈 模組128)上偵測到短路時’負載開關558將切斷以保護該 電路,在較佳實施例中’可使用市售負載開關(例如,由The dotted line is 2 8 9 a. The other electrical path is as follows: and the circuit board 240 is extended. Assemble the circuit board: The upper electrical contact 塾 244a is lightly connected to the hard & ^ m to ^ becomes part of the inner ring contact 276 % of the plate clamp 276a. On the inner ring shrinkage, the contact can be taken from the contact pin 138 via the contact pin 138 to the switch board 148 which is included in the switch cover and the tail cap assembly 106. The MOM circuit is responsible for the board. This electrical path connects the momentary switch to the current description of the circuit of the flashlight 100 and its supply. Flashlight 145907.doc -42· 201038127 The circuit of the cartridge 100 includes a main power circuit for powering the light source 101, a controller circuit for powering the controller and other electronic devices on the assembled circuit board 240, and for Rechargeable battery 26 〇 recharge charging circuit. The main power supply circuit for the light source passes from the positive electrode 262 through the spring 218, the top positive contact 216, the circuit board clip 216a, the contact pad 242b, the assembled printed circuit board 240, the contact pad 242c, the circuit board clip 214a, and the universal positive Contact 214 extends to the LED or other source of light via the circuit path indicated by dotted line 2 15a described above. The LED or other light source is then grounded to the battery pack 130 via a circuit path formed by dotted line 215b as described above via a negative electrode formed by outer ring top contact 212. The circuit then extends through the board clip 2i2a, the contact pad 242a assembly printed circuit board 240, the contact pad 244b, the board panel 274a, the bottom negative contact 274, and the spring 272 to the negative terminal 264 of the rechargeable battery 260. This circuit differs from the circuits found in some existing flashlights in that it is typically self-contained in the battery pack. By way of example, some existing flashlights use the cartridge as part of a ground connection in a circuit for powering a light source. However, the main power supply circuit of the present embodiment does not rely on an electrical path including a barrel, a head or a tail cap as part of a main power supply circuit for supplying power to the light source 101. This is advantageous because in the case where the barrel is used to complete the circuit, the manufacturing steps that typically require removal or processing of the barrel surface to provide a good conductive path are required. However, the self-contained nature of the power supply circuit of the present invention avoids any such steps, which can reduce manufacturing costs and complexity. The circuitry for powering the controller that assembles the circuit board 24 can extend from the positive electrode 262 through the spring 218, the top positive contact 216, the board slab plus I45907.doc -43-201038127, and the assembled circuit board 240.塾2421), which can be used to guide the circuit when necessary. The ground path to the negative electrode of battery 26 includes contact 244b to negative electrode 264, circuit board clip 274 & bottom negative contact 274 and magazine 272. This circuit is also advantageous in that the circuitry required to power the assembled circuit board 240 is fully provided within the battery pack 13 and does not require external circuit paths that add additional cost and manufacturing complexity. The high voltage side of the circuit for recharging the battery 260 extends from the positive charging ring 19A to the coil springs 156, 158, the printed circuit board 148, the pin springs 146, the contact pins 140, via the bottom outer ring contacts 278 to the battery The set of 13 turns and then passes through the board clamp 278a, the contact pads 244c, the assembled circuit board 24, the contact pads 242b, the board clip 216a, the top positive contact 216, the spring 218, and finally to the positive terminal 262 of the battery 260. . The circuit can then be returned from the negative terminal 264 of the battery 26 to the spring 272, the bottom negative contact 274, via the tab 27 to the contact pin 136, the pin spring 142, the circuit board, the wave springs 15A, 158, ground charging Ring 192. When the battery pack 130 is mounted into the battery compartment 127 of the barrel 124, the complete electrical path (or electrical load) for the light source 101 can be from the positive terminal of the rechargeable battery 260 via the input pad 242b of the assembled circuit board 24 Formed as described above. The input pad 242b corresponding to V-CELL+ in Fig. 7 is coupled to the load switches 558, 572 on the assembled circuit board 240 (see Figures 9b, 9C). When the load switches 558, 572 are closed (or conductive), the output pads 242c on the assembled circuit board 240 are energized. Because the output pad 242c is coupled to the top center positive contact 214b of the battery pack 130, current is transferred from the top center positive contact 214b of the battery pack 130 to the positive contact 133 of the lamp module 128 and through the source. This electrical path 145907.doc -44 - 201038127 then extends from the heat sink housing 188 of the lamp module 128 to the outer top contact 212 of the battery pack 130. The outer ring top contact 212 of the battery pack 130 is electrically coupled to the negative electrode 264 of the rechargeable battery 260, as described above. Figure 8 is a block diagram showing the relationship of an electronic circuit of a preferred embodiment of an assembled circuit board 240 for a portable lighting device such as the flashlight illustrated and discussed in connection with Figures 1-7. However, the circuit and motion sensitive user interface provided thereby can be used in flashlights other than flashlight 100 and other portable lighting devices such as headlights or lanterns. The assembled circuit board 240 preferably includes a charging system 502, a battery protection circuit 504, a MOSFET driver and load switch circuit 506, an LDO linear regulator circuit 508, a controller circuit 510, an accelerometer circuit 512, and a magnetometer circuit 514. In other embodiments, one or more of these components may be omitted when their functionality is not desired in a particular application of the invention. As indicated above, assembled circuit board 240 includes electrical contacts, preferably in the form of I/O pads. As reflected in the detailed circuit diagram of the assembled circuit board 240 shown in FIGS. 9A through 9G, the I/O pads may include +5 VDC 244c, MOM 244a, bottom GND 244b, V_CELL + 242b, VLOAD 242c, and top GND 242a. . FIG. 9A shows a circuit schematic of charging system 502. The +5 VDC signal line 516 can be electrically coupled to the +5 VDC input pad 244c on the assembled circuit board 240 of the battery pack 130. As mentioned previously, the +5 VDC input pad 244c can be electrically coupled to the charging ring 166. The +5 VDC signal line 516 is coupled to a p-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor (PMOS) 530. The gate of PMOS 530 can be coupled to ground such that PMOS 530 can be turned on when 145907.doc -45 - 201038127 + 5VDC I/O pad 516 is coupled to a positive supply voltage such as a charging base. If the +5 VDC I/O pad 510 is accidentally coupled to a negative supply voltage (such as in the case where the flashlight _ 1 〇〇 is placed upside down on the charging base), the PM 〇s 530 will be turned off to protect the assembled circuit. The remainder of the circuit on board 24 is protected from reverse polarity damage. The source 532 of the PMOS 530 can be coupled to the charge protection circuit 536 to provide protection to the battery 260 in the battery pack 130 from failure due to the charging circuit 544, which will be discussed in more detail later. description. The k-line 532 can be coupled to the collector of the bipolar transistor 534, and the base of the bipolar transistor 534 can be coupled to the signal line 丨WIRE 63〇, which is again the controller circuit 51〇 The output. The charge protection circuit 536 can include an output v_wall_adAPTER 538 that can be coupled to the charging circuit 544. The charge protection circuit 536 can be used to continuously monitor the input voltage +5Vdc 516, the input current, and the battery voltage 54〇. The charge protection circuit 536 can be moved from the charging circuit 536 by turning off the internal switch in the charge protection circuit 536 under conditions in which an excessive input voltage can be experienced (eg, the flashlight 100 is placed on a charging base that provides a +12V DC input). In addition to electricity. In the event of an excessive current condition, the charge protection circuit 536 can limit the system current to a threshold. The current flow condition in the right over is continued. Then the charge protection circuit 536 can cut off the transfer element after the blanking period. In the preferred embodiment, a commercially available device (e.g., BQ243 14 manufactured by Texas) can be used to protect against battery voltage and current and protect the battery charger at the extreme end. 145907.doc 201038127 Charging circuit 544 can be powered by V_WALL_ADAPTER 538 and can be used to charge rechargeable battery 260 located within battery pack 130. In charging system 502, charging circuit 544 can include a current sensitive circuit and a thermal conditioning circuit to limit the charging current. The charging circuit 544 can have an output VCHARGE 538 that can ultimately be coupled to the positive electrode of the rechargeable battery 260. In the preferred embodiment, a commercially available stand-alone charge manager controller (e.g., MCP73832 manufactured by Microchip Technology) can be used. Signal line DISABLE_CHARGE 624 from controller circuit 510 can be used to disable charging circuit 544. In this case, V_WALL_ADAPTER 538 displays a high impedance so that the flashlight 1 is in communication with the external charging base via signal lines 1_^\¥11^ 63 0 and +5¥〇. Signal line CHG 63 0 can be used to indicate the state of charge, which can be used by controller circuit 510. While an overpower condition is detected, although the charge protection circuit 536 can be used to protect components on the assembled circuit board 240 from other damage, it would be advantageous to transmit this information to the charging dock. In this embodiment, when an overpower condition is detected, the controller 602 can utilize the signal line 1_WIRE 630 to send a sequence signal to the charging base as a warning sign. Signal line 1_WIRE 630 can be pulled high by controller 602 such that the collector of NPN bipolar transistor 534 can be pulled low. Therefore, signal line 530 and +5 VDC 5 16 can be pulled low. Therefore, from the flashlight point of view, +5 VDC 5 16 can be converted from the power input line to the signal output line. When the high signal on +5 VDC is desired, signal line 1_WIRE 630 can be pulled low by controller 602 such that the collector of NPN bipolar transistor 534 and signal line 53 0 will no longer be pulled low. Thus, controller 602 can process 145907.doc -47 - 201038127 + 5VDC 616 as a serial port for transmitting a sequence of high or low signals. The battery voltage can also be monitored by charge protection circuit 536 at signal line 540, which is fed back from VCHARGE 548. A charging system other than the above charging system 502 can also be used. FIG. 9B shows a circuit schematic of battery protection circuit 504. Battery protection circuit 504 can include an input VCHARGE 548 that extends from charging system 502 in this embodiment. The input signal line VCHARGE 548 is coupled to the source of the PMOS 55〇. The PMOS 55 闸 gate is coupled to the input signal line VCHARGE 548 via a resistor. And the gate of the 'PMOS 550 can be driven by the internal signal line CO 564 via the inverter 5 68. The PMOS 550 has a pole connected to the signal line V_CELL+522, which can be further coupled to the I/O 塾 V_CELL+242b on the assembled circuit board 24. As described above, '1/〇 塾 v cELL + 242b is consumed to the positive electrode of the rechargeable battery 260 in the battery pack 130. The signal line V_CELL+522 can also be driven by the signal line VCHARGE 548 via the diode 554. The k-line V-CELL+522 is drained to the input of the load switch 558, and the output of the load switch 558 is lightly connected to the internal supply voltage signal vb AT 5 6 0, which is in turn via the signal line VLOAD 524 (shown in Figure 9C). And the 1/〇 pad VLOAD 242c is connected to the positive contact 133 of the lamp module 128. When a short circuit is detected on the load (e.g., lamp module 128), load switch 558 will be turned off to protect the circuit. In the preferred embodiment, a commercially available load switch can be used (e.g., by
Fairchild Semiconductor製造之FPF2163)。 電壓保護電路562可用於進一步保護電池組13〇中之可再 充電電池260免受過充電、過放電或過量電流。在一實施 145907.doc •48· 201038127 例中,可使用市售電壓保護電路(例如,由Seiko Instruments 製造之 S-8241ABSPG)。 亦可採用除上述電池保護電路504以外的電池保護電 路。 圖9C展示較佳MOSFET驅動器及負載開關電路506之電 路示意圖。在圖9C之實施例中,負載開關電路506由PMOS 572實施,該PMOS 572可具有耦接至來自電池保護電路 504之内部電源電壓信號VBAT 560之源極及耦接至信號線 乂]:0八0 5 76之汲極。信號線¥]^0八0 524耦接至組裝電路板 240之I/O墊VLOAD 242c。如先前所描述,I/O墊VLOAD 242c耦接至電池組130之頂部中央觸點214b且接著可耦接 至燈模組128之可壓縮正觸點133。 PMOS 572之閘極可耦接至MOSFET驅動器,該MOSFET 驅動器可由NPN雙極電晶體570實施。PMOS 572之閘極亦 可由電阻器拉動至高直至内部電源電壓信號VBAT 560。 因此,當雙極電晶體570之基極由信號LAMP_DRIVE 624 驅動至高時,雙極電晶體570如PMOS 572—樣傳導。因 此,電力可自内部電源電壓VBAT 560流動至電壓輸出墊 VLOAD 242c以形成可接通燈模組128之電流之完整迴路的 一部分。 在其他實施例中,控制器510可直接驅動負載開關572。 另外,可採用其他形式之驅動器電路。同樣地,其他類型 之負載開關可用於負載開關506。大體上,負載開關506應 為諸如場效電晶體或雙極接面電晶體之某形式之電子開 145907.doc -49- 201038127 關。 圖9 D展示較佳低壓降(或L D 〇)線性調節器電路5 〇 8之電 路示意圖。LDO線性調節器電路5〇8可包括低壓降調節器 588,其可由以小輸入-輸出差分電壓操作之〇(:線性電壓調 節器實施。信號線586自兩個二極體582、584形成輸出, 其为別由 L 號線 V_WALL_ADAPTER 53 8 及 VBAT 5 60 驅 動。此組態較佳允許來自信號線V—WALL__ADAPTER 538 及VBAT 560之較高電壓供應低壓降調節器588。 在較佳實施例中,低壓降調節器588之輸出可在輸出線 590上設定至+2.8 V以用作例如控制器電路5丨〇、加速計5 j 2 及磁力計5 14之其他組件之電源。在較佳實施例中,可使 用市售LDO調節器(例如’由on Semiconductor製造之 NCP700)。 亦可採用除上述線性調節器電路508以外的線性調節器 電路。 圖9E為較佳控制器電路510之示意圖。控制器電路51〇可 包括具有輸入及輸出連接之控制器602。控制器602可經由 信號線 ADC—DC XOUT 608、ADC_DC_YOUT 606、 ADC DC ZOUT 604、ADC X-G 612、ADC Y-G 614、 ADC_Z-G616、CHG 628及RESET 634接收輸入信號。控 制器602亦可經由信號線PD 610、ST 618、SW_ON 630、 S/R/MOSI 620、LAMP_DRIVE_MISO 622、DISABLE— COMPASS 624 ' CHARGE_DISABLE 626及 1_WIRE 630輸 送輸出信號。控制器602之電源VCC(未圖示)係由+2.8V電 145907.doc -50· 201038127 該+2.8V電源信號係由LD〇調節器5〇8之輪出 在較佳實施例中,批也丨哭沐 控制器602為具有嵌入式記憶體之 售微控制器,例如,^ y 1 ’ 其為由 Atmel Corporation 製&之8位元微控制器。在另一鲁士>7丨土 在另 實細*例中,控制器602可為 微處理器。在其他實施例中,控制器6()2可為離散電路。 熟習此項技術者應理解,亦可採用其他類型之控制器電 路0FPF2163 manufactured by Fairchild Semiconductor). Voltage protection circuit 562 can be used to further protect rechargeable battery 260 in battery pack 13 from overcharging, overdischarging, or excessive current. In an embodiment 145907.doc • 48· 201038127, a commercially available voltage protection circuit (for example, S-8241ABSPG manufactured by Seiko Instruments) can be used. A battery protection circuit other than the battery protection circuit 504 described above may also be employed. Figure 9C shows a circuit diagram of a preferred MOSFET driver and load switch circuit 506. In the embodiment of FIG. 9C, the load switch circuit 506 is implemented by a PMOS 572 having a source coupled to the internal supply voltage signal VBAT 560 from the battery protection circuit 504 and coupled to the signal line 乂: 0 8 0 5 76 bungee jumping. The signal line ¥]^0 八 0 524 is coupled to the I/O pad VLOAD 242c of the assembled circuit board 240. As previously described, the I/O pad VLOAD 242c is coupled to the top center contact 214b of the battery pack 130 and can then be coupled to the compressible positive contact 133 of the lamp module 128. The gate of PMOS 572 can be coupled to a MOSFET driver that can be implemented by an NPN bipolar transistor 570. The gate of PMOS 572 can also be pulled high by the resistor until the internal supply voltage signal VBAT 560. Thus, when the base of bipolar transistor 570 is driven high by signal LAMP_DRIVE 624, bipolar transistor 570 conducts like PMOS 572. Thus, power can flow from the internal supply voltage VBAT 560 to the voltage output pad VLOAD 242c to form a portion of the complete loop that can turn the current to the lamp module 128. In other embodiments, controller 510 can directly drive load switch 572. In addition, other forms of driver circuits can be employed. Likewise, other types of load switches can be used for load switch 506. In general, the load switch 506 should be an electronic switch such as a field effect transistor or a bipolar junction transistor 145907.doc -49- 201038127. Figure 9D shows a circuit diagram of a preferred low dropout (or L D 〇) linear regulator circuit 5 〇 8. The LDO linear regulator circuit 5A8 can include a low dropout regulator 588 that can be implemented with a small input-output differential voltage (: linear voltage regulator implemented. Signal line 586 forms an output from two diodes 582, 584 It is driven by the L-line V_WALL_ADAPTER 53 8 and VBAT 5 60. This configuration preferably allows a higher voltage supply from the signal lines V-WALL__ADAPTER 538 and VBAT 560 to supply the low-dropout regulator 588. In a preferred embodiment The output of the low dropout regulator 588 can be set to +2.8 V on output line 590 for use as a power source for, for example, controller circuit 5, accelerometer 5 j 2 , and other components of magnetometer 5 14. In the example, a commercially available LDO regulator can be used (e.g., 'NCP 700 manufactured by On Semiconductor.) A linear regulator circuit other than the linear regulator circuit 508 described above can also be used. Figure 9E is a schematic diagram of a preferred controller circuit 510. The controller circuit 51A can include a controller 602 having input and output connections. The controller 602 can be via signal lines ADC-DC XOUT 608, ADC_DC_YOUT 606, ADC DC ZOUT 604, ADC XG 612, ADC YG 614, A The DC_Z-G616, CHG 628, and RESET 634 receive input signals. The controller 602 can also be via signal lines PD 610, ST 618, SW_ON 630, S/R/MOSI 620, LAMP_DRIVE_MISO 622, DISABLE-COMPASS 624 'CHARGE_DISABLE 626, and 1_WIRE 630. The output signal is transmitted. The power supply VCC (not shown) of the controller 602 is powered by +2.8V 145907.doc -50· 201038127. The +2.8V power signal is rotated by the LD〇 regulator 5〇8. In the example, the batch controller 602 is a commercially available microcontroller with embedded memory, for example, ^ y 1 ' which is an 8-bit microcontroller manufactured by Atmel Corporation & The controller 602 can be a microprocessor. In other embodiments, the controller 6() 2 can be a discrete circuit. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that it can also be used. Other types of controller circuits0
圖9F展不較佳例示性加速計電路5 12之電路示意圖。加 速D十電路5 12較佳為3軸加速計。然而,在其他實施例中, 可使用單軸或雙軸加速計。較佳實施例之加速計電路川 包括對應於表示在X、yAz方向中之每一者上之移動的信 號之輸出 ADC一X-G 616、ADC一Y-G 612。 此三個信號耦接至控制器電路51〇以用於進一步處理。Figure 9F shows a circuit diagram of a less preferred exemplary accelerometer circuit 52. The accelerating D ten circuit 5 12 is preferably a 3-axis accelerometer. However, in other embodiments, a single or dual axis accelerometer can be used. The accelerometer circuit of the preferred embodiment includes an output ADC-X-G 616, ADC-Y-G 612 corresponding to signals representing movements in each of the X, yAz directions. These three signals are coupled to the controller circuit 51 for further processing.
源信號支援 線5 9 0提供。 加速计電路5 12較佳包括一慣性感測器64〇,其自内部感 測元件接收資訊且提供類比信號。在其他實施例中,慣性 感測器640可將其產生之類比信號轉換為數位信號。慣性 感測器640在本實施例中用於藉由提供在例如相互正交之 軸之三個軸(即,X、丫及幻上之加速度資訊來量測地球靜 態重力場。3軸加速計電路512之電源VDD可由來自LDO調 節器508之輸出線590上之+2.8 V電源信號支援。 若慣性感測器640之Z軸指向地球之中心,則X及γ將具 有加速度零。然而,歸因於地球之重力Z將經歷_ 1 g之加速 度。若慣性感測器640翻轉180。以使得z背向地球,則X及 145907.doc •51 · 201038127 Y將保持為零,但Z將具有+ig之加速度。 慣性感測器640附接至組裝電路板240以使得X、丫及z轴 相對於手電筒100固定。在較佳實施例中,慣性感測器64〇 在板240上定向以使得γ軸沿手電筒1 〇〇之縱軸延伸。因 而富水平疋位手電同100時’ Y軸亦水平延伸。在此位置 中,當X及Z繞手電筒100之縱軸向左或向右旋轉時,隨著 在X及z軸上之加速度之量值在旋轉期間改變,關於X及z 之相應重力資訊將分別經由ADCX-G 616及ADC_Z-G 612 發送至控制器602。相對角旋轉因此可由控制器602計算。 控制器602可使用ADC—X-G 616及ADC_Z-G 012上之資訊 以判定是否存在繞手電筒100之縱軸之旋轉及旋轉方向。 在較佳實施例中,用於手電筒1〇〇之開關位於開關及尾 部帽蓋總成106中。當最初啟動開關時,又及z軸之起始定 向為控制器602未知的。因此,控制器6〇2基於在起始定向 中在X及Z軸上之地球重力場的量測計算起始角或位置。 一旦建立其起始定向,可進行後續角量測以追蹤手電筒 1 00之旋轉。因此,可進行量測以判定角相對於起始定向 增加抑或降低以便計算旋轉改變。 在另一實施例中,可知曉可攜式照明裝置之兩個軸。舉 例而言,在具有按鈕開關之手電筒中,又與z軸之起始位 置將為已知的,其中假定:如由使用者手之形狀所規定, 開關指向上,其中拇指在開關上。在此種狀況下,僅—個 軸(X或Z)可用於計算旋轉改變,且因此可使用單軸加速 計。 145907.doc -52. 201038127 在以上兩個實施例中’較佳的是,手電筒ι〇〇大致水平 地定位以供使用者在旋轉時獲得較高解析度(亦即, 軸之旋轉之較好感測)。當Υ轴相對於水平方向傾斜較遠 時,可發生旋轉誤差。因此’在操作+,較佳的是,手電 筒議相對於水平方向固持至+Λ 30。。若傾斜大於3〇。,則 較佳的是’監視Υ軸且忽略旋轉輸人直至手電筒⑽傾斜回 +/- 30。窗内為止。然而,在其他實施方案中,可採用較複Source signal support line 590 is provided. Accelerometer circuit 5 12 preferably includes an inertial sensor 64A that receives information from the internal sensing element and provides an analog signal. In other embodiments, inertial sensor 640 can convert the analog signal it produces into a digital signal. Inertial sensor 640 is used in this embodiment to measure the earth's static gravitational field by providing acceleration information on three axes (eg, X, 丫, and illusion) of mutually orthogonal axes. 3-axis accelerometer The power supply VDD of circuit 512 can be supported by a +2.8 V power supply signal from output line 590 of LDO regulator 508. If the Z-axis of inertial sensor 640 points to the center of the earth, then X and γ will have an acceleration of zero. Because the Earth's gravity Z will experience an acceleration of _ 1 g. If the inertial sensor 640 flips 180. So that z is facing away from the Earth, then X and 145907.doc •51 · 201038127 Y will remain at zero, but Z will have Acceleration of +ig. Inertial sensor 640 is attached to assembled circuit board 240 such that the X, 丫, and z axes are fixed relative to flashlight 100. In the preferred embodiment, inertial sensor 64 is oriented on plate 240 The gamma axis extends along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1 。. Thus, the horizontally-rich chirped flashlight extends horizontally with the 'y-axis' at 100. In this position, when X and Z are rotated left or right around the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 100 When the magnitude of the acceleration on the X and z axes changes during rotation The corresponding gravitational information about X and z will be sent to controller 602 via ADCX-G 616 and ADC_Z-G 612, respectively. The relative angular rotation can therefore be calculated by controller 602. Controller 602 can use ADC-XG 616 and ADC_Z-G 012 The above information is used to determine if there is a rotation and direction of rotation about the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 100. In the preferred embodiment, the switch for the flashlight 1 is located in the switch and tail cap assembly 106. When the switch is initially activated The initial orientation of the z-axis is unknown to the controller 602. Thus, the controller 6〇2 calculates the starting angle or position based on the measurement of the Earth's gravitational field on the X and Z axes in the starting orientation. Establishing its initial orientation, subsequent angular measurements can be taken to track the rotation of the flashlight 100. Thus, measurements can be made to determine whether the angle is increased or decreased relative to the starting orientation to calculate the rotational change. In another embodiment, Knowing the two axes of the portable lighting device. For example, in a flashlight with a push button switch, the starting position with the z-axis will be known, assuming that: as specified by the shape of the user's hand, switch Up, where the thumb is on the switch. In this case, only one axis (X or Z) can be used to calculate the change in rotation, and therefore a single-axis accelerometer can be used. 145907.doc -52. 201038127 In the above two implementations In the example, it is preferred that the flashlight ι is positioned substantially horizontally for the user to obtain a higher resolution when rotating (i.e., better sensing of the rotation of the shaft). When the Υ axis is tilted relative to the horizontal direction At a distance, a rotation error can occur. Therefore, in operation +, it is preferable that the flashlight is held to +Λ 30 with respect to the horizontal direction. . If the tilt is greater than 3 inches. Preferably, the axle is monitored and the rotary input is ignored until the flashlight (10) is tilted back to +/- 30. Up to the window. However, in other embodiments, a more complex
雜向量計算,以使得3軸經組合以致可判定使用者意圖而 不管水平。 f貝性感測器640可包括一輸入pd 610,其可為來自控制 器電路510之輸出。PD 610可用作如下指示:藉由*pD 610拉動至低,慣性感測器640不需要操作。當將pD 61〇拉 動至低時,慣性感測器640可停留在斷電情形中。此組態 可用於節省電池電力。慣性感測器640亦可包括輸入ST 618 ’其可為來自控制器電路510之輸出以指示自測試為所 要的。 在較佳實施例中,慣性感測器640可為市售微機電系統 (MEMS),例如,LIS394AL,其為由 ST Microelectronics製 造之3軸加速計。熟習此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他 類型之慣性感測器電路。 圖9G展示磁阻感測器電路5 14之示意圖。磁阻感測器電 路 514 可包括輸入 COMPASS_DISABLE 624 及 S/R/MOSI 620,其可為來自控制器電路5 12之輸出。例示性磁阻感測 器電路514亦可包括輸出八0(:__0(:_又01;丁 608 、 145907.doc •53- 201038127 ADC_DC_YOUT 606 及 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604,其可耦接至 控制器電路512以用於進一步處理。 當輸入信號C〇MPASS_DISABLE 624被驅動至低時, + 2.8V電源可用於支援磁阻感測器電路5 14。當控制器602 判定磁阻感測器電路5 14不需要操作時,輸入信號 COMPASS_DISABLE 624可由控制器602拉動至高。+2.8V 電源接著可停止支援磁阻感測器電路5 14。此組態可用於 節省電池電力。 磁阻感測器電路514之主要組件為磁力計660。磁力計 660可包含置放於正交軸處之三組惠斯登電橋(Wheatstone bridge)以量測在該等軸中之每一者上之地球磁場的方向及 量值且將此等量測轉換為差分電壓輸出。在其他實施例 中,可使用單軸或雙軸磁力計。 在較佳實施例中,將Y轴設定為手電筒100之縱軸11 0。 換言之,可將輸出ADC_DC_YOUT 606之改變解釋為手電 筒100之縱軸110之方向改變。 磁力計660可為市售磁力計,例如,HMC1043,其為由 Honeywell製造之3轴磁力計。The hash vector is calculated such that the 3 axes are combined such that the user's intention can be determined regardless of the level. The f-beat detector 640 can include an input pd 610, which can be an output from the controller circuit 510. The PD 610 can be used as an indication that the inertial sensor 640 does not need to be operated by pulling the *pD 610 low. When the pD 61〇 is pulled low, the inertial sensor 640 can remain in the power down condition. This configuration can be used to conserve battery power. The inertial sensor 640 can also include an input ST 618 ' which can be an output from the controller circuit 510 to indicate that the self test is desired. In a preferred embodiment, the inertial sensor 640 can be a commercially available microelectromechanical system (MEMS), such as the LIS 394AL, which is a 3-axis accelerometer manufactured by ST Microelectronics. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other types of inertial sensor circuits can be used. Figure 9G shows a schematic diagram of a magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514. Magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 can include inputs COMPASS_DISABLE 624 and S/R/MOSI 620, which can be outputs from controller circuit 52. The exemplary magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 can also include an output 八 (: __0 (: _ _ 01; D 608, 145907. doc • 53 - 201038127 ADC_DC_YOUT 606 and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604, which can be coupled to the controller circuit 512 For further processing. When the input signal C〇MPASS_DISABLE 624 is driven low, the +2.8V power supply can be used to support the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514. When the controller 602 determines that the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 does not need to operate At this time, the input signal COMPASS_DISABLE 624 can be pulled high by the controller 602. The +2.8V power supply can then stop supporting the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514. This configuration can be used to conserve battery power. The main components of the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 are Magnetometer 660. Magnetometer 660 can include three sets of Wheatstone bridges placed at orthogonal axes to measure the direction and magnitude of the Earth's magnetic field on each of the equiaxed axes and These measurements are converted to a differential voltage output. In other embodiments, a single or dual axis magnetometer can be used. In the preferred embodiment, the Y axis is set to the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100. In other words, Will output ADC_DC_YOUT 606 The change is explained by the change in the direction of the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100. The magnetometer 660 can be a commercially available magnetometer, such as the HMC 1043, which is a 3-axis magnetometer manufactured by Honeywell.
磁力計660中之惠斯登電橋之電源(由VB指示)可由信號 線+VCOMPASS 644支援,該信號線+VCOMPASS 644又可 產生自提供於LDO調節器508之輸出590上之+2.8V電源信 號。PNP雙極電晶體642之射極耦接至+2.8V 590電源,而 雙極電晶體642之集極耦接至信號線+VCOMPASS 644。雙 極電晶體642之基極可耦接至信號線COMPASS DISABLE 145907.doc -54- 201038127 624,其可為來自控制器電路512之輪出。 磁力計660之設定/重設(SR)輸入可由兩個來源提供。第 一來源可為信號線+VCOMPASS 644。第二來源可產生自 信號線S/R/MOSI 620,其可為來自控制器電路510之輸 出。信號線S/R/MOSI 620可耦接至射極耦接至接地之NPN 雙極電晶體654的基極。可耦接至雙極電晶體654之集極之 信號線652亦可為磁力計660之設定/重設(SR)輸入之第二來 源。 磁力計660之輸出可被分組為三組差分電壓輸出: OUTX+662 及 OUTX-664 ; OUTY+666 及 OUTY-668 ;及 OUTY+670及 OUTY-672。OUTX+662、OUTX-664可分別耦 接至運算放大器682之正輸入及負輸入,該運算放大器682 可產生輸出ADC_DC_XOUT 608,其可耦接至控制器電路 510以用於進一步處理。輸出八0(:_0(:_乂01;丁 608可經由並 聯連接之電阻器686及電容器688反饋至運算放大器682之 負輸入678。另外,運算放大器680之正輸入可耦接至參考 電壓REF_COMPASS 646,其可由分壓器自+VCOMPASS 644產生。 同樣地,其他組之差分電壓輸出可用於產生 ADC_DC_YOUT 606及ADC—DC_ZOUT 604,其亦可具有 類似於先前已描述之ADC_DC_XOUT 608之組態的組態。 在上述實施例中,手電筒1〇〇可操作為電子羅盤。在此 操作模式中,可取決於手電筒100指向哪一方向而定提供 視覺、聽覺或觸覺回應。舉例而言,手電筒100之燈模組 145907.doc -55- 201038127 128之照明強度(或亮度)可取決於手電筒100指向之方向而 變化。在一實施例中,當手電筒100指向磁北時,照明強 度可較亮(例如,處於最大亮度)。當使用者朝向磁南順時 針或逆時針旋轉手電筒⑽時,照明強度可減小且可設定 為較低位*,例如,當指向正南時,為最小亮度。在替代 實施例中,可顛倒亮度位準。較佳的A,手電筒100保持 大體上水平,亦即,手電筒100之旋轉繞大體上垂直於地 面之軸發生。以此方式,手電筒1〇〇可用作羅盤,且使用 者可基於燈模組128之變化強度判定正北方向、正南方向 及在其之間的方向。 除變化亮度以外,當手電筒1〇〇指向北、南、東及西中 之或夕者或其附近時可使燈模組128閃爍以向使用者提 供其他方向資訊。舉例而言,可程式化該閃爍以在手電筒 1〇〇指向在相對於北、南、東或西之某角度(例如,+/_ 5。) 内的方向時發生。 3除上文所論述之視覺回應以外,手電筒100可經組態以 提供除視覺回應以外或代替視覺回應之聽覺或觸覺回應。 舉例而5,可程式化控制器510以取決於手電筒指向之方 向而輪出某序列之嗶聲(beep)或提供不同音調之嗶聲。此 外,當手電筒指向「北」、「南」、「東」《「西」之方向 時:手電筒可發出聲音「北」、「南」、「東」或「西」。此 =馭覺回應將經由音訊介面及揚聲器518(見圖提供,該 音訊介面及揚聲器518與控制器510通信。 或者,控制器510可連接至振動器而非音訊介面及揚聲 145907.doc 201038127 器518以提供取決於手電筒議指向之方向而變化的觸覺回 應。振動器可為(例如)具有偏心錘之簡 如上所註明,較佳的是,使用者將手電=〇維持在大 體上水千位置,同時將手電筒100用作磁羅盤。若不如此 維持手電筒刚,則可在羅盤操作中發生誤差。較佳的 是,此誤ϋ藉由使Μ前結合圖描述之加速計電路 512,Y軸量測手電筒之傾斜角且接著使用此資訊以校正羅 Ο ❿ 盤操作來校正。熟習此項技術者應瞭解,可採用其他類型 之磁阻感測器電路。 如上所指示’較佳的是,手電筒可在多種模式中操作。 ::進-步論述此等模式之操作及存取。圖1〇八為說明手電 同100可存取且執行各種模式之較佳操作方式7〇2的流程 圖。 使用者最初可以按壓及釋放序列啟動手電筒⑽之開關 168,如S步驟704中。手電筒100因此在步驟706中接通且 可開始產生光且可進人第—操作模式或操作模式!,如在 步驟7咐。在較佳實施例中,第—操作模式谓可為正常 或標準操作模式,其中燈模組128提供穩定光束。 在此階段,若制者對_168執行另—㈣及釋放序 列’則手電筒1〇〇可將此序列辨識為關斷命令71〇且可切斷 手電筒100,如在步驟712中。若不存在關斷命令,則使用 者可進人第二操作模式718。此可藉由使料將手電筒⑽ 繞其投射主軸U0向右旋轉714同時保持開關168被持續壓 下716來完成。 145907.doc •57- 201038127 “虽手電筒1GG處於第—操作模式中駕時(無關斷7ι〇), 右未谓測到繞其投射主軸11〇之向右旋轉7i4或若偵測到繞 其投射主軸no之向右旋轉714但開關168未被持續壓下 716,則手電筒100保持處於第一操作模式7〇8中。 旦手電筒100處於第二操作模式718中,其便可以另一 按屋及釋放序列關斷’如在步驟720中。若手電筒100未切 斷但替代地繞其投射主軸11()向右旋轉722同時開關被 持續壓下724,則手電筒⑽可進入至第三操作模式中。在 圖i〇A中,此由模式N表示726。此表示手電筒可較佳 遵循上述序列以存取任何數目之操作料。但纟較佳實施 例中’存在五種操作模式。 田手電筒100處於第二操作模式中718時(無關斷720), 若未偵測到沿其投射主軸11〇之向右旋轉722或若偵測到繞 其投射主軸110之向右旋轉722但開關168未被持續壓下 724,則手電筒1〇〇保持處於第二操作模式718中。 當手電筒1〇〇處於最後操作模式726中時,其可以按壓及 釋放序列關斷728。當手電筒1〇〇處於最後操作模式中時 (無關斷728),若手電筒100繞其投射主軸11〇向右旋轉”❶ 同時開關168被持續壓下732,則手電筒1〇〇可返回至第一 操作模式708。 當手電筒1〇〇處於最後操作模式中726時(無關斷728), 右未偵測到繞其投射主轴丨1〇之向右旋轉73〇或若偵測到繞 投射主軸110之向右旋轉73〇但開關168未被持續壓下732, 則手電筒100保持處於最後操作模式726中。 145907.doc -58- 201038127 因此,在較佳實施例中,手電筒100可藉由繞其投射主 軸110向右旋轉同時保持開關168被持續壓下來進入額外操 作模式。此操作允許手電筒100在不使用開關按鈕之按壓 及釋放之序列的情況下進入至新操作模式中。 雖然存在處於本發明之範疇内的各種操作模式,但在較 • 佳實施例中,可將具有可變亮度之穩定照明設定為第一操 作模式708。可將具有可變亮度之閃爍照明設定為第二操 〇 作模式718。其他操作模式可包括具有可變亮度之S0S模 式、運動敏感信號模式、電子羅盤模式及夜燈模式。可以 任意次序或視使用者需要指派此等操作模式。因此,若使 用者認為其比其他者頻繁地使用某(些)模式,則該使用者 因此可設定前幾個模式。 如先前結合圖9F所描述,3軸加速計電路512可包括輸出 ADC—X-G 616、ADC_Y-G 614 及 ADC_Z-G 012,該等輸出 可耦接至控制器電路510。加速計電路512可安裝於組裝電 Q 路板240上,其中,其Y軸沿手電筒1〇〇之縱軸指向。因 此,當手電筒100水平置放時,若手電筒100沿手電筒1〇〇 之縱軸順時針或逆時針旋轉,則將改變又及z軸上之加速 度之量值,且可將關於X及z之重力資訊分別經由adc_x_g ’ 616及ADC 一 Z-G 612發送至控制器602。控制器6〇2可使用 八0(:_乂-0 616及八0(:_2-0 612上之資訊以判定是否存在沿 手電筒100之縱轴之旋轉。因此,手電筒1〇〇可將繞其縱軸 之旋轉(或ADC_X-G 616及ADC—Z-G 612上之資訊改變)用 作命令決策點以便判定是否進入至新操作模式中。 145907.doc -59- 201038127 圖10A中所示之操作流程702可由儲存於控制器6〇2上之 記憶體中之軟體實施。因此可程式化控制器6〇2以基於自3 軸加速計電路512之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序列。換 5 之,¥ 控制器 602 自 ADC_X-G 616及 ADC—Z-G 612接收 資β孔時’控制器602可基於自3軸加速計電路512之輸出接 收之資訊來改變其執行序列。 亦可程式化控制器602以基於自3軸加速計電路512之輸 出接收之信號來控制穿過燈模組12 8之電力流。亦即,當 控制器602接收ADC 一 X-G 616及ADC一Z-G 612上之資訊 時,控制器602可基於儲存於控制器6〇2中之軟體之執行來 改變其輸出仏號中之一些。舉例而言,控制器6〇2可將其 輸出#號LAMP_DRIVE 624拉至高狀態以使得雙極電晶體 570及PMOS 5 72傳導。以此方式,電力可自内部電源電壓 VBAT 560流動至電壓輸出墊VL〇AD 576以形成可用於接 通燈模組128之電流之迴路的一部分。 热I此項技術者應瞭解,圖丨〇A中之流程圖僅為實 例,且亦可採用其他類型之操作。舉例而言,當手電筒 100繞其投射主軸110向左旋轉同時保持開關168被壓下 時,可實施用於進入至新操作模式中之命令。 或者,可引起3軸加速計電路512之輸出ADc_x_g 616、 ADC—Y-G 614或ADC—Z-G 612之改變的由使用者進行之手 電筒⑽之其他類型的移動亦可用於手電筒1〇〇進入至新操 作模式中。 μ 現參看圖至圖101更具體地描述由本發明預期之不同 145907.doc •60· 201038127 操作模式之實例以及可如何調整每一模式。熟習此項技術 者應瞭解,除上述模式以外的操作模式在本發明之範疇 内。 圖1〇B為說明可由手電筒100執行之電子羅盤操作740之 流程圖。如先前結合圖10A所描述,手電筒100可執行複數 _ 個操作模式。較佳的是,手電筒100可藉由繞其投射主軸 110旋轉手電筒100同時開關168被持續壓下而自一操作模 Q 式切換至另一者。當手電筒100已進入至電子羅盤模式742 中時’手電筒1 00之光源最初可產生穩定標準光流。 在操作740之步驟之後,手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷 712,例如,使用者執行諸如開關168之按壓及釋放之關斷 命令744。 當手電筒1〇〇處於電子羅盤模式中742時(無關斷744), 右手電筒100繞其投射主軸110向右旋轉746同時開關168被 持續壓下748,則手電筒1〇〇可進入至下一操作模式75〇 ❹ 中。 可將下一操作模式指定為以下實例中之任一者:具有可 變焭度之穩定照明、具有可變亮度之閃爍照明、具有可變 7C度之SOS模式、運動敏感信號模式或夜燈模式。或者, •下一模式750可不同於上文列出之模式。 使用者可如下保持處於電子羅盤模式742中。若未偵測 到繞其投射主軸11〇之向右旋轉746或若偵測到繞其投射主 軸11〇之向右旋轉746但開關168未被持續壓下748,則手電 筒1〇〇可保持處於電子羅盤模式742中。 145907.doc -61 - 201038127 在步驟752中,该羅盤模式可提供閃爍能力以警告使用 者該手電筒指向四個基本磁座標(亦即,北、南、東或西) 中之任-者或其附近。為了幫助描述此特徵,應注意,手 電筒100大體具有沿其縱轴之中點或中心點。且若垂直軸 延伸穿過此中1點,則手電筒1GG可由使用者繞此中心點旋 轉換。之’手電筒100可具有旋轉中心。此處,若手電 筒100繞此中心點旋轉或圍繞其旋轉中心旋轉,以使得其 縱軸指向落入相對於基本磁座標中之一者之10。角内的方 向752則手電简1 〇〇將閃燦。在其他實施例中,此閃燦可 在手電筒⑽指向基本磁座標之任—側上之5。内的方向時 發生。因此警告使用者其大體面向基本磁座標。疊加閃爍 之所包括角範圍亦可為除+/_ 5。以外的角範圍。 羅盤模式742内之另一特徵亦可用於本發明。當手電筒 100繞其中〜旋轉時,若如在步驟乃^中手電筒1⑽之前端 面向地球磁北,則如在步驟758中燈模組128可變得較亮 (例如’其可達到其最亮設定)。相反,當手電筒1G0繞其中 轉以使得如在步驟76〇中其前端面向地球磁南時,燈 模組128可没定為較暗762(例如,設定至其最暗設定)。 在另一實施例中,可相反地程式化手電筒100。亦即, 當手電筒_圍繞其中心旋轉時,若手電筒1〇〇之前端面向 求磁南則燈模組128可變得較亮。且當手電筒圍繞 其旋轉中心旋轉時,若手電筒100之前端面向地球磁北, 則燈模組128可設定為較暗。 如先前結合圖9G所描述,較佳磁阻感測器電路514可包 145907.doc 201038127 括一磁力計660,其可產生可輕接至控制器電路512之輸出 信號 ADC_DC_XOUT 608、ADC_DC_YOUT 606 及 ADC_ DC_ZOUT 604。 當手電筒100之縱軸水平且圍繞其中心旋轉時, ADC—DC—YOUT 606上之值將在手電筒1〇〇之縱軸110改變 時改變,因為Y軸設定為與手電筒100之縱軸110重合。 其他兩個輸出 ADC_DC_XOUT 608 及 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604可在手電筒100之縱軸110取決於投射於水平面上之該 等輸出之向量分量而改變時改變。因為手電筒100可繞其 縱轴旋轉,所以X軸或Z轴可指向地球。在發生此情況 時,當手電筒1〇〇水平置放且圍繞旋轉中心旋轉時,此轴 之投射於水平面上之向量分量為零且此轴之輸出將不具有 任何改變。若X軸或Z軸皆不面向地球,則當手電筒100水 平置放且圍繞旋轉中心旋轉時,X軸與Z軸之輸出可取決 於其投射於水平面上之向量分量而改變。磁性資訊經由 ADC_DC_YOUT 606、ADC_DC_XOUT 608 及 ADC_DC_ ZOUT 604發送至控制器602。 控制器 602可使用 ADC_DC_YOUT 606、ADC_DC_XOUT 608及ADC_DC_ZOUT 604上之資訊以判定手電筒100是否 已圍繞其旋轉中心旋轉及旋轉了多少。因此,手電筒100 可使用圍繞其旋轉中心之旋轉(或ADC_DC_YOUT 606、 ADC_DC_XOUT 608 及 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604上之資訊)以判 定燈模組128上之亮度或是否需要燈模組128上之閃爍。 燈模組128上之亮度可藉由以高於人眼可偵測之頻率的 145907.doc •63- 201038127 頻率改變燈模組128上之作用時間循環來判定。燈模組128 上之作用時間循環可由LAMP_DRIVE 624信號上之高狀態 及低狀態之序列產生,該LAMP_DRIVE 624信號係由控制 器602驅動。信號LAMP_DRIVE 624上之高狀態及低狀態 之此序列以及負載電路徑上之其他分量可使雙極電晶體 5 70及PMOS 5 72交替導電及不導電。隨著開關傳導之循環 時間之百分比增加,燈模組128將變得較亮。另一方面, 隨著開關傳導之循環時間之百分比減小,燈模組128將變 得較暗。亦可使用除調變作用時間循環以外的調整光源之 亮度之方法,包括(例如)調整輸送至光源之電壓、電流及/ 或功率。 圖10B中所示之操作流程740可由儲存於控制器602之記 憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器602以基於自磁阻感 測器電路514之輸出接收之信號來控制穿過燈模組128之電 力流。當控制器602接收ADC_DC_YOUT 606 、 ADC_DC_XOUT 608及ADC_DC_ZOUT 604上之資訊時, 控制器602可基於儲存於控制器602中之軟體之執行來改變 其輸出信號中之一些(例如,LAMP_DRIVE 624)。 圖10C為說明較佳手電筒100之例示性運動敏感操作770 之流程圖。 當手電筒100已進入至運動敏感信號模式中772時,可自 記憶體774載入關於預設強度之資訊以供控制器602提供控 制信號來控制燈模組128上之亮度。在本實施例中,記憶 體可為嵌入於控制器602中之EEPROM。預設強度資訊可 145907.doc -64- 201038127 ==如,最小強度)。或者,預設強度資訊可為 定的。同_之前的最後使用強度。其他強度可為預 ' =合圖心所描述’手電筒⑽可執行複數個操作 模式。較佳的是’手電筒〗 , ㈣繞其投射主軸110旋轉 :電,時開議被持續塵下而自—操作模式切換至 2-者。在自記憶體?74載入預設強度資訊之後 Ο肖1〇0繞其投射主軸110向右旋轉778同時開關168被持續壓 則手電筒⑽可進入至下一操作模式78〇中。 〜可將下—操作模式指定為以下實例中之-者··具有可變 党度之穩定照明、具有可變亮度之閃爍照明、具有可變亮 度之SOS模式、電子羅盤模式或夜燈模式。 儿 另一方面,若開關168被釋放782,則運動敏感信號操作 可藉由伯測是否存在沿手電筒100之投射主軸110之向左旋 轉784來執行。若偵測到向左旋轉784,則手電筒⑽可被 〇 接通786。若手電筒_返回至先前位置,則手電筒100可 被切斷788。換言之,手電筒1〇〇可藉由將其向左旋轉且接 著將其旋轉回而在接通與切斷之間雙態切換。 手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而言,若壓下 且接著釋放_168,則手電筒⑽可將此序_識為關斷 命令790且手電筒100將被切斷712。 圖10D為說明手電筒100之較佳可變亮度操作模式8〇2的 流程圖。 當手電筒100已進入至可變亮度模式中8〇4時,可自記憶 145907.doc -65 - 201038127 體806載入預設強度資訊以供控制器6〇2提供控制信號以控 制燈模組12 8上之亮度。在較佳實施例中,記憶體可為散 入於控制器602中之EEPROM。預設強度資訊可為預定設 定(例如,最大強度)。或者,預設強度資訊可為在切斷手 電筒100之前的最後使用強度。其他強度可為預定的。 在自記憶體806載入預設強度資訊之後,若手電筒1〇〇繞 其投射主軸11〇向右旋轉810同時開關168被持續壓下8〇8, 則手電筒100可進入至下一操作模式8丨2中。 可將下一操作模式指定為以下實例中之一者:運動敏感 信號模式、具有可變亮度之閃爍照明、具有可變亮度之 SOS模式、電子羅盤模式或夜燈模式。 若手電筒100繞其投射主軸110向左旋轉814同時開關 仍被持績壓下808,則旋轉量可由控制器6〇2計算且手電筒 亮度可基於所計算之旋轉量而變化816。在較佳實施例 中,在旋轉手電筒100之前,將手電筒亮度設定為最大 值,而當手電筒100向左旋轉45。及45。以上時,將手電筒 亮度設定為最小值。換言之,當手電筒100自0。向左旋轉 至45。時,手電筒亮度可自最大值至最小值線性地改變。 若在手電筒100向左旋轉814時發現適當亮度,則開關 168可被釋放818且在此時存在之亮度可儲存於記憶^中 820。手電筒1〇〇可保持此亮度位準直至其切斷為止。 若壓下 為關斷 手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而言, 且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒1〇〇可將此序列辨識 命令822且手電筒1〇〇將被切斷712。 145907.doc -66- 201038127 圖10E為說明例示性手電筒loo之較佳s〇S操作模式832 的流程圖。例示性SOS操作模式832可類似於圖10D中所示 之較佳可變亮度操作模式802。兩者之間的差別可在於當 處於SOS操作模式832中時,可代替穩定亮度產生s〇S碼。 圖10F為說明例示性手電筒1 〇〇之例示性可變閃爍速率操 作模式8 6 2的流程圖。 當手電筒100已進入可變閃爍速率模式中864時,可自記 0 憶體866載入預設閃爍速率資訊以供控制器602提供控制信 號以控制燈模組128上之閃爍速率。在較佳實施例中,記 憶體可為嵌入於控制器602中之EEPROM。預設閃爍速率 資訊可為預定設定(例如,最大閃爍速率)。或者,預設強 度資訊可為在切斷手電筒100之前的最後使用之閃爍速 率。可使用其他預定設定。 在自記憶體866載入預設閃爍速率資訊之後,若手電筒 1〇〇繞其投射主軸11〇向右旋轉87〇同時開關168被持續壓下 ❹ 8M,則手電筒1〇〇可進入至下一操作模式872中❶ 了將下操作模式指定為以下實例中之一者:運動敏咸 饧號模式、具有可變亮度之穩定照明、具有可變亮度之 SOS模式、電子羅盤模式或夜燈模式。 • 若手電筒100繞其投射主軸110向左旋轉874同時開關168 仍被持續壓下868 ,則旋轉量可由控制器602計算且手電筒 閃爍速率可基於所計算之旋轉量來設定816。在較佳^施 例中,在旋轉手電筒1〇〇之前,將手電筒閃爍速率設定為 最大值,而當手電筒100向左旋轉45。及45。以上時,將手 145907.doc -67- 201038127 電同閃爍速率設定為最小值。換言之,當手電筒1〇〇自〇。 向左旋轉至45。時,手電筒閃爍速率可自最大值至最小值 線性地改變。 需要最咼閃爍速率設定為可由人眼偵測之值,例如,每 秒4次閃爍之速率可預定為最大閃爍速率,而每秒❹乃次閃 爍之速率可預定為最小閃爍速率。可設定其他閃爍速率。 若在手電筒100向左旋轉874時判定適當閃爍速率,則開 關168可被釋放878且經判定之閃爍速率可儲存於記憶體中 880。手電筒100可保持經判定之閃爍速率直至其切斷為 止。 手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而言,若壓下 且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒1〇〇可將此序列辨識為關斷 命令882且手電筒1〇〇將被切斷712。 如先前結合圖9F所描述,3轴加速計電路512具有輸出 ADC—X-G 616、ADC_Y-G 614及ADC一Z-G 612,該等輸出 亦辆接至控制器電路51〇。加速計電路512可安裝於組裳電 路板240上,其中,其γ軸沿手電筒1〇〇之縱轴延伸。因 此’當手電筒100水平置放時,若手電筒1〇〇沿手電筒1〇〇 之縱轴順時針或逆時針旋轉,則可改變X及Z軸上之加速 度之量值’且可將關於X及Z之重力資訊分別經由adc_x-G 616及ADC—Z-G 612發送至控制器602。控制器602可使 用八0匸一又-〇616及八0(:_乙-0 612上之資訊以判定是否存在 繞手電筒100之縱軸110之旋轉。手電筒1〇〇可將繞其縱軸 之旋轉(或關於ADC_X-G 616及ADC_Z-G 612中之改變之 145907.doc • 68 · 201038127 資訊)用作狀態以決定是否存在改變至相同操作模式内之 不同特徵的條件。 燈模組128上之可變亮度可藉由以高於人眼可谓測之頻 ㈣頻率改變燈模組⑶上之作用時間循環來判定。燈模 組128上之作用時間循環可由LAMp—DRive 信號上之 ·· 高狀態及低狀態之序列產生,該laMP_drive 624信號係 由控制器602驅動。信號LAMp—DRIVE 624上之高狀熊及 ❹議之此序列以及電負載路徑上之其他分量可:雙:電 晶體57〇APM〇S 572交替導電及不導電。若導電之時間週 期較長,則燈模組128較亮。另一方面,若導電之時間週 期較短,則燈模組128較暗。 燈模組128上之可變閃爍速率亦可藉由以由人眼可摘測 之頻率改變燈模組128上之作用時間循環來判定。支援可 變閃爍速率之電路可與支援先前所描述之可變亮度之電路 相同。 ❹ 作為組合,燈模組128上具有可變亮度之SOS模式或具 有可變亮度之閃爍照明可· M丄、 八 ”、、 猎由以由人眼可偵測之頻率形成 .燈模組128上之作用時間循環來產生。在低循環期間,燈 模組128切斷,而在高循環期間,燈模組128可具有且古於 ·· A眼可摘測之頻率的頻率之作用時間循環。換言之:、:低 頻率作用時間循環之古;田_ " 问週期内存在高頻率作用時間循環。 此功能可由控制器602執行。 圖10C至圖i〇F中所示之操作流程頂可由儲存於控制器 602之記憶體中之軟體督 ° 〈軟體貫施。因此,可程式化控制器6〇2以 145907.doc -69 - 201038127 基於自3軸加速計電路512之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序 列。當控制器602自3軸加速計電路512之ADC—X_G 616及 adc_z-g 612接收資訊時,控制器6〇2可基於此資訊來改 變其執行序列。 亦可程式化控制器602以基於自3軸加速計電路512之輸 出接收之信號來控制穿過燈模組丨28之電力流。當控制器 602自ADC—X-G 616及ADC—Z-G 012接收資訊時,控制器 602可基於儲存於控制器6〇2中之軟體之執行來改變其輸出 信號中之一些。 熟習此項技術者應瞭解,圖丨〇c至圖丨〇F中所說明之流程 圖為實例,且亦可採用其他類型之操作。舉例而言,用於 切斷手電筒1〇〇之條件可在手電筒100繞其投射主軸11〇向 左知:轉同時保持開關168被壓下時發生。且用於接通手電 筒1〇〇之條件可在手電筒1〇〇繞其投射主軸11〇向右旋轉同 時保持開關168被壓下時發生。且,具有可變亮度之可變 亮度模式、可變閃爍速率模式或S〇s模式中之可變性特徵 可藉由在與圖10C至圖10F中所說明之方向相反之方向上旋 轉手電筒100獲得。 可引起3軸加速計電路512之輸出之改變的手電筒1〇〇之 其他類型之移動亦可用作手電筒1〇〇改變特徵之命令。因 此’本發明不限於用於與控制器602介接之本文中所描述 之移動。 圖10G為展示手電筒100之較佳夜燈操作900之流程圖。 如先前結合圖9所描述,手電筒丨〇〇較佳可以複數個模式操 145907.doc -70- 201038127 作,且手電筒100可藉由繞其投射主轴110旋轉手電筒1〇〇 同時開關16 8被持續壓下而自一操作模式切換至另—者 當手電筒100已進入至夜燈模式中902時,可將手電筒 之光源設定為穩定照明。 手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而言若麼下 - 且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒可將此序列辨識為關斷 命令9〇4且手電筒100可被切斷712。 ❹ 當手電筒1〇0處於夜燈模式900中時(無關斷9〇4),若手 電筒1〇〇繞其投射主軸110向右旋轉906同時開關168被持續 壓下908,則手電筒100可進入至下一操作模式91〇中。 可將下一操作模式指定為以下實例中之一者:具有可變 売度之穩定照明、具有可變亮度之閃爍照明、具有可變亮 度之s〇s模式、電子羅盤模式或運動敏感信號模式。 當手電筒100處於夜燈模式900中而無關斷9〇4時,若未 偵測到繞其投射主軸i 10之向右旋轉9〇6或若偵測到繞其投 〇 射主軸U〇之向右旋轉9〇6但開關168未被持續壓下908,則 手電錡100保持處於夜燈模式900中。可重設計時器912以 允許使用者必要時改變至新操作模式中。若在計時器期滿 914之前不存在改變至新操作模式中之指示,則手電筒10〇 可藉由將手電筒100設定為最低亮度91 6開始夜燈功能。在 較佳實施例中,可設定計時器在30秒内期滿,此時,手電 筒100可逐漸變暗直至達到其最低亮度。在另一實施例 中手電笱可變暗且最終完全切斷。一旦手電筒1〇〇開 始在夜燈模式中操作,則其可持續提供最低(或其他預設 145907.doc 71 201038127 定)亮度直至手電筒⑽偵測到碰撞918為止,此時, 筒100可設定為最高(或其他)亮度92G且例行程 驟904 。 y 〇 在操作巾’當使用者計财黑暗環境巾睡眠時盆可將 手電筒_設定為夜燈模式9〇2。作為回應,手電筒⑽將 在设疋時間(諸如,30秒)之後變暗直至預定亮度位準。較 佳地,亮度位準設定於極低位準(諸如,其正常作用時間 循%之5%至1()%),以使得電池上之電力_極低。雖然 為低電力輪出,但手電筒將保持可見以使得使用者可在黑 产暗環境中容易地確定該手電筒之位置。當使用者需要手電 R 100時’其所需做的僅為移動手電筒100且藉由手電筒 1〇〇對此移動之偵測可立即使手電筒⑽變成最高(或其他 預設定)亮度。使用者接著可具有諸如3〇秒之預定義窗以 切斷手電筒100或使手電筒⑽進人至新操作模式中。 可調整30秒之時段且可採用例如-分鐘之其他時段。 〇 如先前結合圖9F所描述,3軸加速計電路512具有輪出 AUG 616 ' ADC_Y_G 614及ADC z g 612,該等輸出 亦可耦接至控制器電路510。加速計電路512可安裝於組裝 電路板240上,其中,其丫軸沿手電筒1〇〇之縱軸延伸。當 手電筒1GG在水平位置中時’若手電筒i嶋其縱軸ιι〇順 時針或逆時針旋轉,則可改變乂及z軸上之加速度之量 值,且可將關於X及Z之重力資訊分別經由ADC—x_g 616 及ADC一Z-G 612發送至控制器602。控制器6〇2可使用來自 ADC—X-g 616及ADC—Z_G 612之資訊以判定是否存在繞手 145907.doc -72- 201038127 電筒100之縱軸110之旋轉。手電筒100可偵測碰撞或滾動 (或ADC_X-G 616及ADC_Z-G 612上之資訊改變)且使用此 資訊以判定手電筒100是否應保持為夜燈。 燈模組12 8上之凴度可藉由將燈模組12 8上之作用時間循 環改變至高於人眼可偵測之頻率的頻率來判定。燈模組 128上之作用時間循環可由lamp—DRIVE 624信號上之高 狀態及低狀態之序列產生,該LAMP-DRIVE 624信號係由 ❹ 控制器602驅動。信號LAMP—DRIVE 624上之高狀態及低 狀態之此序列以及負载電路徑上之其他分量可使雙極電晶 體570及PMOS 572交替導電及不導電。當每一循環中之導 電時間之百分比在1〇0%時,燈模組128將處於其最高亮 度。另一方面,當每一循環中之導電時間之百分比接近 0%時’燈模組128將處於其最低亮度。 圖10G中所示之操作流程9〇〇可由儲存於控制器6〇2之記 憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器602以基於自3軸加速 ❹ 計電路512之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序列。當控制器 602 自 3 轴加速計電路 512iADC_X-G 616 及 ADC—Z-G 012 接收資訊時’控制器602可基於該資訊來改變其執行序 列。 •亦可程式化控制器602以基於自3轴加速計電路512之輪 出接收之信號來控制穿過燈模組128之電力流。當控制器 602自ADC—X-G 616及ADC_Z-G 612接收資訊時,控制器 602可基於儲存於控制器602中之軟體之執行來改變其輸出 信號中之一些。 145907.doc -73· 201038127 圖1 OH為說明手電筒100之較佳可調整操作模式922的流 程圖。如先前結合圖1 0A所描述,手電筒1 〇〇較佳以複數個 模式操作,且手電筒100可藉由繞投射主軸110旋轉手電筒 10 0同時開關16 8被持續壓下而自一操作模式切換至另一 者。然而’一些使用者慣用右手而一些使用者慣用左手。 因此’需要手電筒100繞其投射主軸110之旋轉方向可由使 用者根據圖10H中所示之程序922來設定。The power supply of the Wheatstone bridge in the magnetometer 660 (indicated by VB) can be supported by the signal line +VCOMPASS 644, which in turn can be generated from the +2 provided on the output 590 of the LDO regulator 508. 8V power signal. The emitter of the PNP bipolar transistor 642 is coupled to +2. The 8V 590 power supply, and the collector of the bipolar transistor 642 is coupled to the signal line +VCOMPASS 644. The base of the bipolar transistor 642 can be coupled to the signal line COMPASS DISABLE 145907. Doc-54-201038127 624, which may be a round trip from controller circuit 512. The set/reset (SR) input of magnetometer 660 can be provided from two sources. The first source can be the signal line +VCOMPASS 644. The second source can be generated from signal line S/R/MOSI 620, which can be an output from controller circuit 510. The signal line S/R/MOSI 620 can be coupled to the base of the NPN bipolar transistor 654 whose emitter is coupled to ground. The signal line 652, which can be coupled to the collector of the bipolar transistor 654, can also be the second source of the set/reset (SR) input of the magnetometer 660. The output of magnetometer 660 can be grouped into three sets of differential voltage outputs: OUTX+662 and OUTX-664; OUTY+666 and OUTY-668; and OUTY+670 and OUTY-672. OUTX+662, OUTX-664 can be coupled to the positive and negative inputs of operational amplifier 682, respectively, which can produce an output ADC_DC_XOUT 608 that can be coupled to controller circuit 510 for further processing. Output 八(:_0(:_乂01; butyl 608 can be fed back to the negative input 678 of operational amplifier 682 via resistor 686 and capacitor 688 connected in parallel. Additionally, the positive input of operational amplifier 680 can be coupled to the reference voltage REF_COMPASS It can be generated by a voltage divider from +VCOMPASS 644. Likewise, other sets of differential voltage outputs can be used to generate ADC_DC_YOUT 606 and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604, which can also have a configuration similar to the configuration of ADC_DC_XOUT 608 previously described. In the above embodiment, the flashlight 1 is operable as an electronic compass. In this mode of operation, a visual, audible or tactile response may be provided depending on which direction the flashlight 100 is directed to. For example, the flashlight 100 Light module 145907. The illumination intensity (or brightness) of doc -55- 201038127 128 may vary depending on the direction in which the flashlight 100 is pointing. In an embodiment, when the flashlight 100 is pointed to magnetic north, the illumination intensity may be brighter (e.g., at maximum brightness). When the user rotates the flashlight (10) clockwise or counterclockwise toward the magnetic south, the illumination intensity can be reduced and can be set to a lower position*, for example, when pointing to the south, the minimum brightness. In an alternate embodiment, the brightness level can be reversed. Preferably, flashlight 100 remains substantially horizontal, i.e., the rotation of flashlight 100 occurs about an axis substantially perpendicular to the ground. In this manner, the flashlight 1 can be used as a compass, and the user can determine the north-north direction, the south-right direction, and the direction therebetween based on the varying intensity of the lamp module 128. In addition to varying brightness, the light module 128 can be flashed to provide other directions to the user when the flashlight 1 is pointing to or near the north, south, east, and west. For example, the flicker can be programmed to occur when the flashlight 1 〇〇 points in a direction relative to an angle (eg, +/_ 5) relative to north, south, east, or west. 3 In addition to the visual response discussed above, flashlight 100 can be configured to provide an audible or tactile response in addition to or in lieu of a visual response. For example, the programmable controller 510 can rotate a sequence of beeps or provide different tones depending on the direction in which the flashlight is directed. In addition, when the flashlight points in the direction of "North", "South", "East" and "West": the flashlight can sound "North", "South", "East" or "West". This = audible response will be via the audio interface and speaker 518 (see figure, the audio interface and speaker 518 are in communication with the controller 510. Alternatively, the controller 510 can be connected to the vibrator instead of the audio interface and the speaker 145907. The doc 201038127 518 provides a tactile response that varies depending on the direction in which the flashlight is pointed. The vibrator can be, for example, an eccentric hammer. As noted above, it is preferred that the user maintains the flashlight = 〇 at a substantially water position while using the flashlight 100 as a magnetic compass. If this is not the case, the flashlight is just being operated, and an error can occur in the compass operation. Preferably, this error is corrected by the accelerometer circuit 512 described in conjunction with the figure, the Y-axis measuring the tilt angle of the flashlight and then using this information to correct the operation of the ram. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other types of magnetoresistive sensor circuits can be employed. As indicated above, it is preferred that the flashlight can operate in a variety of modes. :: Step-by-step discussion of the operation and access of these modes. Fig. 1 is a flow chart showing the preferred operation mode 7〇2 of the flashlight with 100 being accessible and executing various modes. The user can initially press and release the sequence to activate the switch 168 of the flashlight (10), as in step S704. The flashlight 100 is thus turned "on" in step 706 and can begin to produce light and can enter the first mode of operation or mode of operation! As in step 7咐. In the preferred embodiment, the first mode of operation may be a normal or standard mode of operation in which the light module 128 provides a steady beam of light. At this stage, if the controller executes another - (4) and releases the sequence _ 168, the flashlight 1 can recognize the sequence as the shutdown command 71 and can turn off the flashlight 100, as in step 712. If there is no shutdown command, the user can enter the second mode of operation 718. This can be accomplished by rotating the flashlight 714 about the throwing spindle U0 about its throwing spindle U0 while keeping the switch 168 continuously depressed 716. 145907. Doc •57- 201038127 “While the flashlight 1GG is in the first operation mode (no interruption 7ι〇), the right does not measure the rotation of the main axis 11〇 to the right 7i4 or if it is detected around it. Rotating 714 to the right but the switch 168 is not continuously depressed 716, the flashlight 100 remains in the first mode of operation 7 〇 8. Once the flashlight 100 is in the second mode of operation 718, it can be another button and release sequence Turning off 'as in step 720. If the flashlight 100 is not turned off but instead rotates 722 about its projection spindle 11 () to the right while the switch is continuously depressed 724, the flashlight (10) can enter the third mode of operation. In Figure iA, this is indicated by mode N 726. This means that the flashlight preferably follows the sequence described above to access any number of operating materials. However, in the preferred embodiment, there are five modes of operation. Field flashlight 100 is in the first In the second mode of operation, at 718 (unrelated to 720), if the rightward rotation 722 along its projection spindle 11 is not detected or if the rightward rotation 722 is detected about its projection spindle 110, the switch 168 is not continuously pressed. Under 724, the flashlight remains In the second mode of operation 718. When the flashlight 1 is in the last mode of operation 726, it can press and release the sequence off 728. When the flashlight 1 is in the last mode of operation (unrelated 728), if the flashlight 100 rotates to the right around its projection spindle 11"" While the switch 168 is continuously depressed 732, the flashlight 1 can be returned to the first mode of operation 708. When the flashlight 1 is in the last mode of operation 726 (no interruption 728), the right does not detect a rightward rotation of the projection axis 丨1〇 73〇 or if the right rotation of the projection spindle 110 is detected 73 While the switch 168 is not continuously depressed 732, the flashlight 100 remains in the last mode of operation 726. 145907. Doc-58- 201038127 Thus, in the preferred embodiment, flashlight 100 can be rotated to the right by rotating its main axis 110 while maintaining switch 168 continuously depressed for additional operational modes. This operation allows the flashlight 100 to enter the new mode of operation without the use of a sequence of presses and releases of the switch button. While there are various modes of operation that are within the scope of the present invention, in a preferred embodiment, stable illumination with variable brightness can be set to the first mode of operation 708. The blinking illumination with variable brightness can be set to the second operating mode 718. Other modes of operation may include a SOS mode with variable brightness, a motion sensitive signal mode, an electronic compass mode, and a night light mode. These modes of operation can be assigned in any order or as desired by the user. Therefore, if the user thinks that he or she frequently uses the mode(s) more than others, the user can set the first few modes. As previously described in connection with FIG. 9F, 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 can include output ADC-X-G 616, ADC_Y-G 614, and ADC_Z-G 012, which can be coupled to controller circuit 510. The accelerometer circuit 512 can be mounted to the assembled electrical Q board 240 with its Y axis pointing along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1〇〇. Therefore, when the flashlight 100 is placed horizontally, if the flashlight 100 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1 则, the magnitude of the acceleration on the z-axis will be changed, and the X and z may be Gravity information is sent to controller 602 via adc_x_g '616 and ADC-ZG 612, respectively. The controller 6〇2 can use the information on 八((:_乂-0 616 and 八0(:_2-0 612) to determine whether there is rotation along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 100. Therefore, the flashlight can be wound around The rotation of its vertical axis (or information changes on ADC_X-G 616 and ADC-ZG 612) is used as a command decision point to determine whether to enter the new operating mode. Doc - 59 - 201038127 The operational flow 702 shown in Figure 10A can be implemented by software stored in the memory on the controller 6〇2. The programmable controller 6〇2 thus controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. In other words, when the controller 602 receives the beta hole from the ADC_X-G 616 and the ADC-Z-G 612, the controller 602 can change its execution sequence based on the information received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. The controller 602 can also be programmed to control the flow of power through the lamp module 128 based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. That is, when controller 602 receives information on ADC-X-G 616 and ADC-Z-G 612, controller 602 can change some of its output apostrophes based on the execution of the software stored in controller 〇2. For example, controller 6〇2 can pull its output #number LAMP_DRIVE 624 to a high state to cause bipolar transistor 570 and PMOS 5 72 to conduct. In this manner, power can flow from internal supply voltage VBAT 560 to voltage output pad VL 〇 AD 576 to form a portion of the loop that can be used to pass current to lamp module 128. Heat I should understand that the flowchart in Figure A is only an example, and other types of operations can be used. For example, when the flashlight 100 is rotated to its left about its projection spindle 110 while the switch 168 is depressed, a command for entering into the new mode of operation can be implemented. Alternatively, other types of movements of the flashlight (10) that can cause changes in the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512, ADc_x_g 616, ADC-YG 614, or ADC-ZG 612, can also be used for flashlights 1 to new operations. In mode. μ Referring now to Figure 101, the differences expected by the present invention are more specifically described. Doc •60· 201038127 Examples of operating modes and how each mode can be adjusted. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that modes of operation other than those described above are within the scope of the present invention. 1B is a flow diagram illustrating an electronic compass operation 740 that may be performed by flashlight 100. Flashlight 100 can perform a plurality of modes of operation as previously described in connection with FIG. 10A. Preferably, the flashlight 100 can be switched from one mode of operation to the other by rotating the flashlight 100 about its projection spindle 110 while the switch 168 is continuously depressed. When the flashlight 100 has entered the electronic compass mode 742, the light source of the flashlight 100 initially produces a steady standard optical flow. After the step of operation 740, the flashlight 100 can be turned off 712 by a specified method, for example, the user performs a shutdown command 744 such as pressing and releasing of the switch 168. When the flashlight 1 is in the electronic compass mode 742 (unrelated to 744), the right flashlight 100 rotates 746 to its right about its projection spindle 110 while the switch 168 is continuously depressed 748, the flashlight 1〇〇 can proceed to the next operation. Mode 75〇❹. The next mode of operation can be specified as any of the following examples: stable illumination with variable twist, flicker illumination with variable brightness, SOS mode with variable 7C degrees, motion sensitive signal mode, or night light mode . Alternatively, • The next mode 750 can be different from the modes listed above. The user can remain in the electronic compass mode 742 as follows. If the rightward rotation 746 around the projection spindle 11〇 is not detected or if the rightward rotation 746 around which the projection spindle 11〇 is detected but the switch 168 is not continuously depressed 748, the flashlight 1〇〇 remains Electronic compass mode 742. 145907. Doc - 61 - 201038127 In step 752, the compass mode provides a blinking capability to alert the user that the flashlight is pointing to or near any of the four basic magnetic coordinates (i.e., north, south, east, or west). To help describe this feature, it should be noted that flashlight 100 generally has a midpoint or center point along its longitudinal axis. And if the vertical axis extends through 1 point, the flashlight 1GG can be rotated by the user around the center. The flashlight 100 can have a center of rotation. Here, if the flashlight 100 is rotated about this center point or rotated about its center of rotation, such that its longitudinal axis points to 10 which falls into one of the basic magnetic coordinates. In the direction of the corner 752, the flashlight will be flashed. In other embodiments, the flash can be directed to the flashlight (10) on the side of the basic magnetic coordinate. Occurs within the direction. Therefore, the user is warned that it is generally oriented to the basic magnetic coordinates. The range of angles included in the overlay flashing can also be +/_ 5. Outside the angular range. Another feature within compass mode 742 can also be used with the present invention. When the flashlight 100 rotates around it, if the front end of the flashlight 1 (10) faces the earth magnetic north as in the step, the light module 128 can become brighter as in step 758 (for example, 'it can reach its brightest setting) . Conversely, when the flashlight 1G0 is rotated around it such that its front end faces the earth's magnetic south as in step 76, the light module 128 may not be defined as darker 762 (e.g., set to its darkest setting). In another embodiment, the flashlight 100 can be reversed. That is, when the flashlight _ rotates around its center, the light module 128 can become brighter if the front end of the flashlight 1 is facing south. And when the flashlight rotates around its center of rotation, if the front end of the flashlight 100 faces the earth's magnetic north, the light module 128 can be set to be dark. As previously described in connection with FIG. 9G, preferred magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 can include 145907. Doc 201038127 includes a magnetometer 660 that produces output signals ADC_DC_XOUT 608, ADC_DC_YOUT 606, and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604 that can be lightly coupled to controller circuit 512. When the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 100 is horizontal and rotates about its center, the value on the ADC_DC_YOUT 606 will change as the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 1 is changed because the Y-axis is set to coincide with the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100. . The other two outputs ADC_DC_XOUT 608 and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604 may change as the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100 changes depending on the vector component of the outputs projected onto the horizontal plane. Because the flashlight 100 is rotatable about its longitudinal axis, the X or Z axis can point to the earth. When this occurs, when the flashlight 1 is placed horizontally and rotated about the center of rotation, the vector component of this axis projected on the horizontal plane is zero and the output of this axis will have no change. If neither the X-axis nor the Z-axis are facing the Earth, the output of the X-axis and the Z-axis may change depending on the vector component projected on the horizontal plane when the flashlight 100 is placed horizontally and rotated about the center of rotation. Magnetic information is sent to controller 602 via ADC_DC_YOUT 606, ADC_DC_XOUT 608, and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604. Controller 602 can use the information on ADC_DC_YOUT 606, ADC_DC_XOUT 608, and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604 to determine if flashlight 100 has rotated and rotated about its center of rotation. Thus, flashlight 100 can use rotation about its center of rotation (or information on ADC_DC_YOUT 606, ADC_DC_XOUT 608, and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604) to determine the brightness on lamp module 128 or whether flashing on lamp module 128 is required. The brightness of the light module 128 can be 145907 by a frequency higher than the human eye can detect. Doc •63- 201038127 The frequency change lamp module 128 operates on a time loop to determine. The active time cycle on lamp module 128 can be generated by a sequence of high and low states on the LAMP_DRIVE 624 signal, which is driven by controller 602. This sequence of high and low states on signal LAMP_DRIVE 624 and other components on the load electrical path can cause bipolar transistor 5 70 and PMOS 5 72 to alternately conduct and not conduct. As the percentage of cycle time for switch conduction increases, the light module 128 will become brighter. On the other hand, as the percentage of cycle time for switching conduction decreases, the lamp module 128 will become darker. Methods of adjusting the brightness of the source other than the modulation time cycle can also be used, including, for example, adjusting the voltage, current, and/or power delivered to the source. The operational flow 740 shown in FIG. 10B can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 602. The programmable controller 602 controls the flow of power through the lamp module 128 based on signals received from the output of the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514. When controller 602 receives information on ADC_DC_YOUT 606, ADC_DC_XOUT 608, and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604, controller 602 can change some of its output signals (eg, LAMP_DRIVE 624) based on the execution of the software stored in controller 602. FIG. 10C is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary motion sensitive operation 770 of the preferred flashlight 100. When the flashlight 100 has entered the motion sensitive signal mode 772, information about the preset intensity can be loaded from the memory 774 for the controller 602 to provide a control signal to control the brightness on the light module 128. In this embodiment, the memory can be an EEPROM embedded in the controller 602. Preset intensity information can be 145907. Doc -64- 201038127 == eg, minimum strength). Alternatively, the preset intensity information can be determined. The last used intensity before the same. Other intensities can be described in the pre-'==Fig.' flashlight (10) can perform multiple modes of operation. Preferably, the 'flashlight〗, (4) rotates around its projection spindle 110: when the power is switched on, the operation mode is switched to 2-. After the preset intensity information is loaded from the memory 74, the rotation of the spindle 110 is rotated 778 about its projection spindle 110 while the switch 168 is continuously pressed. The flashlight (10) can be moved to the next operation mode 78A. ~ The lower-operation mode can be specified as the following example - stable illumination with variable party, flashing illumination with variable brightness, SOS mode with variable brightness, electronic compass mode or night light mode. On the other hand, if the switch 168 is released 782, the motion sensitive signal operation can be performed by counting whether there is a leftward rotation 784 along the projection spindle 110 of the flashlight 100. If a leftward rotation of 784 is detected, the flashlight (10) can be turned "on" 786. If the flashlight _ returns to the previous position, the flashlight 100 can be turned off 788. In other words, the flashlight 1 can be toggled between on and off by rotating it to the left and then rotating it back. Flashlight 100 can be turned off 712 by a specified method. For example, if depressed and then released _168, the flashlight (10) can recognize this sequence as a shutdown command 790 and the flashlight 100 will be turned off 712. Figure 10D is a flow chart illustrating the preferred variable brightness mode of operation 8〇2 of flashlight 100. When the flashlight 100 has entered 8〇4 in the variable brightness mode, it can self-memorize 145907. Doc - 65 - 201038127 The body 806 loads the preset intensity information for the controller 6〇2 to provide a control signal to control the brightness on the light module 128. In the preferred embodiment, the memory can be an EEPROM that is interspersed in controller 602. The preset intensity information can be predetermined (e.g., maximum intensity). Alternatively, the preset intensity information may be the last used intensity before the flashlight 100 is turned off. Other strengths may be predetermined. After the preset intensity information is loaded from the memory 806, if the flashlight 1 rotates 810 around its projection spindle 11 同时 and the switch 168 is continuously pressed 8 〇 8, the flashlight 100 can enter the next operation mode 8丨 2 in. The next mode of operation can be specified as one of the following: motion sensitive signal mode, flashing illumination with variable brightness, SOS mode with variable brightness, electronic compass mode, or night light mode. If the flashlight 100 is rotated 814 about its projection spindle 110 to the left while the switch is still depressed by the driver 808, the amount of rotation can be calculated by the controller 6〇2 and the flashlight brightness can be varied 816 based on the calculated amount of rotation. In the preferred embodiment, the flashlight brightness is set to a maximum value prior to rotating the flashlight 100, and the flashlight 100 is rotated 45 to the left. And 45. In the above case, set the brightness of the flashlight to the minimum value. In other words, when the flashlight 100 is from zero. Rotate left to 45. The flashlight brightness can vary linearly from maximum to minimum. If the appropriate brightness is found when the flashlight 100 is rotated 814 to the left, the switch 168 can be released 818 and the brightness present at that time can be stored in the memory 820. The flashlight can maintain this brightness level until it is turned off. If it is depressed to turn off the flashlight 100, the 712 can be turned off by a specified method. For example, and then the switch 168 is released, the flashlight 1 can recognize the sequence 822 and the flashlight 1 will be turned off 712. 145907. Doc-66-201038127 FIG. 10E is a flow chart illustrating a preferred s〇S operating mode 832 of an exemplary flashlight loo. The exemplary SOS mode of operation 832 can be similar to the preferred variable brightness mode of operation 802 shown in Figure 10D. The difference between the two may be that when in the SOS mode of operation 832, the s〇S code can be generated instead of the stable brightness. Figure 10F is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary variable blink rate operating mode 862 of an exemplary flashlight. When the flashlight 100 has entered the variable blink rate mode 864, the preset flash rate information can be loaded into the memory 866 to provide the controller 602 with a control signal to control the blink rate on the light module 128. In the preferred embodiment, the memory can be an EEPROM embedded in controller 602. The preset flash rate information can be a predetermined setting (for example, the maximum blink rate). Alternatively, the preset strength information may be the last used flashing rate before the flashlight 100 is turned off. Other predetermined settings can be used. After the preset flashing rate information is loaded from the memory 866, if the flashlight 1 is rotated about its projection spindle 11 〇 to the right by 87 〇 while the switch 168 is continuously pressed ❹ 8M, the flashlight 1 〇〇 can enter the next In the operation mode 872, the lower operation mode is designated as one of the following examples: a motion-sensitive salty squat mode, a stable illumination with variable brightness, an SOS mode with variable brightness, an electronic compass mode, or a night light mode. • If flashlight 100 is rotated 874 about its projection spindle 110 to the left while switch 168 is still depressed 868, the amount of rotation can be calculated by controller 602 and the flashlight blink rate can be set 816 based on the calculated amount of rotation. In a preferred embodiment, the flashlight blink rate is set to a maximum value and the flashlight 100 is rotated 45 to the left before the flashlight is turned on. And 45. Above, will hand 145907. Doc -67- 201038127 The same flashing rate is set to the minimum value. In other words, when the flashlight is self-defeating. Rotate left to 45. The flashlight blink rate can vary linearly from maximum to minimum. The final blink rate is required to be set to a value detectable by the human eye. For example, the rate of 4 blinks per second can be predetermined as the maximum blink rate, and the rate of flashes per second can be predetermined as the minimum blink rate. Other blink rates can be set. If the appropriate blink rate is determined while the flashlight 100 is rotated 874 to the left, the switch 168 can be released 878 and the determined blink rate can be stored in the memory 880. Flashlight 100 maintains the determined rate of blinking until it is turned off. Flashlight 100 can be turned off 712 by a specified method. For example, if the switch 168 is depressed and then released, the flashlight 1 can recognize the sequence as a shutdown command 882 and the flashlight 1 will be turned off 712. As previously described in connection with Figure 9F, 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 has outputs ADC-X-G 616, ADC_Y-G 614, and ADC-Z-G 612, which are also coupled to controller circuit 51A. The accelerometer circuit 512 can be mounted on the panel circuit board 240 with its gamma axis extending along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1〇〇. Therefore, when the flashlight 100 is placed horizontally, if the flashlight 1 顺 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1〇〇, the magnitude of the acceleration on the X and Z axes can be changed' and X and The gravity information of Z is sent to controller 602 via adc_x-G 616 and ADC-ZG 612, respectively. The controller 602 can use the information on the 匸 又 又 〇 及 616 and 八 ( ( _ 乙 乙 乙 612 to determine whether there is a rotation around the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100. The flashlight 1 〇〇 can be around its longitudinal axis Rotation (or 145907 for changes in ADC_X-G 616 and ADC_Z-G 612. Doc • 68 · 201038127 Information) Used as a status to determine if there are conditions for changing to different characteristics within the same operating mode. The variable brightness on the lamp module 128 can be determined by varying the duty cycle on the lamp module (3) at a frequency higher than the frequency (4) at which the human eye can measure. The active time cycle on lamp mode group 128 can be generated by a sequence of high state and low state on the LAMp-DRive signal, which is driven by controller 602. The high-bearing bear on the signal LAMp-DRIVE 624 and the other components of the electrical load path and the other components of the electrical load path are: Double: The transistor 57〇APM〇S 572 is alternately conductive and non-conductive. If the time period of conduction is longer, the light module 128 is brighter. On the other hand, if the time period of conduction is short, the lamp module 128 is dark. The variable blink rate on the lamp module 128 can also be determined by varying the duty cycle on the lamp module 128 at a frequency that is measurable by the human eye. The circuit supporting the variable blink rate can be the same as the circuit supporting the variable brightness previously described. ❹ As a combination, the SOS mode with variable brightness on the light module 128 or the flashing illumination with variable brightness can be formed by the frequency detectable by the human eye. The action time on the lamp module 128 is cycled to produce. During a low cycle, the light module 128 is turned off, and during periods of high cycling, the light module 128 can have an active time cycle of frequencies that are at a frequency that is detectable by the eye. In other words: ,: the frequency of the low frequency action time cycle; field _ " question period memory in the high frequency action time cycle. This function can be performed by controller 602. The operation flow shown in Figs. 10C to iF can be applied by the software stored in the memory of the controller 602. Therefore, the controller 6〇2 can be programmed to 145907. Doc -69 - 201038127 Controls the operating sequence based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. When controller 602 receives information from ADC_X_G 616 and adc_z-g 612 of 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512, controller 6〇2 can change its execution sequence based on this information. The controller 602 can also be programmed to control the flow of power through the lamp module 丨 28 based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. When controller 602 receives information from ADC-X-G 616 and ADC-Z-G 012, controller 602 can change some of its output signals based on the execution of the software stored in controller 6〇2. Those skilled in the art should understand that the flow diagrams illustrated in Figures c through 丨〇F are examples and other types of operations may be employed. For example, the condition for cutting the flashlight 1 can occur when the flashlight 100 is tilted about its projection spindle 11 to the left: while the switch 168 is held depressed. And the condition for turning on the flashlight 1 可 can occur when the flashlight 1 is rotated to the right around its projection spindle 11 保持 while keeping the switch 168 depressed. Moreover, the variability characteristic in the variable brightness mode, the variable flicker rate mode, or the S〇s mode having variable brightness can be obtained by rotating the flashlight 100 in a direction opposite to the direction illustrated in FIGS. 10C to 10F. . Other types of movement of the flashlight 1 that can cause a change in the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 can also be used as a command to change the characteristics of the flashlight. Thus, the present invention is not limited to the movements described herein for interfacing with controller 602. FIG. 10G is a flow chart showing a preferred night light operation 900 of flashlight 100. As previously described in connection with Figure 9, the flashlight 丨〇〇 preferably can operate in multiple modes 145907. Doc -70- 201038127, and the flashlight 100 can be switched from one operating mode to the other by rotating the flashlight 1 around its projection spindle 110 while the flashlight 100 has entered the nightlight mode. In the middle of 902, the light source of the flashlight can be set to stabilize the illumination. Flashlight 100 can be turned off 712 by a specified method. For example, if - and then releasing switch 168, the flashlight can recognize this sequence as a shutdown command 9〇4 and flashlight 100 can be turned off 712. ❹ When the flashlight 1〇0 is in the night light mode 900 (uninterrupted 9〇4), if the flashlight 1 is rotated 906 around its projection spindle 110 and the switch 168 is continuously depressed 908, the flashlight 100 can enter The next operating mode is 91. The next mode of operation can be specified as one of the following examples: stable illumination with variable intensity, flicker illumination with variable brightness, s〇s mode with variable brightness, electronic compass mode, or motion sensitive signal mode . When the flashlight 100 is in the night light mode 900 without being interrupted by 9〇4, if the rightward rotation of the main axis i 10 is not detected to be rotated 9〇6 or if the direction around which the projection main axis U〇 is detected is detected Turning right 9 〇 6 but switch 168 is not continuously depressed 908, flash 锜 100 remains in night light mode 900. The timer 912 can be reset to allow the user to change to the new mode of operation if necessary. If there is no indication to change to the new operating mode before the timer expires 914, the flashlight 10 can start the nightlight function by setting the flashlight 100 to the lowest brightness 91 6 . In the preferred embodiment, the timer can be set to expire within 30 seconds, at which point the flashlight 100 can be gradually dimmed until its minimum brightness is reached. In another embodiment the flashlight can be dimmed and eventually completely cut. Once the flashlight 1 starts operating in the night light mode, it can continue to provide the lowest (or other preset 145907. Doc 71 201038127 The brightness is determined until the flashlight (10) detects the collision 918. At this time, the can 100 can be set to the highest (or other) brightness of 92G and the stroke 904. y 〇 In the operation towel 'When the user counts the dark environment towel to sleep, the basin can set the flashlight _ to the night light mode 9〇2. In response, the flashlight (10) will dim after the set time (such as 30 seconds) until the predetermined brightness level. Preferably, the brightness level is set at a very low level (e.g., its normal duty time is 5% to 1 (%) of %) so that the power on the battery is extremely low. Although turned out for low power, the flashlight will remain visible so that the user can easily determine the location of the flashlight in a dark dark environment. When the user needs a flashlight R 100, all that is required is to move the flashlight 100 and the detection of this movement by the flashlight 1 immediately turns the flashlight (10) into the highest (or other predetermined) brightness. The user can then have a predefined window such as 3 secs to cut the flashlight 100 or bring the flashlight (10) into a new mode of operation. The time period of 30 seconds can be adjusted and other time periods such as - minutes can be employed. As described previously in connection with FIG. 9F, the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 has a wheeled AUG 616 'ADC_Y_G 614 and an ADC z g 612, which may also be coupled to the controller circuit 510. The accelerometer circuit 512 can be mounted to the assembled circuit board 240 with its yoke extending along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 1 。. When the flashlight 1GG is in the horizontal position, if the flashlight i is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, the magnitude of the acceleration on the 乂 and z axes can be changed, and the gravity information about X and Z can be separately It is sent to controller 602 via ADC_x_g 616 and ADC-ZG 612. The controller 6〇2 can use information from the ADC-X-g 616 and the ADC-Z_G 612 to determine whether there is a bypass 145907. Doc -72- 201038127 Rotation of the longitudinal axis 110 of the flashlight 100. Flashlight 100 detects collisions or roll (or information changes on ADC_X-G 616 and ADC_Z-G 612) and uses this information to determine if flashlight 100 should remain a night light. The temperature on the lamp module 12 8 can be determined by changing the duty cycle on the lamp module 12 8 to a frequency higher than the frequency detectable by the human eye. The active time cycle on lamp module 128 can be generated by a sequence of high and low states on the lamp-DRIVE 624 signal, which is driven by ❹ controller 602. This sequence of high and low states on signal LAMP-DRIVE 624 and other components on the load electrical path allow bipolar transistor 570 and PMOS 572 to be alternately conductive and non-conductive. When the percentage of conduction time in each cycle is 1〇0%, the lamp module 128 will be at its highest brightness. On the other hand, when the percentage of conduction time in each cycle is close to 0%, the lamp module 128 will be at its lowest brightness. The operational flow 9 shown in Fig. 10G can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 6〇2. The programmable controller 602 controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. When the controller 602 receives information from the 3-axis accelerometer circuits 512iADC_X-G 616 and ADC-Z-G 012, the controller 602 can change its execution sequence based on the information. • The controller 602 can also be programmed to control the flow of power through the light module 128 based on signals received from the rotation of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. When controller 602 receives information from ADC-X-G 616 and ADC_Z-G 612, controller 602 can change some of its output signals based on the execution of the software stored in controller 602. 145907. Doc - 73· 201038127 Figure 1 OH is a flow diagram illustrating a preferred adjustable operating mode 922 of flashlight 100. As previously described in connection with FIG. 10A, the flashlight 1 〇〇 preferably operates in a plurality of modes, and the flashlight 100 can be switched from an operational mode by rotating the flashlight 10 0 about the projection spindle 110 while the switch 16 8 is continuously depressed. The other. However, some users prefer the right hand and some users prefer the left hand. Thus, the direction of rotation required for the flashlight 100 to project its main axis 110 can be set by the user according to the procedure 922 shown in Figure 10H.
在手電筒100藉由開關168上之按壓及釋放序列開啟924 之後,手電筒100之光源可開始產生光926且手電筒1〇〇可 進入至第一操作模式708中。After the flashlight 100 is turned on 924 by the press and release sequence on switch 168, the light source of flashlight 100 can begin to produce light 926 and flashlight 1 can enter first operational mode 708.
若投射主軸11 〇在大體上垂直方向上指向上928同時開關 168被持續壓下930,則可將手電筒1〇〇設定為慣用右手模 式932。若投射主軸11〇在大體上垂直方向上指向下4同 時開關168被持續壓下936,則可將手電筒100設定為慣用 左手操作模式93 8。控制器亦可經組態以使得若其經由尾 部帽蓋開關或經由運動敏感使用者介面接收預定義命令, 則控制器將返回至在製造期間所提供之預設設定。 、上:調整可藉由其他方法完成。舉例而f,慣用右手模 式可藉由使手電筒100指向下同時開關168被持續壓下或藉 由使手電筒1G0指向上同時繞其投射主軸ug向右旋轉手電 筒100來設定。 較佳實施例中,當處於慣用右手模式932中時, '式可藉由繞手電筒i⑽之投射主抽向右旋轉手 1〇0同時開關168被持續壓下而進入。且,當處於慣用 145907.doc -74- 201038127 模式中時,特徵亮度可藉由繞手電筒100之投射主軸11〇向 左旋轉手電筒100而在不同模式令變化。舉例而言,此情 形可發生以在穩定照明模式、閃爍照明模式或sos模式中 t化亮度。當處於慣用左手模式938中時,上文結果可藉 . 由在與慣用右手模式932中之方向相反的方向上繞手電筒 . 100之主軸旋轉手電筒100來達成。 或者,可引起3軸加速計電路512之輸出adc_x_g 616、 ❹ ADC-Y_G 614或ADC—Z-G 612之改變的手電筒100之其他 類型的移動亦可用作命令以供手電筒1〇〇調整使用者之模 式。 如先岫結合圖9F所描述,3軸加速計電路5 12可包括輪出 ADC—X-G 616、ADC—Y-G 614 及 ADC—Z-G 612,該等輸出 可耦接至控制器電路51〇。加速計電路512可安裝於組裝電 路板240上,其中,其γ軸沿手電筒1〇〇之縱軸延伸。當手 電筒100垂直指向上時,Y轴上之加速度之量值將為4G。 Ο 當手電筒1〇0垂直指向下時,Y轴上之加速度之量值將為 + 1G。可將關於γ之重力資訊經由ADC—Y_G 614發送至控 制器602。 " 控制器602可使用ADC_Y_G 614上之資訊以判定手電筒 ' 1〇〇指向上抑或指向下以判定慣用左手抑或慣用右手使用 者模式為所要的。 圖10H中所示之操作流程922可由儲存於控制器6〇2之記 憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器6〇2以基於自3軸加速 計電路512之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序列。當控制器 145907.doc •75- 201038127 602自3軸加速計電路512之ADC_Y-G 614接收資訊時,控 制器602可基於此資訊來改變使用者偏好(或參數設定)。 雖然關於判定手電筒100是否垂直指向之先前描述涉及 來自3軸加速計電路512之輸出ADC_X-G 616、ADC_Y-G 614及ADC—Z-G 612之資訊,但預期來自磁阻感測器電路 514之輸出八0(:_0(:_又01;丁 608、八0(:_0(:_¥01;丁 606及 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604亦可用於判定手電筒100是否垂直指 向。 如先月il結合圖9G所描述’較佳磁阻感測器電路5 14可包 括一磁力計660 ’其可產生亦可耦接至控制器電路512之輸 出信號 ADC—DC XOUT 608 ' ADC DC YOUT 606 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604。當手電筒1〇〇垂直置放時,來自 ADC_DC—YOUT 606之值可為零,因為在本實施例中,可 將Y軸設定為與手電筒1〇0之縱軸重合。此資訊可與其他條 件組裝以判定哪一使用者之模式為所要的。 圖101為說明手電筒100之較佳自動切斷操作942之流程 圖。如先岫結合圖10A所描述,較佳的是,手電筒j 〇〇可以 複數個模式操作。當手電筒100在任何操作模式令時,若 啟用自動切斷特徵944,則手電筒1〇〇可存取自動切斷常式 942。 手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而言,若壓下 且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒丨⑼可將此序列辨識為關斷 命令946且手電筒1〇〇將被切斷712。 當啟用自動切斷特徵944而無關斷946時,若手電筒1〇〇 145907.doc •76· 201038127 未被移動948,則可重设计時器95〇以用於在某時間量之後 自動切斷手電筒當此計時器流逝952時,+電筒1〇〇 可被自動切斷954。然而,在計時器期滿之前,手電筒1〇〇 上之任何移動可引起計時器重設。 在較佳實施例中’可設定計時器在5分鐘期滿。然而, 了》又疋。十時器在其他時間(例如,1 〇分鐘)期滿。 期滿時間可包含由控制器602所執行之軟體程式(例如, ❹ 言十數常式)實施的軟體計時器。或者,計時器可包含由電 子電路實施之硬體計時器。 當存在非作用性(例如,手電筒100在一時段内不移動) 時,可自動切斷手電筒100。電池電力因此可藉由此自動 切斷特徵來節省。在較佳實施例中,自動切斷特徵可由使 用者啟動或撤銷啟動。 如先則結合圖9F所描述,3軸加速計電路512可包括輸出 ADCJK-G 616、ADC—Y-G 014及ADC—Z-G 012,該等輸出 ◎ 亦可麵接至控制器電路510。加速計電路512可安裝於組裝 電路板240上,其中,其Y軸沿手電筒100之縱軸110延伸。 虽手電筒1 00水平定位時,若手電筒i 〇〇繞其縱軸i丨〇順時 .針或逆時針旋轉,則可改變又及Z軸上之加速度之量值, 且可將關於X及Z之重力資訊分別經由ADC_X-G 616及 ADC—Z-G 612發送至控制器602。控制器602可使用來自 ADC一X-G 616及ADC—Z-G 612之資訊以判定是否存在繞手 電筒100之縱軸11 〇之旋轉。以此方式,手電筒j〇〇可偵測 移動(或ADC_X-G 616及ADC_Z-G 612上之資訊改變)且使 145907.doc 77· 201038127 用此資訊以判定是否應重設計時器。 圖101中所示之操作流程942可由儲存於控制器6〇2之記 憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器602以基於自3軸加迷 計電路512之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序列。亦即,當 控制器602自3軸加速計電路512之ADC—X-G 616及ADC Z- G 612接收資訊時’控制器602可基於該資訊來改變其執行 序列。 可程式化控制器602以基於自3軸加速計電路512之輸出 接收之信號來控制穿過燈模組128之電力流。亦即,當控 制器602接收入〇(3_又-〇616及入〇(:_2-〇612上之資訊時, 控制器602可基於儲存於控制器602中之軟體之執行來改變 其輸出信號中之一些。 圖10J為展示手電筒100之較佳夜燈模式之流程圖。手電 筒1〇〇較佳可以複數個模式操作,且可進入夜燈模式9〇2, 如上所論述。手電筒100可藉由指定方法切斷712。舉例而 吕,若壓下且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒100可將此序列 辨識為關斷命令904且切斷手電筒1〇〇 712。 當手電筒100處於夜燈模式1110中而無關斷904時若手 電筒100繞其主軸110向右旋轉9〇6同時開關168被持續壓下 9〇8,則手電筒100可進入至下一操作模式91〇中。下一操 作模式可為上文所論述之模式或其他模式。 备手電筒100處於夜燈模式中而無關斷9〇4時若未偵測 到向右旋轉906或若偵測到向右旋轉但開關168未被持續壓 下908,則手電筒100保持處於夜燈模式中。可經歷重設計 145907.doc •78- 201038127 時器功能912、1112。在重設計時器1112之狀況下,若手 電筒向上傾斜45度繼之以向後傾斜移動1U6,且若瞬時開 關被持續壓下111 8 ’則可逐漸增加計時器。否則,計時器 可期滿914且手電筒可逐漸變暗直至最低亮度916或某其他 免度。此後’若偵測到碰撞918 ’則可將手電筒設定至最 % 高亮度920或某其他亮度。 圖10K為用於開始左或右組態1132(亦即,慣用左手或慣 ❹ 用右手操作)之流程圖。此處,若手電筒1〇〇被接通1134且 手電筒100向下傾斜、接著向上傾斜且接著向下傾斜且瞬 時開關168被持續壓下1138,且若接著瞬時開關168被釋放 ,則手電筒100可在組態1144中在慣用右手使用者模 式與慣用左手使用者模式之間雙態切換1142。在其他實施 例中,手電筒100可為兩手同功能的。 現參看圖11描述另一較佳手電筒實施例3〇〇。如圖示, 手電筒300大體上包括筒身324、位於筒身324之前端處之 〇 頭部總成104及位於筒身324之後端處之開關及尾部帽蓋總 成306。該頭部總成1〇4圍繞該筒身324之前端安置,且該 開關及尾部帽蓋總成306封閉該筒身324之後端。 圖12為/σ由3 02-302所指示之平面所截取的圖u之手電 -同300之部分橫截面圖。圖13為穿過由302-302所指示之平 面所截取的圖11之手電筒3〇〇之前區段的放大部分橫截面 圖。(橫截面中未展示與電池盒33〇有關之圖12、圖13之部 刀)圖15Α為圖11之手電筒300之頭部總成104、筒身324 及其他組件的分解透視圖。 145907.doc -79· 201038127 參看圖13及圖15A,頭部總成i 〇4大體上可包括組合頭部 及面部帽蓋112、it鏡116、反射器118、保持套環12〇、肩 式環126、燈模組128、下方絕緣體129及〇形環ιι4、122。 已結合圖3、圖5A、圖20、圖21A及圖㈣全面地描述頭部 總成104及包括組合頭部及面部帽蓋ιΐ2、透鏡ιι6、反射 器118、保持套環120、肩式環m、燈模組128、下方絕緣 體129及〇形環114、122之組件。 亦可使用頭部總成104之其他組態。舉例而言,在其他 實施例中,頭部總成104可形成機械開關構件之一部分以 提供使用者介面。 參看圖13,燈模組128如下電耦接至手電筒儿卜本實施 例之手電筒_包括電池盒33〇,其包括電麵接至燈模組 128之可壓縮正觸點133之正電極4M。在電流傳遞穿過光 源之後,接地連接自該光源之負電極延伸穿過充當燈模組 128之負觸點的散熱片外殼1S8及又電輕接至筒身324之肩 式環126。接地路徑繼續至内尾部帽蓋區段3δ4、波形彈簧 150及電路板348,該電路板348包括耦接至電池盒33〇上之 負電極之負觸點,藉此完成電路。 在本貫施例中,筒身324用作自燈模組128之負觸點至電 池盒330之負電極之接地路徑之一部分,如先前結合圖3及 圖5Α所描述。 參看圖13及圖15A,肩式環126之前區域189包括複數個 鍵槽193(最佳見於圖15 A中),其較佳圍繞肩式環丨26之前 區域18 9之一部分的圓周等距離隔開以便大體上在肩式= 145907.doc -80· 201038127 126之轴向上延伸。肩式環126之前區域189之外徑經尺寸 設計以使得其將提供與筒身324之前部分325之内壁的干涉 裝配且使得當肩式環126壓入裝配至筒身324之前部分325 中時鍵槽193將切入至筒身324之前部分325之内壁中。 當肩式環126壓入裝配至筒身324之前部分325中時,鍵 . 槽193將斜削且切入至筒身324之前部分325之内徑上的金 屬中。鄰近於肩狀物126上之鍵槽193之前端及後端設置環 ❹ 形釋放凹槽以自在壓入裝配操作期間移位之筒身324收納 金屬。以此方式,肩式環126永久鎖定於與筒身324之前部 分3 25之金屬對金屬接觸中。 鍵槽193可切開設置於筒身324之内部上之任何陽極氧化 塗層,藉此提供將筒身用作接地路徑之可能性,而不必須 進行切皮以移除陽極氧化物或在陽極氧化處理之前遮蔽接 觸區(以往在鋁手電筒之情況下需要如此)。 圖14為穿經由302-302所指示之平面所載取的圖u之手 〇 電筒300之後區段的放大部分橫截面圖。(然而,在圖14 中,橫截面中未展示電池盒330。)手電筒300之後區段大 體上包含開關及尾部帽蓋總成3〇6。圖15B為開關及尾部帽 • 蓋總成306之分解透視圖。 •參看圖14及圖15B,本實施例之開關及尾部帽蓋總成3〇6 較佳包括扣環132、下方開關外殼334、接觸接腳338、 340、接觸接腳彈簧344、346、電路板S48、波形彈簀 150、扣罩152、致動器354、上方開關外殼36〇、唇緣密封 件162、内尾部帽蓋區段364、開關埠密封件168及外尾部 145907.doc -81- 201038127 帽蓋區段170。 下方開關外殼334可類似於上文結合圖4所描述之下方開 關外殼134。因此’下方開關外殼334亦可包括三個圓柱形 通道及腔室。然而,在本實施例中,僅内部兩個通道設置 有接觸接腳338、340以滑進及滑出下方開關外殼334之前 表面。接觸接腳彈簧3 44、3 46可安裝於兩個腔室中且可又 喷合接觸接腳338、340上之肩狀物,如圖示。彈餐344、 346用以向前推動接觸接腳338、34〇直至其各別肩狀物嚙 合其各別腔室之端壁為止。接觸接腳338、34〇及接觸接腳 彈簧344、346較佳由金屬製成以便形成稍後描述之電路徑 之一部分。在本實施例中,接觸接腳338、34〇可包含諸如 鋁之金屬,而接觸接腳彈簧W4、346可包含諸如琴用鋼絲 之彈簧。 下方開關外殼334之通道經組態以與電池盒33〇之底部上 之觸點對準。當安裝電池盒33〇時,接觸接腳338可經對準 且與電池盒330之底部中央觸點(4 5VDC)接觸,且接觸接 腳340可經對準且與電池盒33〇之底部外環(GND)接觸。圖 17中展示兩個觸點。 電路板348較佳包括在兩側上之觸點。電路板348亦可包 括安排路線穿過板348以耦接相對側上之觸點之導電介 孔。或者,線可圍繞板348安排路線以耦接相對側上之觸 點。電路板348亦可包括安裝於其上之電子組件。電路板 348之前側(其面向下方開關外殼334)包括兩個觸點(標記為 GND及4.5VDC ’如圖17中所示),其分別電輕接至接觸接 145907.doc •82· 201038127 面向上方開關外殼 MOM及 4.5VDC且 腳彈簧344 ' 346。電路板348之後側(其 360)包括三個接觸墊,其對應於gNd、 位於“疋位置處。電路板州之前側及後側上之每一對相 應觸點可經由&置於電路板348中之導電介孔或者安排路 線之線電連接。稍後將在本說明f中描述組裝於電路板 348上之電子組件及其功能。If the projection spindle 11 is directed upwardly 928 in a substantially vertical direction while the switch 168 is continuously depressed 930, the flashlight 1〇〇 can be set to the conventional right hand mode 932. If the projection spindle 11 is directed downward in a substantially vertical direction and the switch 168 is continuously depressed 936, the flashlight 100 can be set to the conventional left hand mode of operation 938. The controller can also be configured such that if it receives a predefined command via the tail cap switch or via the motion sensitive user interface, the controller will return to the preset settings provided during manufacture. , Top: Adjustment can be done by other methods. For example, the conventional right hand mode can be set by causing the flashlight 100 to point downward while the switch 168 is continuously depressed or by turning the flashlight 1G0 upward while rotating the flashlight 100 to the right about its projection spindle ug. In the preferred embodiment, when in the conventional right hand mode 932, the equation can be entered by rotating the hand 1 〇 0 around the projection of the flashlight i (10) while the switch 168 is continuously depressed. Moreover, when in the conventional 145907.doc -74-201038127 mode, the characteristic brightness can be varied in different modes by rotating the flashlight 100 to the left around the projection spindle 11 of the flashlight 100. For example, this situation can occur to tune the brightness in a steady illumination mode, a flashing illumination mode, or a sos mode. When in the left-handed mode 938, the above results can be achieved by rotating the flashlight 100 around the spindle of the flashlight 100 in the opposite direction to the conventional right hand mode 932. Alternatively, other types of movement of the flashlight 100 that can cause a change in the output adc_x_g 616, ❹ ADC-Y_G 614, or ADC-ZG 612 of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 can also be used as a command for the flashlight to adjust the user's mode. As described above in connection with FIG. 9F, the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 52 can include a wheel-out ADC-X-G 616, an ADC-Y-G 614, and an ADC-Z-G 612, which can be coupled to the controller circuit 51A. Accelerometer circuit 512 can be mounted to assembly circuit board 240 with its gamma axis extending along the longitudinal axis of flashlight 1 。. When the flashlight 100 is pointed vertically up, the magnitude of the acceleration on the Y-axis will be 4G. Ο When the flashlight 1〇0 points vertically down, the magnitude of the acceleration on the Y-axis will be + 1G. Gravity information about gamma can be sent to controller 602 via ADC_Y_G 614. " The controller 602 can use the information on the ADC_Y_G 614 to determine whether the flashlight '1' is pointing up or down to determine whether the left-handed or right-handed user mode is desired. The operational flow 922 shown in Figure 10H can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 6〇2. The programmable controller 6〇2 controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. When controller 145907.doc • 75- 201038127 602 receives information from ADC_Y-G 614 of 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512, controller 602 can change user preferences (or parameter settings) based on this information. Although the previous description of determining whether the flashlight 100 is vertically oriented involves information from the outputs ADC_X-G 616, ADC_Y-G 614, and ADC-ZG 612 of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512, the output from the magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 is contemplated. Eight 0 (: _0 (: _ 01; D 608, 八 0 (: _0 (: _ ¥ 01; D 606 and ADC_DC_ZOUT 604 can also be used to determine whether the flashlight 100 is pointing vertically. As the first month il combined with Figure 9G described ' The good magnetoresistive sensor circuit 514 can include a magnetometer 660' that can generate an output signal ADC that can also be coupled to the controller circuit 512 - DC XOUT 608 'ADC DC YOUT 606 ADC_DC_ZOUT 604. When the flashlight 1 is vertical When placed, the value from ADC_DC_YOUT 606 can be zero because in this embodiment, the Y-axis can be set to coincide with the vertical axis of the flashlight 1〇0. This information can be assembled with other conditions to determine which one to use. Figure 101 is a flow diagram illustrating a preferred automatic cut-off operation 942 of the flashlight 100. As described above in connection with Figure 10A, it is preferred that the flashlight j 〇〇 can operate in a plurality of modes. Flashlight 100 in any mode of operation If the automatic cutoff feature 944 is enabled, the flashlight 1 can access the automatic cut off routine 942. The flashlight 100 can be turned off 712 by a specified method. For example, if the switch 168 is depressed and then released, Then the flashlight 丨(9) can recognize this sequence as the shutdown command 946 and the flashlight 1〇〇 will be cut 712. When the automatic cutoff feature 944 is enabled without interrupting 946, if the flashlight is 1〇〇145907.doc •76· 201038127 If it is not moved 948, the timer 95 can be reset for automatically cutting off the flashlight after a certain amount of time. When this timer expires 952, the flashlight 1〇〇 can be automatically cut off 954. However, in the timer Any movement on the flashlight before the expiration may cause the timer to reset. In the preferred embodiment, the 'settable timer expires in 5 minutes. However, it is again. The ten hour device is at other times (eg The expiration time may include a software timer implemented by a software program executed by the controller 602 (for example, a ten-digit routine). Alternatively, the timer may include a hard implementation by an electronic circuit. Body timer The non-acting (e.g., when the flashlight 100 does not move for a period of time), the flashlight 100 can be automatically turned off. Battery power can thus be saved by automatically cutting off the features. In a preferred embodiment, the automatic cutoff feature can be The user activates or deactivates the startup. As described in connection with FIG. 9F, the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512 may include an output ADCJK-G 616, an ADC-YG 014, and an ADC-ZG 012, which may also be connected to the control. Circuit 510. Accelerometer circuit 512 can be mounted to assembly circuit board 240 with its Y-axis extending along longitudinal axis 110 of flashlight 100. Although the flashlight i is positioned horizontally, if the flashlight i is rotated around its longitudinal axis i., the needle or the counterclockwise rotation, the magnitude of the acceleration on the Z axis can be changed, and the X and Z can be changed. The gravity information is sent to controller 602 via ADC_X-G 616 and ADC-ZG 612, respectively. Controller 602 can use information from ADC-X-G 616 and ADC-Z-G 612 to determine if there is a rotation about the longitudinal axis 11 of flashlight 100. In this way, the flashlight can detect motion (or information changes on ADC_X-G 616 and ADC_Z-G 612) and use 145907.doc 77· 201038127 to determine if the timer should be reset. The operational flow 942 shown in Figure 101 can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 6〇2. The programmable controller 602 controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis add-on circuit 512. That is, when controller 602 receives information from ADC-X-G 616 and ADC Z-G 612 of 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512, controller 602 can change its execution sequence based on the information. The programmable controller 602 controls the flow of power through the light module 128 based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 512. That is, when the controller 602 receives the information (3_又-〇616 and the input information (:_2-〇612), the controller 602 can change its output based on the execution of the software stored in the controller 602. Figure 10J is a flow chart showing a preferred night light mode of the flashlight 100. The flashlight 1 〇〇 preferably operates in a plurality of modes and can enter a night light mode 9 〇 2, as discussed above. The flashlight 100 can By way of a specified method, 712 is turned off. For example, if the switch 168 is depressed and then released, the flashlight 100 can recognize this sequence as the shutdown command 904 and turn off the flashlight 1 712. When the flashlight 100 is in the night light mode In the case of 1110 and irrelevant 904, if the flashlight 100 is rotated 9 〇 6 to its right around its main axis 110 while the switch 168 is continuously depressed 9 〇 8, the flashlight 100 can enter the next operating mode 91 。. The next operation mode can be For the mode discussed above or other modes. The flashlight 100 is in the night light mode and does not detect the rotation 906 to the right if it is not interrupted 9 〇 4 or if the switch 168 is not continuously pressed if the right rotation is detected At 908, the flashlight 100 remains in the night light In the case of the redesign 145907.doc •78- 201038127 time function 912, 1112. In the case of resetting the timer 1112, if the flashlight is tilted up 45 degrees followed by tilting 1U6 backwards, and if the momentary switch is Continue to press 111 8 ' to gradually increase the timer. Otherwise, the timer can expire 914 and the flashlight can be gradually dimmed until the minimum brightness 916 or some other degree of exemption. After that, if the collision 918 is detected, the flashlight can be turned on. Set to the most % high brightness 920 or some other brightness. Figure 10K is a flow chart for starting left or right configuration 1132 (i.e., left-handed or left-handed operation). Here, if the flashlight is Turning on 1134 and flashlight 100 is tilted downward, then tilted upward and then tilted downward and momentary switch 168 is continuously depressed 1138, and if momentary switch 168 is subsequently released, flashlight 100 can be used in configuration 1144 in the right hand The two-mode switch 1142 between the mode and the left-handed user mode. In other embodiments, the flashlight 100 can be functionally both hands. Another preferred flashlight embodiment 3 is described with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the flashlight 300 generally includes a barrel 324, a head unit 104 at a forward end of the barrel 324, and a switch and tail cap assembly 306 at a rear end of the barrel 324. The head assembly 1〇4 is placed around the front end of the barrel 324, and the switch and tail cap assembly 306 encloses the rear end of the barrel 324. Figure 12 is a diagram of /σ taken from the plane indicated by 03-302. A cross-sectional view of a portion of the flashlight - the same as 300. Figure 13 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of the section before the flashlight 3 of Figure 11 taken through the plane indicated by 302-302. (The knives of Figs. 12 and 13 relating to the battery case 33A are not shown in the cross section.) Fig. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the head assembly 104, the barrel 324, and other components of the flashlight 300 of Fig. 11. 145907.doc -79· 201038127 Referring to Figures 13 and 15A, the head assembly i 〇 4 can generally include a combined head and face cap 112, an iteroscope 116, a reflector 118, a retaining collar 12 〇, a shoulder The ring 126, the lamp module 128, the lower insulator 129, and the ring-shaped rings ιι, 122. The head assembly 104 and the combined head and face caps ι 2, lens ιι6, reflector 118, retaining collar 120, shoulder ring are fully described in conjunction with FIGS. 3, 5A, 20, 21A, and (4). m, the light module 128, the lower insulator 129 and the components of the shackles 114, 122. Other configurations of the head assembly 104 can also be used. For example, in other embodiments, the head assembly 104 can form part of a mechanical switch member to provide a user interface. Referring to Fig. 13, the lamp module 128 is electrically coupled to the flashlight of the embodiment of the present invention, including a battery case 33, which includes a positive electrode 4M electrically connected to the compressible positive contact 133 of the lamp module 128. After the current is transmitted through the light source, the ground connection extends from the negative electrode of the light source through the heat sink housing 1S8 which acts as the negative contact of the lamp module 128 and the shoulder ring 126 which is electrically coupled to the barrel 324. The ground path continues to the inner tail cap section 3δ4, the wave spring 150, and the circuit board 348, which includes a negative contact coupled to the negative electrode on the battery case 33, thereby completing the circuit. In the present embodiment, the barrel 324 is used as part of the ground path from the negative contact of the lamp module 128 to the negative electrode of the battery case 330, as previously described in connection with Figures 3 and 5B. Referring to Figures 13 and 15A, the front region 189 of the shoulder ring 126 includes a plurality of keyways 193 (best seen in Figure 15A) that are preferably equally spaced about the circumference of a portion of the region 18 9 of the shoulder ring 26 In order to extend substantially in the axial direction of the shoulder = 145907.doc -80· 201038127 126. The outer diameter of the front region 189 of the shoulder ring 126 is sized such that it will provide an interference fit with the inner wall of the front portion 325 of the barrel 324 and such that when the shoulder ring 126 is press fit into the portion 325 prior to the barrel 324 193 will cut into the inner wall of portion 325 of barrel 324. When the shoulder ring 126 is press fit into the portion 325 prior to the barrel 324, the key slot 193 will be tapered and cut into the metal on the inner diameter of the portion 325 of the forward portion 324 of the barrel 324. An annular relief groove is provided adjacent the front and rear ends of the keyway 193 on the shoulder 126 to receive metal from the barrel 324 that is displaced during the press-fit assembly operation. In this manner, the shoulder ring 126 is permanently locked in metal-to-metal contact with the front portion 3 25 of the barrel 324. The keyway 193 can cut any anodized coating placed on the interior of the barrel 324, thereby providing the possibility of using the barrel as a ground path without having to cut the skin to remove the anodic oxide or anodizing Masking the contact area before (this was required in the case of aluminum flashlights in the past). Figure 14 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of the section after the flashlight 300 of Figure u taken through the plane indicated by 302-302. (However, in Fig. 14, the battery case 330 is not shown in cross section.) The rear section of the flashlight 300 generally includes a switch and a tail cap assembly 3〇6. Figure 15B is an exploded perspective view of the switch and tail cap • cover assembly 306. Referring to Figures 14 and 15B, the switch and tail cap assembly 3〇6 of the present embodiment preferably includes a buckle 132, a lower switch housing 334, contact pins 338, 340, contact pin springs 344, 346, and a circuit. Plate S48, corrugated magazine 150, buckle cover 152, actuator 354, upper switch housing 36, lip seal 162, inner tail cap section 364, switch jaw seal 168, and outer tail 145907.doc -81 - 201038127 Cap section 170. The lower switch housing 334 can be similar to the lower switch housing 134 described above in connection with FIG. Thus, the lower switch housing 334 can also include three cylindrical passages and chambers. However, in the present embodiment, only the inner two passages are provided with contact pins 338, 340 to slide in and out of the front surface of the lower switch housing 334. Contact pin springs 3 44, 3 46 can be mounted in the two chambers and can be sprayed onto the shoulders on contact pins 338, 340, as shown. The bombs 344, 346 are used to push the contact pins 338, 34 forward until their respective shoulders engage the end walls of their respective chambers. Contact pins 338, 34A and contact pins Springs 344, 346 are preferably made of metal to form a portion of the electrical path described later. In the present embodiment, the contact pins 338, 34A may comprise a metal such as aluminum, and the contact pin springs W4, 346 may comprise a spring such as a piano wire. The passage of the lower switch housing 334 is configured to align with the contacts on the bottom of the battery compartment 33. When the battery case 33 is mounted, the contact pins 338 can be aligned and in contact with the bottom center contact (45 VDC) of the battery case 330, and the contact pins 340 can be aligned and outside the bottom of the battery case 33 Ring (GND) contact. Two contacts are shown in Figure 17. Circuit board 348 preferably includes contacts on both sides. Circuit board 348 can also include conductive vias that route through board 348 to couple contacts on opposite sides. Alternatively, the wires can be routed around the plate 348 to couple the contacts on the opposite side. Circuit board 348 can also include electronic components mounted thereon. The front side of the circuit board 348 (which faces the lower switch housing 334) includes two contacts (labeled GND and 4.5 VDC ' as shown in Figure 17) that are electrically connected to the contact 145907.doc • 82· 201038127 Upper switch housing MOM and 4.5VDC and foot spring 344 '346. The rear side of the board 348 (the 360) includes three contact pads, corresponding to gNd, at the "疋 position. Each pair of corresponding contacts on the front side and the back side of the board state can be placed on the board via & Conductive mesopores in 348 or wire electrical connections for routing. The electronic components assembled on circuit board 348 and their functions will be described later in this description f.
上方開關外殼360包括—圓柱形通道197,其允許致動器 354在其内滑動。開料密封件168之環形緣邊固持於位於 手電筒300後端處之外尾部帽蓋17〇之環形唇緣399與内尾 部帽蓋區段364之間。當使用者按壓在開關埠密封件168上 時,致動器354向前移動且唾合扣|152以閉合由扣罩152 及電路板348上之兩個接觸墊形成之開關。當使用者釋放 開關璋密封件168時,開關斷開。 在本實施例中,上方開關外殼36〇及致動器3m較佳包含 諸如塑膠之不導電材料。開關埠密封件168亦較佳包含諸 如橡膠之不導電材料。扣罩152較佳包含諸如金屬之導電 材料。可使用其他適當材料。 在本實施例中,扣環132置放於下方開關外殼334之前緣 與内尾部帽蓋區段364之間以防止下方開關外殼334向前移 動0 波形彈簧15 0可設置於電路板3 4 8之後緣與内尾部帽蓋區 段364之間以提供在兩者之間的可壓縮彈簧觸點。波形彈 簧15〇亦將偏壓力施加至電路板348,該電路板348又將偏 壓力施加至下方開關外殼334,藉此用以將 1乃開關外殼 145907.doc -83- 201038127 334按壓抵靠在扣環132上。 内尾部帽蓋區段364較佳包括在内尾部帽蓋區段364之前 邛外表面上之螺紋365以用於與筒身324之後部内表面上之 螺紋329配合。 在本實施例中’内尾部帽蓋區段3 64之後端之外徑及外 尾部帽蓋區段17 0之内徑較佳經大小設計以使得尾部帽蓋 170可永久壓入裝配至内尾部帽蓋區段364之後端上,藉此 形成整體開關及尾部帽蓋總成3。 内尾部帽蓋區段364較佳包含諸如鋁之導電材料。内尾 部帽蓋區段3 64亦可錢錄。 可在筒身324與開關及尾部帽蓋總成3〇6之間的界面處設 置諸如唇緣密封件162之單向閥以提供不透水密封同時允 許手電筒内之過壓力排放或排出至大氣、然而,可代替單 向閥162使用諸如。形環之其他形式之密封元件以形成不透 水密封。唇緣密封件162較佳由諸士口橡膠之不I電材料製 成。 可使用開關及尾部帽蓋總成3〇6之其他組態。舉例而 s,開關功能可包括於側面按紐開關或内部旋轉頭部維成 開關中,諸如,在2009年1月14曰申請之美國專利申; 第12/353,396號中所採用。 ” 現參看圖 15A、圖 16A、m ία » θ 11 « _ 、圖16B及圖17,現進一步描述電 池盒33G。如上所提及’電池盒謂較佳含有用於對手 則或其他照明裝置供電之電池。在將電池插入至電池: 330中之後,其可與手電筒則之其他組件—起插入至手; 145907.doc • 84 - 201038127 筒之筒身324中,如圖ISA及圖15B中所示。 如圖16A中所示,電池盒330可包括前端或燈端外殼總成 410及後端或尾端外殼總成4 3 〇。此兩個外般可由中央連接 器450固持在一起’均如圖16B中所示,圖16B為構成盒 330之組件之分解圖。 亦如圖16B中所示,前端或燈端外殼總成4丨〇可包括前外 殼411 ’其可以一組態形成以包括又形物411a、4llb、 ❹ 41 lc。前外殼總成410亦可包括燈正觸點412,該燈正觸點 412自身包括突出部413,該突出部41:3又包括活葉4i3a、 413b、413c、413d。活葉413經大小設計以使得孔414較佳 存在於其中央。如稍後所論述,此等突出部與中央連接器 450電接觸。前外殼總成41〇亦可包括前交又觸點々μ及彈 簧4丨6。觸點412、414及彈簧416較佳包含導電材料。 較佳以減少組裝組件所需之步驟之數目的方式製造前外 殼總成410。因此,前外殼411可由塑膠或其他適當材料射 Ο 出成形。此射出成形製程較佳包括燈正觸點412及前交又 觸點414與外殼411之共同模製。亦,觸點412、414較佳 . 心立於射出成形機中以使得其在所注入材才斗凝固時由所注 入材料環繞或另外固持在適當位置中。觸點位於射出成形 射以使得其結束在適當位置中以形成電路徑之部分,^ 稍後所描述。以此方式’可避免觸點412、414將附接至外 殼411之獨立製造步驟。 雖然共同模製為較佳的,但其他手段可用於組裝觸點 412、414與外殼411。在外殼4U及觸點412、414共同模製 145907.doc -85- 201038127 或另外組裝之後,彈簧416可壓入裝配至外殼411中以使得 其與前交叉觸點414接觸。舉例而言,彈簧416可壓入裝配 至外殼叉形物411 a、411 b之間的凹部中。雖然圖16B中未 展示此凹部’但後外殼43 1中展示類似凹部439。無論如 何,其他手段均可用於組裝彈簧416與外殼411。 後端或尾端外殼總成4 3 0可包括後外殼4 3 1,其可以一組 : 態形成以包括在兩個外殼總成410、430耦接在一起時對應 於月il外设叉形物411a、411b、411c之叉形物431a、431b、 43 1 c。後外殼430亦可包括後交叉觸點432、外環觸點434 〇 及彈簀417、418。觸點43 2、434及彈簧43 7、438較佳包含 導電材料。 可類似於前外殼總成410製造後外殼總成43〇以便減少組 裝步驟之數目。亦即’後交又觸點432及外環觸點434可在 射出成形製程期間與後外殼43 1共同模製以使得其適當地 疋位以形成電路徑之部分,如稍後所論述。雖然共同模製 為較佳的,但其他手段可用於組裝觸點432、434與後外殼 431。 ϋ 彈簧437、43 8接著可壓入裝配至後外殼431中以使得其 分別與觸點432、434電接觸。舉例而言,彈簧437、438可 . 壓入裝配至外殼43 1之凹部439中。其他手段可用於組裝彈 , 簧437、438與外殼43 1。 · 如圖16Α中所示,前外殼總成41〇及後外殼總成43〇耦接 至彼此以形成盒33〇。為了促進此耦接,如圖丨6Β中所示, 月J外/>又411可包括叉形物4Uc上之接腳419,其可嚙合形成 145907.doc -86 - 201038127 於後外殼431之叉形物431e中之孔436。同樣地,後外殼 431可包括叉形物431a、431b上之接腳437,其可嚙合前外 殼411之叉形物411a、411b中之孔(未圖示)。 兩個外殼411、43 1較佳包括一中央孔452,中央連接器 450可延伸穿過該中央孔452。中央連接器45〇較佳將外殼 411、431固持在一起且亦包含電路徑之一部分。中央連接 器可包括後盤或觸點451。為了組合外殼411、431,其首 先可藉由相應接腳及孔置放在一起,且中央連接器接著可 滑動穿過中央孔452。燈正觸點412之突出部413可駐留在 前外殼411中之中央孔452之前端處。突出部413可包括活 葉413a、413b、413c、413d。活葉413較佳為可撓性的以 使得當中央連接器被推動穿過外殼411、431且穿過孔415 時,其前端454可穿過孔415突出且向前推動活葉413直至 後觸點451嚙合後外殼431之後表面為止。該中央連接器 450接著藉由與在正向位置上彎曲之活葉4na、41扑、 413c、413d之摩擦裝配而固持在適當位置中。 本發明將接腳及孔用於容易地耦接外殼總成41〇、43〇以 及推動中央連接器450穿過中央孔452表示相比於較早系統 之進步,該等較早系統將螺紋作為用於耦接預期收容電池 之裝置之不同部分的構件β亦即,外殼總成41〇、43〇可簡 單地按壓至彼此上且由中央連接器45〇固持在適當位置中 而不必須將一外殼擰緊至另一者。此舉較佳地簡化製造。 雖然諸圖展示相應又形外殼總成41〇、43〇,但本發明不 限於此實施例。可使用用於外殼總成之其他組態。因此, 145907.doc -87- 201038127 可使用用於前外殼411及後外殼43 1之其他外殼組態,但較 佳的是’任何替代外殼具有相應組態以使得其可接合在一 起以形成可含有電池之盒330。 當外殼410、430接合在一起以形成盒330時,如圖16A中 所示,外殼又形物411、431會合以形成電池槽462、464、 466。更具體言之,電池槽462形成於又形物411(:/431(^與 411a/431a 之間,槽 464 形成於叉形物 411a/431a 與 411b/431b 之間且槽466形成於叉形物411b/431b與411c/431c之間。此 等槽較佳經大小設計以收納所要大小之電池(例如,Aaa 電池或其他大小)。如圖1 6B中所示,叉形物之橫截面較佳 彎曲以使得電池可適貼地裝配於每一槽中。圖16A展示槽 462中之電池462 a及槽466中之電池466a。 每一槽較佳包括電觸點以嚙合電池之正端及負端。舉例 而。電池槽462可包括用以喃合電池462a之正端子之燈 正觸點412及用以嚙合電池462a之負端子之彈簧437及後交 叉觸點432。因而,在槽462中,電池462a之正端指向盒 3 3 0之前部。 後父又觸點432較佳包括突出部432a,其延伸至電池槽 464且可充虽至位於槽464中之電池之正端的觸點。前交叉 觸詞4及彈簧416可喃合槽偏中之電池之負端子。因 而,電池464a之正端指向盒33〇之後部。 前交又觸點414可包括突出部414a,其延伸至槽466,在 槽466中’犬出部414a可嚙合位於其中之電池私以之正端 子槽466中之電池466丑之負端子可由麵接至外環觸點w 145907.doc -88- 201038127 之彈簧438嚙合。因此,電池466a之正端指向盒33〇之前 部。 現進一步描述盒330可含有電池之方式。如圖16A中所 示,電池462&收容於槽462中,電池464£1收容於槽464中且 電池466a對應於收容於槽466中之電池。如圖17中所示, . 電池462a、464a、4咖串聯電連接。然而,電池實體上相 對於彼此並排或並聯定位於其各別槽中,如圖i6A中所 0 不。(應注意’圖17較針對展示電池之間的導電路徑且不 展示電池之預期實體位置。) 此電池配置之有利之處在於可獲得由三個電池提供之電 力而不必須如同具有串聯電連接之許多其他手電筒般將其 實體上端對端地定位。此情形提供如下益處:手電筒之筒 身或其他照明裝置外殼之長度不需要由端對端安裝之電池 之數目來規定。更具體言之,舉例而言,具有某數目之電 池之手電筒可較短,其在某些應用中可為有利的。 Q 始於電池462a,現進一步描述盒330中之電池之導電路 控。電池462a之負端子經由彈簧437及接著後交又觸點432 及犬出部432a耦接至電池464a之正端子。(在圖17中,與 實體展示參考數字437、432及432a相對比,參考數字 437、432及432a表示由此等組件提供之電路徑。)電池 464a之負%子經由彈簧416及接著前交叉觸點414及突出部 414a辆接至電池466a之正端子。電池466a之負端子輕接至 彈簧438及接著外環觸點434。 如圖17中所示,電池462a之正端子經由具有突出部413 145907.doc -89- 201038127 及活葉413a至413d之燈正觸點412電耦接至中央連接器 450。導電路徑接著繼續穿過中央連接器45〇至其前端々Μ 直至燈模組128之正電極,如由點線461所表示。(應注 意,亦可使用燈泡。)自燈模組128或其他照明裝置,導電 路徑接著可繼續穿過形成導電路徑之一部分之手電筒的組 件,如由圖17中之點線463所表示。在一實施例中,點線 可包含手電筒之筒身324。且自此,導電路徑可延伸穿過 尾部帽蓋364且直至電路板348。 如圖17中所示,電路板348可耦接至兩個接觸接腳338、 340,該等接觸接腳338、34〇電耦接至電池盒”❹,如由點 線465、467所表示。在電池盒330與電路板348之間的正連 接經由中央連接器450之觸點451發生。 因而,中央連接器450在盒330之兩端處提供正觸點,亦 即,在其前端454處至燈模組128之正觸點及在觸點451處 至電路板348之正觸點。在電池盒33〇與電路板348之間的 負連接經由外環觸點434發生。 在本實施例中,當電池盒330安裝至電池室327中時,用 於光源之電路徑(或電負載)可形成為自電池盒33〇之中央連 接器450之中央電極或前端454至燈模組ι28之可壓縮正觸 點133 ’且接著自燈模組128之散熱片ι88至筒身3 24之導電 内表面,接著自筒身324上之後螺紋329至導電内尾部帽蓋 區段364上之螺紋365及導電内尾部帽蓋區段364自身,接 著穿過波形彈簧150至電路板348之後側上之接地墊,接著 至電路板348上之負載開關、電路板348之前側上之接地 145907.doc -90- 201038127 墊、接觸接腳彈簧346、接觸接腳340且接著最後至電池盒 330之負電極434。 如上所註明,電池462&之正端子可電耦接至盒33〇之前 部。然而,電池462a之正端亦可再次經由其與中央連接器 450之連接電耦接至盒之後部。亦即,中央連接器在盒33〇 之後部延伸至其後觸點45 1。 圖18為說明用於諸如結合圖丨丨至圖17所說明且論述之手 電筒的手電筒之例示性電路板348之電子組件的方塊圖。 電路板348可包括電壓調節器電路1〇〇4 '負栽開關電路 1006、控制器電路1008及3轴加速計電路1〇1〇。 電路板348可包括I/O墊以嚙合外部裝置。1/〇墊可包括 頂部+4.5VDC 1〇12、底部+4.5VDC 1014、GND 1016、 LED—OUT 1018及 SWITCH 1020。 I/O墊頂部+4.5VDC 1012及GND 1016可分別耗接至電池 盒3 3 0之中央觸點45 1及外環觸點43 4。I/O塾底部+4.5 VDC 1014及SWITCH 1018可轉接至扣罩152。當使用者按壓在 開關埠密封件168上時,可向前推動致動器354以嚙合扣罩 152以閉合在SWITCH 1020與+4.5VDC 1012之間的開關。 當使用者釋放開關埠密封件168時,開關斷開且SWITCH 1020不再耦接至+4.5VDC 1012。 圖19A至圖19D中展示電路板348之實施例之詳細電路示 意圖。 圖19A展示較佳電壓調節器電路1〇〇4之電路示意圖《電 壓調節器電路1004可包括低壓降調節器1〇2〇,其可由以小 145907.doc •91- 201038127 輸入-輸出差分電壓操作之DC線性電壓調節器實施。信號 線1022為來自兩個二極體1024、1026之輸出,該等二極體 可分別由信號線SWITCH 1014及SW—ON 1046驅動。此組 態較佳允許來自信號線SWITCH 1014或SW_ON 1046之較 高電壓啟用低壓降調節器1020。 在較佳實施例中,低壓降調節器1020之輸出可設定至 + 3.3V 1028以用作例如控制器電路1008之其他組件之電 源。在一實施例中,可使用市售獨立LDO調節器(例如, 由 Intersil Coperation製造之 ISL9003AIRUNZ)。應理解, 亦可採用其他類型之線性調節器電路。 來自電池之電源電壓位準(亦即,+4.5VDC 1012)可由控 制器電路1008經由信號線ADC_VBAT 1032監視。信號線 ADC_VB AT 1032可由分壓器自+4.5VDC 1012產生。 I/O墊SWITCH 1014可用於產生信號MOM 1048以用於在 MOM 1048低時作為使用者按壓在開關埠密封件168上之指 示發送至控制器電路1008。MOM 1048可由NPN雙極電晶 體1052產生。 圖19B為較佳控制器電路1008之電路示意圖。控制器電 路1008可包括具有輸入及輸出連接之控制器1030。控制器 1030可經由信號線八〇(:_¥8八丁 1032、2-¥〇11丁 1034、丫-VOUT 1036、X-VOUT 1038、SCK 1040、MISO 1042、 MOM 1048及RESET 1050接收輸入信號。控制器103〇亦可 經由信號線LOAD_ENABLE 1044及SW_ON 1046輸送輸出 信號。控制器103 0之電源可由+3.3 V 1028電源支援。 145907.doc 92· 201038127 在一實施例中’控制器1〇3〇為具有嵌入式記憶體之市售 控制器,例如,ATtiny24,其為由Atmel Corporation製造 之8位元控制器。在另一實施例中,控制器1〇3〇可為微處 理器。在其他實施例中,控制器丨〇3〇可為離散電路。熟習 此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他類型之控制器電路。 圖19C展示較佳負載開關電路1〇〇6之電路示意圖。在圖 196之貫施例中,負載開關可由NM〇s 1〇54實施。 ❹ 1054之源極可耦接至頂部GND 1016而NMOS 1054之汲極 可耦接至LED—OUT 1018。NMOS 1054之閘極可耦接至 LOAD—ENABLE 1044。電力可自 LED 〇UT 1〇18流動至 GND 1016以形成可接通燈模組128之電流之迴路的一部 分。 熟%此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他類型之驅動器及 負載開關電路。 圖19D展示較佳3轴加速計電路1〇1〇之電路示意圖。3軸 ❹ 加速汁電路1010可包括輸出Z-VOUT 1034、Y-VOUT 1036 及XVOUT 1038,S玄等輸出亦可耗接至控制器電路1〇()8以 用於進一步處理。 3軸加速計電路1〇1〇較佳包括一慣性感測器⑺兄,其可 自其内部感測件接收資訊且可根據來自内部感測元件之 ΐ測提供類比信號。慣性感測器1()58可用於藉由提供在例 如相互正父軸之三個軸(即,χ、丫及2)上之加速度資訊來 里測地球靜態重力場。3軸加速計電路^議之電源可 由+3.3V 1028電源支援。 145907.doc •93· 201038127 若慣性感測器1058之Z軸指向地球之中央,則χ及γ將具 有加速度零。然而,歸因於地球之重力,Ζ將經歷_ 1 g之加 速度。若慣性感測器640翻轉1 80。以使得Ζ背向地球,則X 及Υ將保持於零’但Ζ將具有+KJ之加速度。 慣性感測器1058可附接至電路板348以使得X、Υ及Ζ軸 相對於手電筒300固定。在較佳實施例中,慣性感測器 1058在板348上定向以使得Ζ軸沿手電筒3〇〇之縱軸延伸。 因而,當水平定位手電筒300時,ζ軸亦水平延伸。在此位 置中,當X及Υ繞手電筒300之縱軸向左或向右旋轉時,因 為X及Υ軸上之加速度之量值在旋轉期間改變,所以關於χ 及Υ之重力資訊可分別經由X_v〇UT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036 發送至控制斋1030。相對角旋轉可由控制器ι〇3〇計算。控 制器1030可使用X-VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036上之資訊以 判定是否存在繞手電筒300之縱軸之旋轉。 在較佳實施例中,用於手電筒之開關可位於開關及尾部 帽蓋總成106中。在此配置中,又及γ軸之起始定向未知, 因此可基於在起始定向中在Χ&γ軸上之地球重力場計算 起始值。一旦建立其起始定向,可進行後續角量測以追蹤 手電筒300之旋轉》 在另一實施例中,開關可置放於筒身上。在此配置中, X及Υ軸之起始位置為已知的,其中假定:如由使用者手 之形狀所規定,開關指向上,其中拇指在開關上。在此種 狀況下,僅一個軸(X或γ)可用於計算旋轉改變。 在以上兩個實施例中,較佳的是,手電筒3〇〇大致水平 145907.doc -94- 201038127 地定位以供使用者在旋轉時獲得較高解析度(亦即,x及y 軸之旋轉之較好感測)。當ζ軸相對於水平方向傾斜較遠 時,可發生旋轉誤差。在操作中,較佳的是,手電筒3⑽ • 相對於水平方向固持至+/_ 3〇。。若傾斜大於30。,則較佳 的疋,監視Ζ軸且忽略旋轉輸入直至手電筒3〇〇傾斜回 30°窗内為止。 在較佳實施例中,慣性感測器1058可為市售微機電系統 〇 (MEMS),例如,LIS394AL,其為由 ST Microelectronic^ 造之3軸加速計。熟習此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他 類型之慣性感測器電路。 由例示性手電筒300提供之操作功能可類似於先前結合 圖10A及圖10C至圖101所描述之操作功能。因此,將不提 供詳細描述。 現在下文參看圖21至圖37描述替代較佳實施例。以下所 述之實施例共用類似於前述實施例之某些特徵。因此,如 〇 上所註明’為了促進描述,表示一圖中之元件之任何參考 數字通常表示其他圖中之相同元件。 分別結合圖21至® 25B及圖26至圖33描述例示性手電筒 2100、2300。例示性手電筒21〇〇、23〇〇中之每一者併有許 •多不同態樣°雖然此等不同態樣全部已以各種組合併入至 手電筒2100 2300中,但本發明之範疇不限於手電筒 2100、2300。實情為,本發明針對在下文個別地以及以各 種組合描述之手電筒210〇、23〇〇的發明特徵中之每一者。 此外力热t此項技術者在審閱本發明之後將變得顯而易 145907.doc •95· 201038127 見,本發明之一或多個態樣亦可併入至包括(例如)頭燈及 提燈之其他可攜式照明裝置中。 圖21展示例示性手電筒21〇〇 ^例示性手電筒21〇〇大體上 包括筒身2124、位於筒身2124之前端處之頭部總成幻⑽及 位於筒身2124之後端處之開關及尾部帽蓋總成21〇6。頭部 總成2104圍繞筒身2124之前端安置,且開關及尾部帽蓋總 成2106封閉筒身2124之後端。 筒身2124可包括沿其長度之一部分之刻花表面21〇8以供 使用者抓持。在本實施例中,刻花表面21〇8可藉由拉削提 供。或者,刻花表面2108可包含滾花或加工表面。任何所 要圖案可用於刻花表面21 〇8。 圖22為沿由線102_102所指示之平面所截取的圖}之手電 筒2100之部分橫截面圖。圖23為穿過由線ι〇2_ι〇2所指示 之平面所截取的圖21之手電筒2100之前區段的放大部分橫 截面圖。(橫截面中未展示與電池組213〇有關之圖22至圖 24之部分。) 參看圖22及圖23,光源1〇1安裝至筒身2124之前端。在 本實施例中,光源ιοί經安裝以使得其安置於反射器2ιΐ8 之後端處。在其他實施例中,可省略反射器2118,或其形 狀改變。 卜夕 筒身2124為適用於收容可攜式電源(諸如,可再充電電 池組213〇)之空心管狀結構。因此,筒身2124充當—外 设,其用於收納具有正及負電極或端子之可攜式電源。 在所說明之實施例中’筒身2124經大小設計以容納電池 145907.doc •96- 201038127 組2130,該電池組213〇含有單一鋰離子電池。然而,在其 他實施例中,可省略電池組213〇且筒身2124經大小設計以 谷納所要大小及谷量之一或多個驗乾電池或可再充電電 池。此外,若採用複數個電池,則取決於實施方案,電池 可並聯或串聯電連接。亦可使用其他適當可攜式電源包 ' 括(例如)高容量儲存電容器。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身2丨24包括一前部分2125,其 0 在、、且&頭°卩及面部帽蓋2112下延伸以使得頭部總成2104之 外表面與筒身2124之外表面大體上齊平。前部分2丨25之内 徑小於筒身2124之剩餘部分之内徑。且,前部分2125之至 少一部分之外徑可小於筒身2丨24之剩餘部分之外徑,以使 仟當組裝手電筒2100時,組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112之外部 部分及筒身2124之外部部分可形成大體上均一圓柱表面。 或者,組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112及筒身2124可具有不同形 狀。 〇 筒身2124較佳由鋁製成,但亦可使用其他適當金屬或非 金屬(例如,塑膠)材料。雖然筒身2124較佳由鋁製成,但 在下文所述之手電筒2100之實施例中,筒身2124不用作用 於將光源101或電路板2148連接至電池組213〇之電路徑。 結果,筒身2124不形成光源1〇1或電路板2148之主電源電 路之一部分。然而,在其他實施例令,筒身2124可包含光 源101及/或電路板2148之主電源電路之一部分,諸如,在 代替電池組2130使用一或多個電池之情況下。在此等實施 例中,筒身2124及其他組件較佳包含形成導電路徑之導電 145907.doc -97- 201038127 材料。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身2124包括形成於前部分2i25 之外徑上之外螺紋174、形成於前部分丨25之内徑上之内螺 紋2139及形成於其後端處之内徑上之内螺紋ηι(最佳見於 圖24中)。本實施例之筒身2124亦包括形成於前部分125之 後端處之環形肩狀物182。環形肩狀物182充當安置於筒身 21之4之前端中之肩式環以26的止件。 圖25A為圖21之手電筒2100之頭部總成21 〇4、筒身 2124、燈模組2128及電池組2130的分解透視圖。參看圖23 及圖25A ’本實施例之頭部總成21〇4包括組合頭部及面部 帽蓋2112、透鏡116及反射器2118。然而,在其他實施例 中’頭部及面部帽蓋2112可包含兩個或兩個以上獨立組件 部分’其可(例如)以配合螺紋組裝在一起。 組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112之内表面可用於收容某些組 件,包括(例如)透鏡116及反射器2118。反射器2118及透鏡 11 6操作性地安裝至組合頭部及面部帽蓋2 112之内徑。在 本實施例中’反射器2118包括自其前端延伸且圍繞反射器 2118之外圓周均勻分布之彈簧夾片2177以使得反射器2118 可搭扣至形成於組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112之内部部分之前 端附近的相應環形凹部2117中。在本實施例中,採用六個 彈簧夾片21 77。然而,其他實施例可共同地採用不同數目 之彈簧夾片2177或另一構件以用於將反射器2118附接至組 合頭部及面部帽蓋2112。 在環形凹部211 7之後端處設置環形肩狀物119以一旦彈 145907.doc -98 · 201038127 簧夾片2177擴展至環形凹部2117中便將反射器2118附接至 組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112。 透鏡116介入於反射器2118之面向前之凸緣與唇緣113之 間。以此方式’反射器2118及透鏡116鎖定於組合頭部及 面部帽蓋2112内。在一實施方案中,諸如〇形環丨丨4之密封 元件可位於透鏡116與唇緣113之間的界面處。亦可使用諸 如單向閥之其他抗水構件。0形環114可包含橡膠或其他適 當材料。 〇 ^ 裱形凹槽115可設置於頭部及面部帽蓋2112中以使得其 安置於透鏡116與唇緣113之間的界面處。環形凹槽115較 佳經大小設計以部分地收納〇形環丨14,藉此在組裝製程期 間適當地定位〇形環π 4。 反射器2118可包括圍繞反射器2118之外周邊分布之翼片 2176以將結構完整性提供至反射器2118且幫助在頭部及面 部帽蓋2112之内表面及筒身2丨24之前部分2125内適當對準 〇 反射器2118。在本實施例中,採用三個翼片2176。在其他 實施例中,可使用不同數目之翼片2176,或可根本不使用 翼片。 組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112可包括内螺紋172,其經組態 •以與筒身2124之前部分2125上之外螺紋174嚙合。然而, 在其他實施方案中,可採用其他形式之附接。此外,組合 頭部及面部帽蓋2112較佳由陽極氧化鋁製成,但亦可使用 其他適當材料。 如最佳見於圖23及圖25A中,反射器118之反射輪廊2121 I45907.doc -99· 201038127 較佳為經金屬化以用於反射性且確保高精度光學性質之一 段電腦產生最佳抛物線。較佳地’該輪廓2丨2丨由具有小於 0.080英吋且更佳在0.040英吋與〇.050英吋之間的焦距之抛 物線界定。此外,在界定輪廓2121之抛物線之頂點與反射 器121之後開口之間的距離較佳為0.070至〇 12〇英吋,更佳 為0.075至0.085英吋。該反射器2118之前端之開口較佳具 有0.8至0.9英吋更佳〇.850至〇·852英吋之直徑,且該反射器 2118之後端之開口較佳具有〇.2至〇 3英吋更佳〇 24〇至〇 25〇 英吋之直徑。此外,自頂點至反射器2118之後端之開口之❹ 距離與焦距之間的比率較佳在1.5: i及3 5 :丨之範圍内,更佳 為1.6:1至1.8:1。此外,自頂點至反射器2118之前端之開口 之距離與焦距之間的比率較佳在20:1及35:1之範圍内,更 佳為20:1至21:1。 反射器211 8較佳包含射出成形之塑膠,但可使用其他適 當材料。 返回參看圖23,雖然本文中所揭示之實施例說明大體上 平坦之透鏡116,但該手電筒21 00替代地可包括具有完全 C) 表面以進一步改良該手電筒2100之光學效能之透鏡。舉例 而& ’該透鏡可在整個或部分透鏡表面中包括雙凸輪廓或 平凸輪廊。 - 參看圖23及圖25Α,密封元件2122可設置於組合頭部及 面部帽蓋2112與筒身2124之前部分2125之間的界面處以提 供不透水密封。較佳地,密封元件2122位於設置於筒身 2124之外表面中之環形凹槽123中。密封元件2122可為〇形 145907.doc -】00· 201038127 環或其他適當密封裝置。在所說明之實施例中,密封元件 ⑽為由唇緣密封件形成之單向閥,其經定向以便防止自 外部流動至手電筒2100之内部中,同時允許手電筒内之過 I力逸出或排出至大氣。 在頒予Anthony Maglica之美國專利第5,〇〇3,44〇號中更全 . 自地描料”巾之單向閥之設計及使用,該專利以引用 的方式併入本文中。 〇 本?施例之手電筒2100包括安裝於筒身2124之前端處之 肩式環2126内的燈模組2128以使得光源1〇1安置於反射器 2118之後端處。燈模組2128可具有投射主軸丨丨^,其可與 手電筒2100之反射器軸及/或縱軸重合。鑒於以上配置, 自燈模組2128發射之光之焦點可藉由相對於筒身2124扭轉 頭部總成2104(該情況可經由配合螺紋172、174完成)以弓丨 起頭部總成2104遠離或朝向燈模組2128之平移來調整。 燈模組2128之光源1〇1包括第一正電極及第二負電極。 〇 第一正電極與可壓縮正觸點133(見圖23)電連通。第二負電 極與散熱片外殼188電連通,該散熱片外殼188亦充當燈模 組2128之負觸點。 .光源101可為產生光之任何適當裝置。舉例而言,光源 1 〇 1可為LED燈、白熾燈或弧光燈。在所說明之實施例 中’光源101為LED燈且燈模組2128為LED模組。燈模組 2128之LED較佳大體上以小於180。之球面角輻射出光。在 其他實施例中,可使用具有其他輻射角之LED,包括以大 於180。之角輻射之LED。 145907.doc -101 - 201038127 可用於燈模组2128之LED模組之結構詳細描述於由 Anthony MaglicaK2〇〇8年8月7日申請之同在申請中之美國 專利申請案第12/188,2〇1號及由Stacey West等人於2_年! 月16曰申《•月之美國臨時專利申請案第61/145,12〇號中,該 兩個申請案之内容以引用的方式併入本文中。 參看圖23,肩式環2丨%經組態以與筒身2丨24密切接觸。 在本實施例中,肩式環2126之一部分之外徑設置有外螺紋 ^經大小设计以與筒身2丨24之前部分2丨25之内螺紋 139螺紋配合。在其他實施例中,可採用用於將肩式環 2126附接或安裝至筒身2124之内表面之其他手段,包括 (例如)壓入裝配。 燈模組2128較佳經由壓人裝配操作安裝於肩式環126 内此外,政熱片外殼1 88之外表面較佳經形狀設計以沿 儘可能多的表面積與肩式環2126之内表面配合以促進在燈 模組助與肩式環2120之間的電連通及熱連通及在兩者之 間的干涉裝配。亦可設置較佳圍繞燈模組2128之圓周配置 之滚花表面129以增強在燈模組2128與肩式環η%之間的 干涉裝配。 如圖23中所不’肩式環2126形成大散熱片。此外,因為 其具有大體上大於燈模組2128之質量的f量,因此其快速 地將熱經由散熱片188自燈模組2128引開。最終,將由肩 式環2126引開之熱有效率地引出至筒身2124中,因為筒身 2124及肩式環2126在肩式環2126之前區域189中密切接 觸。肩式環2126可由金屬製成,且更佳由錢錄紹製成以達 145907.doc -102· 201038127 成增強之熱性質、電性質及耐蝕性質。 肩式環126之後區域191之外徑稍微小於筒身2124之後部 分之内徑。因此’在組裝期間,肩式環2126可容易地在筒 身2124内滑動而不損壞任何保護塗層(諸如,由陽極氧化 處理製程引起之塗層)。另一方面,肩式環2126之後區域 191之外徑大於筒身2丨24之前部分2125之内徑。因此,肩 式環2126之後區域191充當止件以在肩式環擰旋至筒身 ❹ 2124之内螺紋2139中時限制肩式環2126之最前位置。 雖然在本實施例中肩式環2 12 6、燈模組212 8及頭部總成 2 104不形成手電筒21 〇〇之機械開關之一部分,但在其他實 施例中,其可形成機械開關之一部分,如(例如)結合由 Stacey West於2009年1月14曰申請之美國專利申請案第 12/353,396號所描述’該案之内容以引用的方式併入本文 中。 燈模組2128如下電搞接至手電筒2100。手電筒21〇〇可包 Q 括可再充電電池組2130,其包括電耗接至燈模組2128之可 壓縮正觸點133之頂部正觸點214。在電流傳遞穿過光源 1〇1之後,接地連接自光源1〇1之負電極延伸穿過充當燈模 組2128之負觸點的散熱片外殼ι88及又電耦接至電池組 • 2130之負觸點212之肩式環2126。 圖24為穿過由線102-1〇2所指示之平面所截取的圖21之 手電同2100之後區段的放大部分橫截面圖。(然而,在圖 24中’在橫截面中未展示電池組213〇。)手電筒21〇〇之後 區段大體上包含開關及尾部帽蓋總成21 〇 6。圖2 5 B為開關 145907.doc -103· 201038127 及尾部帽蓋總成2106之分解透視圖。 參看圖24及圖25B,本實施例之開關及尾部帽蓋總成 2106較佳包括諸如單向閥之密封元件162、内尾部帽蓋區 段2164、連通環丨9〇、192 '下方開關外殼2丨34、彈菁探針 總成2136、2138、2140、電路板2148、扣罩152、上方開 關外殼2160、鎖定螺母166、致動器154、開關埠密封件 168及外尾部帽蓋區段2170。 每一彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2 140包含可滑動地安置 於導電筒身2142内之導電柱塞144及定位於柱塞2144與筒 身2142之間以將柱塞2144偏壓離開筒身2142之彈簧(未圖 示)。 下方開關外殼2134較佳包括三個圓柱形通道丨93,其對 下方外设213 4之别端開放以用於收納且固持每一彈寄探針 總成2136、213 8、2140之柱塞144之至少一部分。通道193 中之母一者連接至與通道193軸向對準之圓柱形腔室195。 每一圓柱形腔室195之直徑大於每一通道直徑以使得每一 腔室可收納且收容每一彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2140之 筒身2142。在本實施例中,下方開關外殼2134之圓柱形通 道193形成於自下方開關外殼2134之外壁137徑向向内突出 之耳狀物13 5中。在本實施例中,耳狀物丨3 5至少部分地由 用於收納設置於電池組2 13〇之後端上之配合指引部件280 的凹部153圍繞。在其他實施例中,公指引部件可設置於 下方開關外设21 3 4上且母指引部件可設置於電池組2丨3 〇 上。 145907.doc -104, 201038127 在本實施例中,下方開關外殼2134較佳包含諸如塑膠之 不導電材料,但亦可使用其他適當材料或材料系統。 在本實施例中’彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2140之筒身 2142及柱塞2144較佳包含諸如銅合金或鋁之導電金屬。 下方開關外殼2134之通道193及因此彈簧探針總成 • 2136、2138、214〇經組態以與電池組2130之底側上之觸點 對準。亦參看圖2SC,當安裝電池組2130時,彈簧探針總 ❹ 成2136可與電池組2130之底部中央觸點274對準,彈簧探 針總成2138可與電池組213〇之底部中環觸點276對準,且 彈簧探針總成2140可與電池組2130之底部外環觸點278對 準。在一實施例中,彈簧探針總成2136、2138、214〇分別 電耦接至電池組2130之GND、MOM觸點及+5 VDC觸點。 在本實施例中,電路板2148具有狹槽148&(展示於圖25b 中),其用於收納内尾部帽蓋部分2164之向後延伸部分 201。另一方面,由内尾部帽蓋部分2164之向後延伸部分 0 2〇1形成之狹槽198用於收納電路板148之實心部分14讣, 藉此將電路板148及内尾部帽蓋部分2丨64固持在相對所要 的位置。 電路板2148較佳包括在其兩側上之觸點。電路板^“亦 可包括安排路線穿過板2148以耦接相對側上之觸點之導電 介孔。在本實施例中,電路板2148之前側(其面向下方開 關外殼2134)包括三個接觸墊,其分別電耦接至彈簧探針 總成2136、2138、2140。電路板2148之後侧(其面向上方 開關外殼2160)包括位於指定位置處之三個相應接觸塾。 145907.doc -105· 201038127 電路板2148之前侧及後側上之每—對相應㈣經由設置於 電路板2148中之導電介孔或者安排路線之線電連接。 上方開關外殼216〇包括一圓柱形通道197,其允許致動 器154在其内滑動。開關崞密封件168之環形緣邊固持於位 於手電筒2100後端處之外尾部帽蓋217〇之環形唇緣丨99之 間。當使用者按壓在開關埠密封件168上時,致動器154在 通道197内向前移動且嚙合扣罩152以使得電路板2148之後 側上之MOM及GND接觸墊經由扣罩152電耦接。當使用者 釋放開關埠密封件168時,電路板2148之後側上之M〇M及 GND接觸墊不再經由扣罩152電耦接。在其他實施例中, 可使用例如電容器之非機械開關。 上方開關外殼2160較佳包括一組鍵161a、161b、161c及 161d(展示於圖25B中)。此等鍵16U、16ib、16卜及161(1 可用於分別插入至電路板2148上之狹槽149a、14外、ΐ4% 及149d中以在所要相對位置對準上方開關外殼2i6〇及電路 板 2148。 在本實施例中,上方開關外殼2160及致動器154較佳包 含諸如塑膠之不導電材料。開關埠密封件168較佳包含諸 如橡膠之可撓性不導電材料。扣罩152較佳包含導電彈簧 金屬。可使用其他適當材料。 連通環190、192設置於開關及尾部帽蓋總成21〇6之中 部。雖然連通環19〇、192在本實施例中以充電環之形式提 供以簡化再充電程序,但在其他實施例中,連通環19〇、 192可呈現其他形式。在本實施例中,電路板2148介入於 145907,doc 201038127 連通環190、192之間。電路板2148經組態以與連通環 190、192電連通,同時隔離連通環19〇、192使之免於經由 短路相互直接電連通。在電路板2148與連通環丨⑽、192之 間的電連通可藉由在形成於電路板2148與連通環中之每一 者之間的界面處設置導電跡線來建立。連通環19〇、192較 ' 佳為鋁環。 如最佳見於圖24及圖25B中,連通環19()、192充當外部 ❹ 再充電單元與手電筒2100之可再充電電池組213〇之間的界 面。雖然此處未描繪’但熟習此項技術者應瞭解,應以與 連通環190、192電接觸且將手電筒21〇〇固持在適當位置同 時發生充電之方式形成再充電單元之底座。因為連通環 190、192較佳圍繞手電筒21〇〇之整個外圓周延伸因此可 使用具有簡單底座設計之再充電單元。舉例而言,可使用 容許手電筒2100以相對其縱軸之任何徑向定向置放至再充 電單π中且仍能夠與再充電單元之充電觸點接觸的底座設 〇 计。因此,手電筒2100不需要按壓至充電單元中以使得隱 藏之插塞或突出部插入至手電筒2100中以便與再充電單元 之充電觸點接觸。 内尾部帽蓋區段2164較佳包括在内尾部帽蓋區段2164之 前部外表面上之螺紋165以用於與筒身2124之後部内表面 上之螺紋131配合。另外,内尾部帽蓋區段以以較佳包括 在内尾部帽蓋區段2164之後部外表面上之螺紋167以用於 與外尾部帽蓋區段2170之前部内表面上之螺紋171配合。 本實施例之内尾部帽蓋區段2164亦包括形成於内尾部帽 145907.doc -107- 201038127 蓋區段216 4之月u端處之j萝都卢 震^肩狀物173。環形肩狀物173用 作止件以防止下方開關外殼2134向前移動。 鎖定螺母166較佳擰旋至内尾部帽蓋區段⑽之後部内 表面上之螺紋169中且與其配合。因此,鎖定螺母166、内 尾部帽蓋區段2164之環形肩狀物173及螺紋165、131、 167、171、169共同起作用以整合開關及尾部帽蓋總成 2106 ° 内尾部帽蓋區段2164之構造應引起維持連通環19〇、192 相互電隔離。換言之’内尾部帽蓋區段2164不應在連通環 ⑽、192之間設置短路路徑。因此,舉例而言,内尾部帽 ,區段2164可由陽極氧化紹或某其他不㈣材料構造。鎖 疋螺母166可由金屬或塑膠製成且不需要導電,因為其在 本貫施例中不形成任何電路徑之_部分。 外尾。卩巾s蓋區段2170之後端較佳具有複數個圖符 2180(最佳展示於圖21中)以用作功能模式選擇之指示。稍 後結合手電筒2300之描述將描述圖符21 8〇及其相應功能模 式以及操作程序。 可在筒身2124與内尾部帽蓋區段2164之間的界面處設置 諸如α緣法'封件162之單向閥以提供不透水密封同時允許 手電筒2100内之過壓力排出至大氣。在頒予Anth〇ny Maghca之美國專利第5,〇〇3,440號中更全面地描述手電筒 中之單向閥之設計及使用,該專利以引用的方式併入本文 中。然而’可代替唇緣密封件! 62使用諸如〇形環之其他形 式之密封元件以形成不透水密封。唇緣密封件162較佳包 145907.doc •108. 201038127 含諸如橡膠之不導電材料。 ▲可使用開關及尾部帽蓋總成2106之其他組態。舉例而 開關力fb可包括於側面按紐開關或内部旋轉頭部, 開關中,諸如在勘叫月14曰申請之美國專利申請: 12/353,396號中所採用。 、 現參看圖25A及圖25C,現進—步描述可再充電電池組 2130。大體上,電池組213〇較佳包括· 一可再充電電池; 一電路板’其含有諸如再充電電路及/或用於其他功能之 電路之電子器件;及觸點’其用以將電池組213()電連接至 手電筒2100或其他照明裝置之剩餘部分。因而,電池組 2130大體上可表示一自含單元,其可與圖25八中所示之其 他組件一起插入至筒身MM之電池室U7中。亦較佳的 是,電池組2130提供對電子器件及其中之其他組件之保 護。在其他實施例中,電池組2130不具有與諸如加速計 1058之組件一起安裝之電路板,因此功能可由開關及尾部 帽蓋總成2 106中之電路板2148提供。 參看圖25C,電池組2130之後端包括一底部中央觸點 274、一底部中環觸點276及一底部外環觸點278。由向後 延伸壁形成之指引部件280可位於電池組2130之後端上, 諸如,在底部中環觸點276與底部外環觸點278之間。設置 於指引部件280中之狹槽284經大小設計以收納下方開關外 设13 4之耳狀物13 5以使得指引部件2 8 0可收納於圍繞下方 開關外殼2134之耳狀物135之凹入區153内,藉此形成插塞 及插座型連接。結果,當旋轉開關及尾部帽蓋總成21〇6以 145907.doc •109- 201038127 將其擰緊至筒身2124中時,一旦指引部件280收納於凹部 153内’電池組2130便亦將旋轉。因此,開關及尾部帽蓋 總成2106及電池組2130中之組裝電路板(未圖示)之所要定 向將始終保持對準。此特徵當下文所論述之加速計丨〇58位 於電池組2130之組裝電路板中時為有幫助的,以使得圖符 2180之定向可基於加速計1058之輸出來自動偵測。 在由Stacey West等人於2009年1月16曰申請之同在申請 中之美國臨時專利申請案第61/145,120號中詳細描述由例 示性手電筒21 00設置之電池組2130,該案之内容以引用的 方式併入本文中。 現進一步描述手電筒2100之電路及其供應之功能。手電 筒2 100之電路包括:一用以對光源1〇1供電之負載電路; 一用於對控制器及電路板2148上與(若可用)電池組213〇中 之其他電子器件供電之控制器電路;及一用於對電池組 2130中之可再充電電池再充電之充電電路。 當電池組2130安裝至筒身2124之電池室127中時,用於 光源ιοί之完整電路徑(或電負載)可形成為自電池組213〇之 頂部正觸點214至燈模組2128之正觸點133且穿過光源。此 電路徑接著自燈模組2128之散熱片外殼188延伸至肩式環 212 6且接著至電池組2丨3 〇之頂部外環觸點2丨2。 控制電路自電池組2130之底部外環正觸點開始直至彈簧 探針總成2140至電路板2148,且自電路板2148之接地墊返 回至彈簧探針總成213 6直至電池組213 〇之十央接地觸點。 至電池組2130之充電電路之高壓側自正充電環19〇延伸 145907.doc -110- 201038127 至電路板2148、彈簧探針總成2140、經由電池組2130之底 部外環觸點270進入至電池組2130中。充電電路接著可自 電池組2130之底部負觸點274返回至彈簧探針總成2136、 電路板2148直至接地充電環192。The upper switch housing 360 includes a cylindrical passage 197 that allows the actuator 354 to slide therein. The annular rim of the strip seal 168 is retained between the annular lip 399 and the inner tail cap section 364 of the tail cap 17〇 at the rear end of the flashlight 300. When the user presses on the switch 埠 seal 168, the actuator 354 moves forward and slams the buckle 152 to close the switch formed by the buckle cover 152 and the two contact pads on the circuit board 348. When the user releases the switch 璋 seal 168, the switch opens. In the present embodiment, the upper switch housing 36 and the actuator 3m preferably comprise a non-conductive material such as plastic. Switch 埠 seal 168 also preferably includes a non-conductive material such as rubber. The buckle cover 152 preferably comprises a conductive material such as metal. Other suitable materials can be used. In the present embodiment, the buckle 132 is placed between the front edge of the lower switch housing 334 and the inner tail cap section 364 to prevent the lower switch housing 334 from moving forward. The wave spring 15 can be disposed on the circuit board 3 4 8 A trailing edge is interposed between the inner tail cap section 364 to provide a compressible spring contact therebetween. The wave spring 15 〇 also applies a biasing force to the circuit board 348, which in turn applies a biasing force to the lower switch housing 334, whereby the switch housing 145907 is used. Doc -83- 201038127 334 is pressed against the buckle 132. The inner tail cap section 364 preferably includes threads 365 on the outer surface of the inner tail cap section 364 for engagement with threads 329 on the inner surface of the rear portion of the barrel 324. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the rear end of the inner tail cap section 3 64 and the inner diameter of the outer tail cap section 170 are preferably sized such that the tail cap 170 can be permanently pressed into the inner tail. The cap section 364 is on the rear end thereby forming an integral switch and a tail cap assembly 3. The inner tail cap section 364 preferably comprises a conductive material such as aluminum. The inner tail cap section 3 64 can also be recorded. A one-way valve, such as lip seal 162, may be provided at the interface between the barrel 324 and the switch and tail cap assembly 3〇6 to provide a watertight seal while allowing overpressure in the flashlight to be vented or vented to the atmosphere, However, instead of the one-way valve 162, for example, it is used. Other forms of sealing elements of the ring form a watertight seal. The lip seal 162 is preferably made of a non-electric material of various types of rubber. Other configurations of the switch and the tail cap assembly 3〇6 can be used. For example, the switching function can be included in a side button switch or an internal rotary head switch, such as that used in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/353,396, filed on Jan. 14, 2009. Referring now to Figures 15A, 16A, m ία » θ 11 « _ , Figure 16B and Figure 17, the battery case 33G will now be further described. As mentioned above, the battery case preferably contains power for the opponent or other lighting devices. Battery. After inserting the battery into the battery: 330, it can be inserted into the hand with other components of the flashlight; 145907. Doc • 84 - 201038127 The barrel 324 of the barrel, as shown in Figure ISA and Figure 15B. As shown in Figure 16A, battery compartment 330 can include a front end or lamp end housing assembly 410 and a rear or rear end housing assembly 43. The two outer portions can be held together by the central connector 450' as shown in Fig. 16B, and Fig. 16B is an exploded view of the components constituting the cartridge 330. As also shown in Fig. 16B, the front end or lamp end housing assembly 4'' can include a front outer casing 411' which can be configured to include commas 411a, 411b, ❹ 41 lc. Front housing assembly 410 can also include a light positive contact 412 that itself includes a projection 413 that in turn includes flaps 4i3a, 413b, 413c, 413d. The flap 413 is sized such that the aperture 414 is preferably present in its center. These projections are in electrical contact with the central connector 450 as discussed later. The front outer casing assembly 41 can also include a front and a contact 々μ and a spring 4丨6. Contacts 412, 414 and spring 416 preferably comprise a conductive material. The front outer casing assembly 410 is preferably manufactured in a manner that reduces the number of steps required to assemble the assembly. Therefore, the front outer casing 411 can be formed by plastic or other suitable material. The injection molding process preferably includes co-molding of the lamp positive contact 412 and the front contact and contact 414 with the outer casing 411. Also, the contacts 412, 414 are preferred. The heart stands in the injection molding machine such that it is surrounded or otherwise held in place by the injected material as the injected material is solidified. The contacts are located in the injection molding such that they end in the proper position to form an electrical path, as will be described later. In this way, a separate manufacturing step in which the contacts 412, 414 will be attached to the outer casing 411 can be avoided. While co-molding is preferred, other means can be used to assemble the contacts 412, 414 and the outer casing 411. The shell 4U and the contacts 412, 414 are co-molded 145907. Doc-85-201038127 or after additional assembly, the spring 416 can be press fit into the outer casing 411 such that it contacts the front cross contact 414. For example, the spring 416 can be pressed into a recess that fits between the housing forks 411a, 411b. Although this recessed portion is not shown in Fig. 16B, a similar recess 439 is shown in the rear outer casing 43 1 . Regardless, other means can be used to assemble the spring 416 and the outer casing 411. The rear or rear end housing assembly 430 may include a rear housing 433, which may be formed in a set to include a fork corresponding to the month il peripheral when the two housing assemblies 410, 430 are coupled together The forks 431a, 431b, 43 1 c of the objects 411a, 411b, and 411c. The rear housing 430 can also include a rear cross contact 432, an outer ring contact 434 〇, and magazines 417, 418. Contacts 43 2, 434 and springs 43, 7 and 438 preferably comprise a conductive material. The rear housing assembly 43 can be fabricated similar to the front housing assembly 410 to reduce the number of assembly steps. That is, the back contact 432 and outer ring contact 434 can be co-molded with the rear housing 43 1 during the injection molding process such that it is properly clamped to form part of the electrical path, as discussed later. While co-molding is preferred, other means can be used to assemble the contacts 432, 434 and the rear housing 431. The springs 437, 43 8 can then be press fit into the rear housing 431 such that they are in electrical contact with the contacts 432, 434, respectively. For example, the springs 437, 438 can be. The press fitting is fitted into the recess 439 of the outer casing 43 1 . Other means can be used to assemble the springs, springs 437, 438 and outer casing 43 1 . As shown in Fig. 16A, the front outer casing assembly 41 and the rear outer casing assembly 43 are coupled to each other to form a casing 33. To facilitate this coupling, as shown in FIG. 6A, the month J outer/> 411 may include a pin 419 on the fork 4Uc that can be engaged to form 145907. Doc -86 - 201038127 A hole 436 in the fork 431e of the rear casing 431. Similarly, the rear outer casing 431 can include pins 437 on the prongs 431a, 431b that engage the holes (not shown) in the prongs 411a, 411b of the front outer casing 411. The two outer casings 411, 43 1 preferably include a central aperture 452 through which the central connector 450 can extend. The central connector 45A preferably holds the outer casings 411, 431 together and also includes a portion of the electrical path. The central connector can include a rear disc or contact 451. To assemble the outer casings 411, 431, they can first be placed together by respective pins and holes, and the central connector can then be slid through the central aperture 452. The projection 413 of the positive lamp contact 412 can reside at the front end of the central opening 452 in the front outer casing 411. The projection 413 can include flaps 413a, 413b, 413c, 413d. The flap 413 is preferably flexible such that when the central connector is pushed through the housing 411, 431 and through the aperture 415, its forward end 454 can protrude through the aperture 415 and push the flap 413 forward until the rear contact Point 451 engages the rear surface of rear housing 431. The central connector 450 is then held in place by frictional assembly with the flaps 4na, 41, 413c, 413d that are bent in the forward position. The present invention uses pins and holes for easy coupling of the housing assemblies 41A, 43A and pushing the central connector 450 through the central aperture 452 to indicate an advancement compared to earlier systems that have threads as The member β for coupling the different portions of the device intended to receive the battery, that is, the housing assemblies 41〇, 43〇 can be simply pressed onto each other and held in place by the central connector 45〇 without having to The outer casing is tightened to the other. This preferably simplifies manufacturing. Although the figures show corresponding housing assemblies 41A, 43A, the invention is not limited to this embodiment. Other configurations for the housing assembly can be used. Therefore, 145907. Doc -87- 201038127 Other housing configurations for front housing 411 and rear housing 43 1 may be used, but preferably any alternative housing has a corresponding configuration such that it can be joined together to form a battery-capable box 330. When the outer casings 410, 430 are joined together to form the cartridge 330, as shown in Fig. 16A, the outer casing shapes 411, 431 meet to form the battery wells 462, 464, 466. More specifically, the battery well 462 is formed between the shape 411 (: / 431 (^ and 411a / 431a, the groove 464 is formed between the forks 411a / 431a and 411b / 431b and the groove 466 is formed in the fork shape) Between 411b/431b and 411c/431c. These slots are preferably sized to accommodate a desired size of battery (eg, Aaa battery or other size). As shown in Figure 16B, the cross section of the fork is more Preferably, the bend is such that the battery fits snugly into each of the slots. Figure 16A shows battery 462a in slot 462 and battery 466a in slot 466. Each slot preferably includes electrical contacts to engage the positive terminal of the battery and For example, the battery slot 462 can include a lamp positive contact 412 for aligning the positive terminal of the battery 462a and a spring 437 and a rear cross contact 432 for engaging the negative terminal of the battery 462a. Thus, in the slot 462 The positive end of the battery 462a is directed toward the front of the cartridge 330. The rear parent contact 432 preferably includes a projection 432a that extends into the battery slot 464 and can be charged to the positive terminal of the battery located in the slot 464. The front cross-talk 4 and the spring 416 can anneal the negative terminal of the battery in the slot. Thus, the battery 464a is positive. The end is directed to the rear of the cassette 33. The front contact 414 can include a projection 414a that extends into the slot 466 where the 'dog out 414a can engage the positive terminal slot 466 of the battery located therein. Battery 466 ugly negative terminal can be connected to the outer ring contact w 145907. Doc -88- 201038127 The spring 438 is engaged. Therefore, the positive end of the battery 466a is directed to the front of the case 33. The manner in which the cartridge 330 can contain a battery is now further described. As shown in Fig. 16A, the battery 462 & is housed in the slot 462, the battery 464 £1 is received in the slot 464 and the battery 466a corresponds to the battery housed in the slot 466. As shown in Figure 17, . The batteries 462a, 464a, 4 are electrically connected in series. However, the cells are physically positioned side by side or in parallel with each other in their respective slots, as shown in Figure i6A. (It should be noted that Figure 17 is more illustrative of the conductive path between the cells and does not show the expected physical location of the battery.) This battery configuration is advantageous in that the power provided by the three batteries is available without having to have a series electrical connection Many other flashlights are physically positioned end-to-end. This situation provides the benefit that the length of the flashlight barrel or other illuminator housing need not be dictated by the number of batteries that are installed end to end. More specifically, for example, a flashlight having a certain number of batteries can be shorter, which can be advantageous in certain applications. Q begins with battery 462a, and the circuit control of the battery in box 330 is now further described. The negative terminal of battery 462a is coupled to the positive terminal of battery 464a via spring 437 and then back contact 432 and dog outlet 432a. (In Figure 17, in contrast to the physical display reference numerals 437, 432, and 432a, reference numerals 437, 432, and 432a represent the electrical paths provided by such components.) The negative % of the battery 464a passes through the spring 416 and then crosses before Contact 414 and projection 414a are coupled to the positive terminal of battery 466a. The negative terminal of battery 466a is lightly coupled to spring 438 and then to outer ring contact 434. As shown in FIG. 17, the positive terminal of the battery 462a has a protrusion 413 145907. The lamp positive contact 412 of the doc-89-201038127 and the flaps 413a to 413d is electrically coupled to the center connector 450. The conductive path then continues through the central connector 45 to its front end 直至 until the positive electrode of the lamp module 128, as indicated by the dotted line 461. (It should be noted that a light bulb can also be used.) From the light module 128 or other illumination device, the conductive path can then continue through the assembly of the flashlight forming part of the conductive path, as indicated by the dotted line 463 in FIG. In an embodiment, the dotted line may include a barrel 324 of the flashlight. And since then, the conductive path can extend through the tail cap 364 and up to the circuit board 348. As shown in FIG. 17, the circuit board 348 can be coupled to two contact pins 338, 340 that are electrically coupled to the battery compartment, as represented by dotted lines 465, 467. The positive connection between the battery compartment 330 and the circuit board 348 occurs via the contacts 451 of the central connector 450. Thus, the central connector 450 provides a positive contact at both ends of the cartridge 330, that is, at its front end 454. The positive contact to the lamp module 128 and the positive contact at the contact 451 to the circuit board 348. The negative connection between the battery case 33A and the circuit board 348 occurs via the outer ring contact 434. In an example, when the battery case 330 is mounted in the battery compartment 327, the electrical path (or electrical load) for the light source can be formed from the center electrode or front end 454 of the central connector 450 of the battery case 33 to the light module ι28. The compressible positive contact 133' and then the heat sink ι88 from the lamp module 128 to the conductive inner surface of the barrel 3 24, followed by the thread 329 from the barrel 324 to the thread on the conductive inner tail cap section 364 365 and conductive inner tail cap section 364 itself, then pass through wave spring 150 to the rear side of circuit board 348 The ground pad, then the upper side of the ground prior to 145,907 load switch 348, the circuit board 348 to the circuit board. Doc - 90 - 201038127 Pad, contact pin spring 346, contact pin 340 and then finally to negative electrode 434 of battery case 330. As noted above, the positive terminals of the battery 462 & can be electrically coupled to the front of the cassette 33 。. However, the positive terminal of battery 462a can also be electrically coupled to the rear of the cartridge via its connection to central connector 450 again. That is, the central connector extends to the rear contact 45 1 at the rear of the casing 33〇. Figure 18 is a block diagram illustrating the electronic components of an exemplary circuit board 348 for a flashlight such as the flashlight illustrated and discussed with respect to Figure 17. The circuit board 348 can include a voltage regulator circuit 1 4 'negative switch circuit 1006, a controller circuit 1008, and a 3-axis accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇. Circuit board 348 can include an I/O pad to engage an external device. 1/〇 pad can include top +4. 5VDC 1〇12, bottom +4. 5VDC 1014, GND 1016, LED_OUT 1018 and SWITCH 1020. I/O pad top +4. 5VDC 1012 and GND 1016 can be respectively connected to the central contact 45 1 and the outer ring contact 43 4 of the battery case 330. I/O塾 bottom +4. The 5 VDC 1014 and SWITCH 1018 can be transferred to the buckle cover 152. When the user presses on the switch jaw seal 168, the actuator 354 can be pushed forward to engage the buckle cover 152 to close at SWITCH 1020 and +4. Switch between 5VDC 1012. When the user releases the switch 埠 seal 168, the switch is opened and the SWITCH 1020 is no longer coupled to +4. 5VDC 1012. A detailed circuit schematic of an embodiment of circuit board 348 is shown in Figures 19A-19D. Figure 19A shows a circuit diagram of a preferred voltage regulator circuit 1〇〇4. The voltage regulator circuit 1004 can include a low dropout regulator 1〇2〇, which can be made small by 145907. Doc •91- 201038127 DC-to-voltage regulator implementation for input-output differential voltage operation. Signal line 1022 is the output from two diodes 1024, 1026, which can be driven by signal lines SWITCH 1014 and SW-ON 1046, respectively. This configuration preferably allows the lower voltage regulator from the signal line SWITCH 1014 or SW_ON 1046 to enable the low dropout regulator 1020. In the preferred embodiment, the output of the low dropout regulator 1020 can be set to + 3. The 3V 1028 is used as a power source for other components such as the controller circuit 1008. In one embodiment, a commercially available stand-alone LDO regulator (e.g., ISL9003AIRUNZ manufactured by Intersil Coperation) can be used. It should be understood that other types of linear regulator circuits can also be employed. The voltage level from the battery (ie, +4. 5VDC 1012) can be monitored by controller circuit 1008 via signal line ADC_VBAT 1032. Signal line ADC_VB AT 1032 can be divided by +4 from the voltage divider. 5VDC 1012 is generated. The I/O pad SWITCH 1014 can be used to generate a signal MOM 1048 for transmission to the controller circuit 1008 as an indication that the user presses on the switch 埠 seal 168 when the MOM 1048 is low. MOM 1048 can be produced by NPN bipolar electro-optical crystal 1052. 19B is a circuit diagram of a preferred controller circuit 1008. Controller circuit 1008 can include a controller 1030 having input and output connections. The controller 1030 can receive an input signal via signal lines 〇 (: _¥8 八丁 1032, 2-¥〇11丁1034, 丫-VOUT 1036, X-VOUT 1038, SCK 1040, MISO 1042, MOM 1048, and RESET 1050. The controller 103 can also deliver an output signal via the signal lines LOAD_ENABLE 1044 and SW_ON 1046. The power of the controller 103 0 can be +3. 3 V 1028 power supply support. 145907. Doc 92· 201038127 In one embodiment, the controller 1〇3 is a commercially available controller with embedded memory, for example, ATtiny 24, which is an 8-bit controller manufactured by Atmel Corporation. In another embodiment, the controller 1〇3〇 can be a microprocessor. In other embodiments, the controller 〇3〇 can be a discrete circuit. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other types of controller circuits can be used. Figure 19C shows a circuit diagram of a preferred load switching circuit 1〇〇6. In the embodiment of Figure 196, the load switch can be implemented by NM〇s 1〇54. The source of ❹ 1054 can be coupled to top GND 1016 and the drain of NMOS 1054 can be coupled to LED —OUT 1018. The gate of NMOS 1054 can be coupled to LOAD-ENABLE 1044. Power can flow from LED 〇UT 1〇18 to GND 1016 to form part of the loop that can turn the current to lamp module 128. Those skilled in the art should be aware that other types of drivers and load switch circuits can be used. Figure 19D shows a circuit diagram of a preferred 3-axis accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇. The 3-axis 加速 accelerating juice circuit 1010 can include outputs Z-VOUT 1034, Y-VOUT 1036, and XVOUT 1038, and the S-series output can also be drained to the controller circuit 1 〇 () 8 for further processing. The 3-axis accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇 preferably includes an inertial sensor (7) brother that can receive information from its internal sensing component and can provide an analog signal based on speculation from the internal sensing component. The inertial sensor 1() 58 can be used to measure the earth's static gravitational field by providing acceleration information on three axes (e.g., χ, 丫, and 2) of, for example, the mutually positive parent axes. The 3-axis accelerometer circuit can be powered by +3. 3V 1028 power supply support. 145907. Doc •93· 201038127 If the Z axis of the inertial sensor 1058 points to the center of the earth, then χ and γ will have acceleration zero. However, due to the gravity of the Earth, helium will experience an acceleration rate of _ 1 g. If the inertial sensor 640 flips 180. In order for the scorpion to face the earth, X and Υ will remain at zero' but Ζ will have an acceleration of +KJ. The inertial sensor 1058 can be attached to the circuit board 348 such that the X, Υ and Ζ axes are fixed relative to the flashlight 300. In the preferred embodiment, the inertial sensor 1058 is oriented on the plate 348 such that the yoke extends along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 3''. Thus, when the flashlight 300 is positioned horizontally, the x-axis also extends horizontally. In this position, when X and the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 300 are rotated to the left or to the right, since the magnitude of the acceleration on the X and the x-axis changes during the rotation, the gravity information about χ and Υ can be respectively via X_v〇UT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 are sent to control 1030. The relative angular rotation can be calculated by the controller ι〇3〇. Controller 1030 can use information on X-VOUT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 to determine if there is a rotation about the longitudinal axis of flashlight 300. In the preferred embodiment, the switch for the flashlight can be located in the switch and tail cap assembly 106. In this configuration, the initial orientation of the gamma axis is unknown, so the starting value can be calculated based on the Earth's gravitational field on the Χ& γ axis in the starting orientation. Once its initial orientation is established, subsequent angular measurements can be taken to track the rotation of the flashlight 300. In another embodiment, the switch can be placed on the barrel. In this configuration, the starting positions of the X and the x-axis are known, wherein it is assumed that, as dictated by the shape of the user's hand, the switch is pointed upwards with the thumb on the switch. In this case, only one axis (X or γ) can be used to calculate the change in rotation. In the above two embodiments, it is preferable that the flashlight 3 is substantially horizontal 145907. Doc -94- 201038127 Ground positioning for the user to obtain higher resolution when rotating (ie, better sensing of the rotation of the x and y axes). A rotation error can occur when the x-axis is tilted relatively far from the horizontal. In operation, it is preferred that the flashlight 3 (10) • be held to +/_ 3 相对 with respect to the horizontal direction. . If the tilt is greater than 30. Preferably, the Ζ axis is monitored and the rotary input is ignored until the flashlight 3 〇〇 is tilted back into the 30° window. In a preferred embodiment, the inertial sensor 1058 can be a commercially available microelectromechanical system (MEMS), such as the LIS394AL, which is a 3-axis accelerometer manufactured by ST Microelectronics. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other types of inertial sensor circuits can be used. The operational functions provided by the exemplary flashlight 300 can be similar to the operational functions previously described in connection with Figures 10A and 10C-101. Therefore, a detailed description will not be provided. Alternative preferred embodiments will now be described with reference to Figures 21 through 37. The embodiments described below share certain features similar to the previous embodiments. Therefore, any reference number indicating a component in the drawings generally indicates the same elements in the other figures. Exemplary flashlights 2100, 2300 are described in conjunction with Figs. 21 through 25B and Figs. 26 through 33, respectively. Each of the exemplary flashlights 21〇〇, 23〇〇 has many different aspects. Although these different aspects have all been incorporated into the flashlight 2100 2300 in various combinations, the scope of the present invention is not limited Flashlight 2100, 2300. Rather, the present invention is directed to each of the inventive features of flashlights 210A, 23A described individually and in various combinations below. In addition, the person skilled in the art will become more and more easy after reviewing the present invention. Doc • 95· 201038127 See, one or more aspects of the present invention may also be incorporated into other portable lighting devices including, for example, headlights and lanterns. 21 shows an exemplary flashlight 21. An exemplary flashlight 21A generally includes a barrel 2124, a head assembly phantom (10) at a front end of the barrel 2124, and a switch and a tail cap at a rear end of the barrel 2124. Cover assembly 21〇6. The head assembly 2104 is disposed about the front end of the barrel 2124, and the switch and tail cap assembly 2106 closes the rear end of the barrel 2124. The barrel 2124 can include an engraved surface 21〇8 along a portion of its length for gripping by a user. In the present embodiment, the engraved surface 21〇8 can be provided by broaching. Alternatively, the engraved surface 2108 can comprise a knurled or machined surface. Any desired pattern can be used to engrave the surface 21 〇 8. Figure 22 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flashlight 2100 of Figure 5 taken along the plane indicated by line 102-102. Figure 23 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a section before the flashlight 2100 of Figure 21 taken through the plane indicated by the line ι〇2_ι〇2. (The portions of Figs. 22 to 24 relating to the battery pack 213A are not shown in the cross section.) Referring to Figs. 22 and 23, the light source 101 is attached to the front end of the barrel 2124. In the present embodiment, the light source is mounted such that it is placed at the rear end of the reflector 2 ΐ 8 . In other embodiments, the reflector 2118 can be omitted, or its shape can be changed. The Buxi barrel 2124 is a hollow tubular structure suitable for receiving a portable power source such as a rechargeable battery pack 213A. Therefore, the barrel 2124 functions as an external device for housing a portable power source having positive and negative electrodes or terminals. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 2124 is sized to accommodate the battery 145907. Doc •96- 201038127 Group 2130, this battery pack 213〇 contains a single lithium-ion battery. However, in other embodiments, the battery pack 213 can be omitted and the barrel 2124 can be sized to have one or more stem cells or rechargeable batteries of the desired size and valley. Further, if a plurality of batteries are employed, depending on the embodiment, the batteries may be electrically connected in parallel or in series. Other suitable portable power packs can also be used to include, for example, high-capacity storage capacitors. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 2丨24 includes a front portion 2125 that extends under the &, head and top cover 2112 such that the outer surface of the head assembly 2104 and the barrel The outer surface of 2124 is generally flush. The inner diameter of the front portion 2丨25 is smaller than the inner diameter of the remainder of the barrel 2124. Moreover, the outer diameter of at least a portion of the front portion 2125 may be smaller than the outer diameter of the remaining portion of the barrel 2丨24 such that when the flashlight 2100 is assembled, the outer portion of the head and face cap 2112 and the barrel 2124 are combined. The outer portion can form a substantially uniform cylindrical surface. Alternatively, the combined head and face cap 2112 and barrel 2124 can have different shapes. The barrel 2124 is preferably made of aluminum, but other suitable metal or non-metal (e.g., plastic) materials may be used. Although the barrel 2124 is preferably made of aluminum, in the embodiment of the flashlight 2100 described below, the barrel 2124 does not function to connect the light source 101 or the circuit board 2148 to the electrical path of the battery pack 213. As a result, the barrel 2124 does not form part of the main power supply circuit of the light source 101 or the circuit board 2148. However, in other embodiments, the barrel 2124 can include a portion of the main power circuit of the light source 101 and/or the circuit board 2148, such as in the event that one or more batteries are used in place of the battery pack 2130. In these embodiments, the barrel 2124 and other components preferably include conductive 145907 forming a conductive path. Doc -97- 201038127 Materials. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 2124 includes external threads 174 formed on the outer diameter of the front portion 2i25, internal threads 2139 formed on the inner diameter of the front portion 丨 25, and an inner diameter formed at the rear end thereof. The internal thread ηι (best seen in Figure 24). The barrel 2124 of the present embodiment also includes an annular shoulder 182 formed at the rear end of the front portion 125. The annular shoulder 182 acts as a stop for the shoulder ring 26 disposed in the forward end of the barrel 4 of the barrel 21. Figure 25A is an exploded perspective view of the head assembly 21 〇 4, the barrel 2124, the lamp module 2128, and the battery pack 2130 of the flashlight 2100 of Figure 21 . Referring to Figures 23 and 25A', the head assembly 21〇4 of the present embodiment includes a combined head and face cap 2112, a lens 116 and a reflector 2118. However, in other embodiments the 'head and face cap 2112 can comprise two or more separate component portions' that can be assembled together, for example, with mating threads. The inner surface of the combined head and face cap 2112 can be used to house certain components including, for example, the lens 116 and the reflector 2118. Reflector 2118 and lens 11 6 are operatively mounted to the inner diameter of the combined head and face cap 2 112. In the present embodiment, the reflector 2118 includes a spring clip 2177 extending from its front end and evenly distributed around the outer circumference of the reflector 2118 such that the reflector 2118 can be snapped into the interior of the combined head and face cap 2112. A portion of the corresponding annular recess 2117 near the front end. In the present embodiment, six spring clips 21 77 are employed. However, other embodiments may collectively employ a different number of spring clips 2177 or another member for attaching the reflector 2118 to the combination head and face cap 2112. An annular shoulder 119 is provided at the rear end of the annular recess 211 7 to play once 145907. Doc -98 · 201038127 The spring clip 2177 extends into the annular recess 2117 to attach the reflector 2118 to the combination head and face cap 2112. Lens 116 is interposed between the forward facing flange of reflector 2118 and lip 113. In this manner, the reflector 2118 and lens 116 are locked within the combined head and face cap 2112. In an embodiment, a sealing element such as a 〇-shaped ring 4 can be located at the interface between the lens 116 and the lip 113. Other water resistant members such as one-way valves can also be used. The O-ring 114 can comprise rubber or other suitable material. The 〇 ^ 凹槽-shaped groove 115 may be disposed in the head and face cap 2112 such that it is disposed at the interface between the lens 116 and the lip 113. The annular groove 115 is preferably sized to partially receive the 丨-shaped ring , 14 whereby the 〇 ring π 4 is properly positioned during the assembly process. The reflector 2118 can include fins 2176 distributed around the outer periphery of the reflector 2118 to provide structural integrity to the reflector 2118 and aid in the inner surface of the head and face cap 2112 and the portion 2125 prior to the barrel 2丨24 The helium reflector 2118 is properly aligned. In the present embodiment, three fins 2176 are employed. In other embodiments, a different number of fins 2176 can be used, or no fins can be used at all. The combined head and face cap 2112 can include internal threads 172 that are configured to engage external threads 174 on the front portion 2125 of the barrel 2124. However, in other embodiments, other forms of attachment may be employed. In addition, the combined head and face caps 2112 are preferably made of anodized aluminum, although other suitable materials may be used. As best seen in Figures 23 and 25A, the reflective 118 of the reflector 118 is 2121 I45907. Doc -99· 201038127 It is preferred that the computer is metallized for reflectivity and ensures high precision optical properties. The computer produces the best parabola. Preferably, the profile 2丨2丨 has a value less than 0. 080 miles and better at 0. 040 miles and 〇. The parabola of the focal length between 050 miles is defined. Further, the distance between the vertex of the parabola defining the contour 2121 and the opening after the reflector 121 is preferably 0. 070 to 〇 12 inches, preferably 0. 075 to 0. 085 miles. The opening of the front end of the reflector 2118 preferably has a zero. 8 to 0. 9 miles better. The diameter of 850 to 852 inches, and the opening at the rear end of the reflector 2118 preferably has a diameter. 2 to 〇 3 lbs better 〇 24 〇 to 〇 25 〇 English diameter. Further, the ratio between the distance from the apex to the opening at the rear end of the reflector 2118 and the focal length is preferably 1. 5: i and 3 5 : within the range of 丨, preferably 1. 6:1 to 1. 8:1. Further, the ratio between the distance from the vertex to the opening of the front end of the reflector 2118 and the focal length is preferably in the range of 20:1 and 35:1, more preferably 20:1 to 21:1. The reflector 211 8 preferably comprises an injection molded plastic, but other suitable materials can be used. Referring back to Fig. 23, although the embodiments disclosed herein illustrate a substantially flat lens 116, the flashlight 21 00 may alternatively include a lens having a full C) surface to further improve the optical performance of the flashlight 2100. For example, &' may include a lenticular or flat cam gallery in all or part of the lens surface. Referring to Figures 23 and 25A, sealing element 2122 can be disposed at the interface between the combined head and face cap 2112 and the front portion 2125 of the barrel 2124 to provide a watertight seal. Preferably, the sealing member 2122 is located in an annular groove 123 disposed in the outer surface of the barrel 2124. The sealing element 2122 can be a 〇 shape 145907. Doc -】00· 201038127 Ring or other suitable sealing device. In the illustrated embodiment, the sealing element (10) is a one-way valve formed by a lip seal that is oriented to prevent flow from the outside into the interior of the flashlight 2100 while allowing excessive force in the flashlight to escape or escape. To the atmosphere. It is more complete in the US Patent No. 5, 〇〇 3, 44 颁 to Anthony Maglica. The design and use of a one-way valve for a self-propelled towel is incorporated herein by reference. The flashlight 2100 of the embodiment includes a shoulder ring 2126 mounted at the forward end of the barrel 2124. The light module 2128 is such that the light source 101 is disposed at the rear end of the reflector 2118. The light module 2128 can have a projection spindle that can coincide with the reflector axis and/or the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 2100. The focus of the light emitted from the light module 2128 can be twisted from the head assembly 2104 away from or towards the light by twisting the head assembly 2104 relative to the barrel 2124 (which can be accomplished via the mating threads 172, 174). The light source 101 of the light module 2128 includes a first positive electrode and a second negative electrode. The first positive electrode is in electrical communication with the compressible positive contact 133 (see Fig. 23). The negative electrode is in electrical communication with the heat sink housing 188, which also serves as the negative contact of the light module 2128. Light source 101 can be any suitable device that produces light. For example, the light source 1 〇 1 can be an LED light, an incandescent light or an arc light. In the illustrated embodiment, the light source 101 is an LED light and the light module 2128 is an LED module. The LEDs of the lamp module 2128 are preferably substantially less than 180. The spherical angle radiates light. In other embodiments, LEDs having other radiation angles can be used, including greater than 180. The LED of the angle of radiation. 145907. Doc -101 - 201038127 The structure of the LED module that can be used for the lamp module 2128 is described in detail in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/188, filed on Jan. 7, 2008, to the same application. No. and by Stacey West and others in 2 years! The content of the two applications is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety in the U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/145, filed on Jan. Referring to Figure 23, the shoulder ring 2丨% is configured to be in intimate contact with the barrel 2丨24. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of a portion of the shoulder ring 2126 is provided with an external thread which is sized to threadably engage the internal thread 139 of the portion 2丨25 of the barrel 2丨24. In other embodiments, other means for attaching or mounting the shoulder ring 2126 to the inner surface of the barrel 2124 can be employed, including, for example, press fit assembly. The lamp module 2128 is preferably mounted in the shoulder ring 126 via a press fit operation. Further, the outer surface of the fin piece housing 88 is preferably shaped to fit the inner surface of the shoulder ring 2126 along as much surface area as possible. To facilitate electrical and thermal communication between the lamp module and the shoulder ring 2120 and interference assembly between the two. A knurled surface 129 preferably disposed about the circumference of the lamp module 2128 can also be provided to enhance the interference fit between the lamp module 2128 and the shoulder ring η%. A shoulder ring 2126 as shown in Fig. 23 forms a large fin. Moreover, because it has an amount of f that is substantially greater than the mass of the lamp module 2128, it quickly diverts heat away from the lamp module 2128 via the heat sink 188. Finally, the heat drawn by the shoulder ring 2126 is efficiently drawn into the barrel 2124 because the barrel 2124 and the shoulder ring 2126 are in close contact in the region 189 before the shoulder ring 2126. The shoulder ring 2126 can be made of metal, and is better made by Qian Lushao to reach 145907. Doc -102· 201038127 Thermal properties, electrical properties and corrosion resistance. The outer diameter of the region 191 after the shoulder ring 126 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear portion of the barrel 2124. Thus, during assembly, the shoulder ring 2126 can easily slide within the barrel 2124 without damaging any protective coating (such as that caused by an anodizing process). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the region 191 after the shoulder ring 2126 is larger than the inner diameter of the portion 2125 before the barrel 2丨24. Thus, the region 191 after the shoulder ring 2126 acts as a stop to limit the foremost position of the shoulder ring 2126 when the shoulder ring is twisted into the inner thread 2139 of the barrel 124 2124. Although in the present embodiment the shoulder ring 2 12 6 , the lamp module 212 8 and the head assembly 2 104 do not form part of the mechanical switch of the flashlight 21 , in other embodiments it may form a mechanical switch. A portion is described, for example, in connection with U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/353,396, filed on Jan. 14, 2009. The light module 2128 is electrically connected to the flashlight 2100 as follows. The flashlight 21 can include a rechargeable battery pack 2130 that includes a top positive contact 214 that is electrically coupled to the compressible positive contact 133 of the lamp module 2128. After the current is transmitted through the light source 〇1, the ground connection is extended from the negative electrode of the light source 〇1 through the heat sink housing ι88 serving as the negative contact of the lamp module 2128 and electrically coupled to the battery pack 2130 The shoulder ring 2126 of the contact 212. Figure 24 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of the section of the flashlight of Figure 21 taken along line 2100 taken through the plane indicated by line 102-1〇2. (However, the battery pack 213 is not shown in cross section in Fig. 24.) After the flashlight 21, the section generally includes the switch and the tail cap assembly 21 〇 6. Figure 2 5 B is the switch 145907. Doc -103· 201038127 and an exploded perspective view of the tail cap assembly 2106. Referring to Figures 24 and 25B, the switch and tail cap assembly 2106 of the present embodiment preferably includes a sealing member 162 such as a one-way valve, an inner tail cap portion 2164, a communication ring 丨9〇, and a 192' lower switch housing. 2丨34, elastic cyanine probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2140, circuit board 2148, buckle cover 152, upper switch housing 2160, lock nut 166, actuator 154, switch 埠 seal 168 and outer tail cap section 2170. Each spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2 140 includes a conductive plunger 144 slidably disposed within the conductive barrel 2142 and positioned between the plunger 2144 and the barrel 2142 to bias the plunger 2144 away from the barrel Spring 2142 (not shown). The lower switch housing 2134 preferably includes three cylindrical passages 丨 93 that are open to the other ends of the lower peripheral 213 4 for receiving and holding the plungers 144 of each of the ejection probe assemblies 2136, 213 8 and 2140. At least part of it. One of the females in channel 193 is coupled to a cylindrical chamber 195 that is axially aligned with channel 193. Each cylindrical chamber 195 has a diameter greater than the diameter of each passage such that each chamber can receive and receive a barrel 2142 of each spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2140. In the present embodiment, the cylindrical passage 193 of the lower switch housing 2134 is formed in the ears 13 5 projecting radially inward from the outer wall 137 of the lower switch housing 2134. In the present embodiment, the ear 丨 3 5 is at least partially surrounded by a recess 153 for accommodating the mating indexing member 280 disposed on the rear end of the battery pack 2 13 〇. In other embodiments, the male directing component can be disposed on the lower switch peripheral 21 3 4 and the female directing component can be disposed on the battery pack 2丨3 。. 145907. Doc-104, 201038127 In the present embodiment, the lower switch housing 2134 preferably comprises a non-conductive material such as plastic, but other suitable materials or material systems may be used. In the present embodiment, the barrel 2142 and the plunger 2144 of the spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 2140 preferably comprise a conductive metal such as copper alloy or aluminum. The channel 193 of the lower switch housing 2134 and thus the spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 214 are configured to align with the contacts on the bottom side of the battery pack 2130. Referring also to Figure 2SC, when the battery pack 2130 is installed, the spring probe total turns 2136 can be aligned with the bottom center contact 274 of the battery pack 2130, and the spring probe assembly 2138 can be coupled to the bottom center contact of the battery pack 213. The 276 is aligned and the spring probe assembly 2140 can be aligned with the bottom outer ring contact 278 of the battery pack 2130. In one embodiment, the spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 214 are electrically coupled to the GND, MOM contacts, and +5 VDC contacts of the battery pack 2130, respectively. In the present embodiment, circuit board 2148 has slots 148 & (shown in Figure 25b) for receiving rearwardly extending portion 201 of inner tail cap portion 2164. On the other hand, a slot 198 formed by the rearwardly extending portion 0 2〇1 of the inner tail cap portion 2164 serves to receive the solid portion 14讣 of the circuit board 148, thereby enclosing the circuit board 148 and the inner tail cap portion 2 64 is held in a relatively desired position. Circuit board 2148 preferably includes contacts on both sides thereof. The circuit board can also include a conductive via that is routed through the board 2148 to couple the contacts on the opposite side. In this embodiment, the front side of the board 2148 (which faces the lower switch housing 2134) includes three contacts. Pads are electrically coupled to spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 2140, respectively. The rear side of circuit board 2148 (which faces upper switch housing 2160) includes three respective contact ports at designated locations. Doc - 105 · 201038127 Each of the front and rear sides of the circuit board 2148 is electrically connected via a conductive via or a route arranged in the circuit board 2148. The upper switch housing 216A includes a cylindrical passage 197 that allows the actuator 154 to slide therein. The annular rim of the switch 崞 seal 168 is held between the annular lip 丨 99 of the tail cap 217 之外 outside the rear end of the flashlight 2100. When the user presses on the switch 埠 seal 168, the actuator 154 moves forward within the passage 197 and engages the snap cover 152 such that the MOM and GND contact pads on the rear side of the circuit board 2148 are electrically coupled via the snap cover 152. When the user releases the switch 埠 seal 168, the M〇M and GND contact pads on the rear side of the circuit board 2148 are no longer electrically coupled via the snap cover 152. In other embodiments, a non-mechanical switch such as a capacitor can be used. The upper switch housing 2160 preferably includes a set of keys 161a, 161b, 161c and 161d (shown in Figure 25B). The keys 16U, 16ib, 16b, and 161 (1 can be used to be inserted into the slots 149a, 14 on the circuit board 2148, respectively, 4% and 149d to align the upper switch housing 2i6 and the board at the desired relative positions. 2148. In the present embodiment, the upper switch housing 2160 and the actuator 154 preferably comprise a non-conductive material such as plastic. The switch housing seal 168 preferably comprises a flexible, non-conductive material such as rubber. The conductive spring metal is included. Other suitable materials may be used. The communication rings 190, 192 are disposed in the middle of the switch and the tail cap assembly 21〇6. Although the communication rings 19〇, 192 are provided in the form of a charging ring in this embodiment The recharging procedure is simplified, but in other embodiments, the communication rings 19A, 192 may take other forms. In this embodiment, the circuit board 2148 is interposed between 145907, doc 201038127, the communication loops 190, 192. The circuit board 2148 is The configuration is in electrical communication with the communication rings 190, 192 while isolating the communication rings 19, 192 from direct electrical communication with each other via a short circuit. The electrical communication between the circuit board 2148 and the communication ports (10), 192 can be utilized by In formation A conductive trace is provided at the interface between the circuit board 2148 and each of the communication loops. The communication loops 19, 192 are preferably 'aluminum rings. As best seen in Figures 24 and 25B, the communication ring 19 (), 192 acts as an interface between the external ❹ recharging unit and the rechargeable battery pack 213〇 of the flashlight 2100. Although not depicted herein, it should be understood by those skilled in the art that it should be electrically connected to the communication rings 190, 192. The base of the recharging unit is formed by contacting and holding the flashlight 21 in place while charging occurs. Since the communication rings 190, 192 preferably extend around the entire outer circumference of the flashlight 21, a simple base design can be used. Charging unit. For example, a base that allows the flashlight 2100 to be placed in any radial orientation relative to its longitudinal axis into the recharging unit π and still in contact with the charging contacts of the recharging unit can be used. The flashlight 2100 does not need to be pressed into the charging unit such that hidden plugs or tabs are inserted into the flashlight 2100 for contact with the charging contacts of the recharging unit. Inner tail cap section 2164 Preferably, threads 165 are included on the outer surface of the front portion of the inner tail cap section 2164 for engagement with threads 131 on the inner surface of the rear portion of the barrel 2124. Additionally, the inner tail cap section is preferably included Threads 167 on the outer surface of the rear cap section 2164 for engagement with threads 171 on the inner surface of the front portion of the outer tail cap section 2170. The inner tail cap section 2164 of this embodiment also includes Tail cap 145907. Doc -107- 201038127 Cover section 216 4 month at the end of the month j Luodulu shock ^ shoulder 173. The annular shoulder 173 acts as a stop to prevent the lower switch housing 2134 from moving forward. The lock nut 166 is preferably threaded into and mated with the threads 169 on the inner surface of the rear portion of the inner tail cap section (10). Thus, the locking nut 166, the annular shoulder 173 of the inner tail cap section 2164, and the threads 165, 131, 167, 171, 169 cooperate to integrate the switch and the tail cap assembly 2106° within the tail cap section The construction of 2164 should cause the maintenance of the communication rings 19, 192 to be electrically isolated from each other. In other words, the inner tail cap section 2164 should not provide a short circuit path between the communication rings (10), 192. Thus, for example, the inner tail cap, section 2164 can be constructed of anodized or some other material that is not (iv). The lock nut 166 can be made of metal or plastic and does not require electrical conduction because it does not form any part of the electrical path in the present embodiment. Outer tail. The rear end of the towel s-cover section 2170 preferably has a plurality of icons 2180 (best shown in Figure 21) for use as an indication of functional mode selection. The description of the flashlight 2300 will be described later with reference to the icon 21 8 and its corresponding functional mode and operating procedure. A one-way valve, such as an alpha edge method 'seal 162, may be provided at the interface between the barrel 2124 and the inner tail cap section 2164 to provide a watertight seal while allowing overpressure within the flashlight 2100 to be vented to atmosphere. The design and use of a one-way valve in a flashlight is more fully described in U.S. Patent No. 5, No. 3,440, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. However, it can replace the lip seal! 62 other types of sealing elements such as a 〇-ring are used to form a watertight seal. The lip seal 162 preferably comprises 145907. Doc •108. 201038127 Contains non-conductive materials such as rubber. ▲ Other configurations of the switch and tail cap assembly 2106 can be used. For example, the switching force fb can be included in a side button switch or an internal rotating head, as used in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/353,396, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Referring now to Figures 25A and 25C, a rechargeable battery pack 2130 will now be described. In general, battery pack 213 〇 preferably includes a rechargeable battery; a circuit board that includes electronics such as a recharging circuit and/or circuitry for other functions; and a contact 'which is used to hold the battery pack 213() is electrically connected to the remainder of the flashlight 2100 or other lighting device. Thus, battery pack 2130 can generally represent a self-contained unit that can be inserted into battery compartment U7 of barrel MM along with other components shown in Figure 25-8. Also preferably, battery pack 2130 provides protection for the electronic device and other components therein. In other embodiments, battery pack 2130 does not have a circuit board mounted with components such as accelerometer 1058, and thus functionality may be provided by switch and rear circuit board assembly 2 106 in circuit board 2148. Referring to Figure 25C, the rear end of the battery pack 2130 includes a bottom center contact 274, a bottom center ring contact 276, and a bottom outer ring contact 278. The indexing member 280 formed by the rearwardly extending wall can be located on the rear end of the battery pack 2130, such as between the bottom center ring contact 276 and the bottom outer ring contact 278. The slot 284 disposed in the indexing member 280 is sized to receive the ear 13b of the lower switch peripheral 13 4 such that the indexing member 280 can be received in the recess of the ear 135 surrounding the lower switch housing 2134. In the area 153, a plug and a socket type connection are formed thereby. As a result, when the rotary switch and the tail cap assembly are 21〇6 to 145907. Doc •109- 201038127 When tightening it into the barrel 2124, once the indexing member 280 is received in the recess 153, the battery pack 2130 will also rotate. Therefore, the desired orientation of the switch and tail cap assembly 2106 and the assembled circuit board (not shown) in the battery pack 2130 will remain aligned at all times. This feature is helpful when the accelerometer 58 discussed below is located in the assembled circuit board of the battery pack 2130 such that the orientation of the icon 2180 can be automatically detected based on the output of the accelerometer 1058. The battery pack 2130 provided by the exemplary flashlight 21 00 is described in detail in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/145,120, filed on Jan. The manner of reference is incorporated herein. The function of the circuit of the flashlight 2100 and its supply is further described. The circuit of the flashlight 2 100 includes: a load circuit for supplying power to the light source 〇1; a controller circuit for powering the controller and the other electronic devices on the circuit board 2148 and (if available) the battery pack 213? And a charging circuit for recharging the rechargeable battery in the battery pack 2130. When the battery pack 2130 is mounted in the battery compartment 127 of the barrel 2124, the complete electrical path (or electrical load) for the light source ιοί can be formed from the top positive contact 214 of the battery pack 213〇 to the positive of the light module 2128. Contact 133 passes through the light source. This electrical path then extends from the heat sink housing 188 of the lamp module 2128 to the shoulder ring 212 6 and then to the top outer ring contact 2丨2 of the battery pack 2丨3〇. The control circuit begins from the bottom outer ring positive contact of the battery pack 2130 up to the spring probe assembly 2140 to the circuit board 2148, and returns from the ground pad of the circuit board 2148 to the spring probe assembly 2136 until the battery pack 213 is ten Central grounding contact. The high voltage side of the charging circuit to the battery pack 2130 extends from the positive charging ring 19〇 145907. The doc-110-201038127 to the circuit board 2148, the spring probe assembly 2140, enters the battery pack 2130 via the bottom outer ring contact 270 of the battery pack 2130. The charging circuit can then be returned from the bottom negative contact 274 of the battery pack 2130 to the spring probe assembly 2136, the circuit board 2148, to the ground charging ring 192.
❹ 現參看圖26描述另一較佳手電筒實施例2300 ^如圖示, 手電筒23 00大體上包括筒身2324、位於筒身23 24之前端處 之頭部總成2104及位於筒身2324之後端處之開關及尾部帽 蓋總成2306。頭部總成2104圍繞筒身2324之前端安置,且 開關及尾部帽蓋總成2306封閉筒身2324之後端。 筒身2324可包括沿其長度之一部分之刻花表面23〇8以供 使用者抓持。刻花表面2308可藉由拉削來提供。或者,刻 花表面2308可包含滾花或加工表面。任何所要圖案可用於 刻花表面2308。 圖27為沿由線302-302所指示之平面所截取的圖%之手 電筒2300之部分橫载面圖。圖28為穿過由線逝撕所指 示之平面所截取的圖26之丰此 口 于電同2300之前區段的放大部分 橫截面圖。(橫截面中未展示鱼電 -、电见现2330有關之圖27至 圖29之部分。) 笱身2324為適用於收容可择彳雷、,塔γ4 J镐式電源(諸如,電池盒2330) 之空心管狀結構。因此,筒身火 ^ ^ 同身2324充當—外殼,其用於收 、、内具有正及負電極或端子之可攜式電源。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身 ^ 身2324經大小設計以容納電池 益2330。然而’在盆侦音丄 例中’可省略電池盒2330且筒 身2324經大小設計以容納所 小及谷量之一或多個驗乾 145907.docAnother preferred flashlight embodiment 2300 is illustrated with reference to Figure 26. As shown, the flashlight 23 00 generally includes a barrel 2324, a head assembly 2104 at the forward end of the barrel 23 24, and a rear end of the barrel 2324. The switch and tail cap assembly 2306. The head assembly 2104 is disposed about the front end of the barrel 2324, and the switch and tail cap assembly 2306 closes the rear end of the barrel 2324. The barrel 2324 can include an engraved surface 23〇8 along a portion of its length for gripping by a user. The engraved surface 2308 can be provided by broaching. Alternatively, the engraved surface 2308 can comprise a knurled or machined surface. Any desired pattern can be used to engrave the surface 2308. Figure 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flashlight 2300 taken along the plane indicated by lines 302-302. Figure 28 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the section of Figure 26 taken through the plane indicated by the tearing of the line, before the section of the same as 2300. (The fish-electricity is not shown in the cross section - the electricity is shown in Figure 27 to Figure 29 of the relevant 2330.) The body 2324 is suitable for containment of the 彳, γ4 J镐-type power supply (such as the battery box 2330) ) hollow tubular structure. Therefore, the barrel fire ^ ^ the same body 2324 acts as a housing for the portable power supply with positive and negative electrodes or terminals. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel body 2324 is sized to accommodate the battery benefit 2330. However, in the case of a basin, the battery case 2330 can be omitted and the body 2324 can be sized to accommodate one or more of the small and the valleys. 145907.doc
•11U 201038127 電池或可再充電電池。此外,若採用複數個電池,則取決 於實施方案,電池可並聯或串聯電連接。亦可使用其他適 當可攜式電源’包括(例如)高容量儲存電容器。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身2324包括一前部分2125,其 在組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112下延伸以使得頭部總成21〇4之 ' 外表面與筒身2324之外表面大體上齊平。前部分2125之内 徑小於筒身2324之剩餘部分之内徑。且,前部分2125之至 少一部分之外徑可小於筒身2324之剩餘部分之外徑,以使 得當組裝手電筒2300時,組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112之外部 ◎ 部分及筒身2324之外部部分可形成大體上均一圓柱表面。 或者,組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112及筒身2324可具有不同形 狀。 筒身2324較佳由鋁製成,但亦可使用其他適當金屬或非 金屬(例如,塑膠)材料。雖然筒身2324較佳由鋁製成,但 在下文所述之手電筒2300之實施例中,筒身2324不用作用 於將光源101或電路板2348連接至電池盒2330之電路徑。 結果,筒身2324不形成光源101或電路板2348之主電源電 ◎ 路之一部分。然而,在其他實施例中,筒身2324可包含光 源101及/或電路板2348之主電源電路之一部分,諸如,在 代替電池盒2330使用一或多個電池之情況下。在此等實施 - 例中,甸身2324及其他組件較佳包含導電材料或包括 . 路徑。 在所說明之實施例中,筒身2324包括形成於前部分2125 之外徑上之外螺紋1 74、形成於前部分2 125之内徑上之内 145907.doc -112- 201038127 螺紋2139及形成於其後端處之内控上之内螺故331(最佳見 於圖29中)。本實施例之筒身2324亦包括形成於前部分 2125之後端處之壞形肩狀物182。環形肩狀物182充當安置 於筒身2124之前端中之肩式環2126的止件。 圖30A為圖26之手電筒2300之頭部總成2104、筒身 2324、燈模組2128及電池盒2330的分解透視圖。參看圖28 及圖3 0A ’頭部總成2 104大體上可包括組合頭部及面部帽 0 蓋2112、透鏡116及反射器2118。已結合圖23及圖25A全面 地描述頭部總成2 10 4及包括組合頭部及面部帽蓋2112、透 鏡116、反射器2118、肩式ί哀2126、燈模組2128、〇形環 114及唇緣密封件2122之組件。 亦可使用頭部總成2104之其他組態。舉例而言,在其他 實施例中,頭部總成2104可形成機械開關構件之一部分以 提供使用者介面。 參看圖28,燈模組2128如下電耦接至手電筒23 〇〇β本實 Q 施例之手電简2300包括電池盒2330’其包括電耗接至燈模 組2128之可壓縮正觸點133之正電極454。在電流傳遞穿過 光源之後’接地連接自該光源之負電極延伸穿過充當燈模 組2128之負觸點的散熱片外殼188及又電搞接至電池盒 2330之連接器接腳424的肩式環2126。接地路徑繼續至下 方開關外殼2334之導電環335(最佳展示於圖29中)、至彈簧 探針總成2140且至電路板2348,該電路板2348包括耦接至 電池盒2330上之負電極之負觸點,藉此完成電路。 圖29為穿過由線302-3 02所指示之平面所截取的圖26之 145907.doc • 113 · 201038127 手電筒2300之後區段的放大部分橫截面圖。(然而,在圖 29中’橫截面中未展示電池盒2330。)手電筒2300之後區 段大體上包含開關及尾部帽蓋總成2306,如圖26及圖27中 所反映。圖30B為開關及尾部帽蓋總成2306之分解透視 圖。 參看圖29及圖30B,本實施例之開關及尾部帽蓋總成 2306較佳包括下方開關外殼2334、彈簧探針總成2136、 2138、2140、電路板2348、扣罩152、致動器354、上方開 關外喊2360、諸如單向閥之密封元件162、開關埠密封件 168及尾部帽蓋2370。已結合圖24及圖25B全面描述彈簧探 針總成 213 6、213 8、214 0。 下方開關外殼2334較佳包括三個圓柱形通道393,其對 下方開關外殼2334之前端開放以用於收納且固持每一彈簧 探針總成2136、2138、2140之柱塞2144之至少一部分。通 道393中之每一者連接至與通道393軸向對準之圓柱形腔室 395。每一圓柱形腔室395之直徑大於通道直徑以使得每一 腔室可收納且收容每一彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2u〇之 筒身2142。在本實施例中’下方開關外殼2334較佳包含諸 如塑膠之不導電材料,但亦可使用其他適當材料或材料系 統。 彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2140亦向前推動直至其前端 與下文所述之觸點嚙合為止。下方開關外殼2334之通道 393及因此彈簧探針總成2136、2138、214〇經組態以與電 池盒2330之底部上之觸點對準。當安裝電池盒2330時,彈 145907.doc -114- 201038127 簧探針總成2丨36可與電池盒233〇之底部中央觸點45i對 準,且彈簧探針總成2138可與電池盒233〇之底部外觸點 434對準。另一方面,彈簧探針總成214〇可與下方開關外 殼2334之導電環335對準。導電環335可進一步與電池盒 2330之連接器接腳424之後端429對準。 在本實施例中,下方開關外殼2334較佳包含諸如塑膠之 不導電材料,但可使用其他適當材料。彈簧探針總成 ❽ 2136、2138、2140較佳由金屬製成以便形成稍後描述之手 電筒2300之電路徑之一部分。 車又佳由金屬製成之接觸環33 5(展示於圖29及圖30B中)可 與下方開關外殼2334共同模製以提供在彈簧探針總成214〇 與電池盒2330之連接器接腳424之後端429之間的界面。因 此形成用於燈模組2128之負或接地路徑之一部分。 電路板2348較佳包括在兩側上之觸點。電路板2348亦可 包括安排路線穿過板2348以耦接相對側上之觸點之導電介 〇 孔。或者,線可圍繞板2348安排路線以耦接相對側上之觸 點。電路板2348亦可包括安裝於其上之電子組件。在本實 施例中,電路板2348之前側(其面向下方開關外殼2334)包 括三個接觸墊,其分別電耦接至彈簧探針總成2136、 2138、2140。電路板2348之後側(其面向上方開關外殼36〇) 包括接觸墊,其對應於SWITCH 1020及4.5VDC 1014且其 位於指定位置處。電路板2348之前側及後側上之每一對相 應觸點經由設置於電路板2348中之導電介孔或者安排路線 之線電連接。稍後將在本說明書中描述組裝於電路板2348 145907.doc -115- 201038127 上之電子組件及其功能。 上方開關外殼2360包括-圓柱形通道397,其允許致動 器354在其内滑動。開關槔密封件168之環形緣邊固持於位 於手電筒·後端處之外尾部帽蓋237{)之環形唇緣—之 間。當使用者按壓在開關埠密封件168上時,致動器354在 通道397内向前移動且嚙合扣罩152以使得電路板Μ"之後 側上之swITCH接觸墊1020及4.5VDC接觸墊1〇14經由扣罩 152電耦接。當使用者釋放開關埠密封件時電路板 2348之後側上之SWITCH接觸墊1〇2〇及4 5Vd(:接觸墊ι〇ι4 不再經由扣罩152電耦接。在其他實施例中,可使用例如 電容器之非機械開關。 上方開關外殼2360較佳包括一組鍵361a、361b及 361c(展示於圖30B中)。此等鍵361a、361b及361c欲分別插 入至電路板2348上之狹槽349a、3 49b及349c中以在所要相 對位置對準上方開關外殼2360及電路板2348。一側上之短 鍵3 6 1 a而另一側上之短鍵3 61 b及長鍵3 61 c的組態形成極化 鍵接部件。 在本實施例中,如最佳見於圖30B中,上方開關外殼 2360較佳包括向前突出且收納於下方開關外殼2334上之配 合凹部334a内之對準部件360a。此等配合部件360a、334a 在組裝期間可用於幫助對準鍵361a、361b、361c與其形成 於電路板2348中之狹槽349a、349b、349c及形成於下方開 關外殼2334之底部中之配合孔(未圖示)。形成於下方開關 外殼2334之底部中之配合孔較佳經尺寸設計以收納其各別 145907.doc • 116· 201038127 鍵以便形成干涉裝配。在其他實施例中,公對準部件可設 置於下方開關外殼2334上且相應母部件可設置於上方開關 外殼2360上。 在本實施例中,上方開關外殼236〇及致動器354較佳包 含諸如塑膠之不導電材料。開關埠密封件168亦較佳包含 諸如橡膠之可撓性不導電材料。扣罩152較佳包含諸如金 屬之導電材料。可使用其他適當材料。 可在筒身2324與開關及尾部帽蓋總成23〇6之間的界面處 設置諸如唇緣密封件丨6 2之單向閥以提供不透水密封同時 允許手電筒内之過壓力排放或排出至大氣。然而,可代替 唇緣密封件1 62使用諸如〇形環之其他形式之密封元件以形 成不透水密封。唇緣密封件162較佳由諸如橡膠之不導電 材料製成。 尾部帽蓋2370較佳包括在尾部帽蓋237〇之前部外表面上 之螺紋331(展示於圖29及圖3 1A中)以用於與筒身2324之後 部内表面上之螺紋329配合。 可使用開關及尾部帽蓋總成2306之其他組態。舉例而 言,開關功能可包括於側面按鈕開關或内部旋轉頭部總成 開關中,諸如在2009年1月14曰申請之美國專利申請案第 12/353,396號中所採用。 現參看圖28、圖29及圖30A,電池盒2330較佳含有用於 對手電筒2300或其他照明裝置供電之電池。在電池插入至 電池盒2330中之後,其可與手電筒23⑼之其他組件一起插 入至手電筒之筒身2324中。在本實施例中,中央連接器 145907.doc -117· 201038127 450用於在電池盒233()之兩端處設置正觸點,亦即,在其 頂端454處之正觸點及在其底部中央觸點45 ^處之正觸點。 ^本實施例中’彈簧探針424用於在電池盒則之兩端處 設置負觸點’亦即,在其頂端423處之負觸點及在其底部 429處之負觸點。 _ 在由Stacey West等人於2〇〇9年1月16日申請之同在申請 中之美國臨時專利巾請案第61/145,12G號中詳細描述例示 性手電筒2300中所包括之電池盒233〇,該案之内容以引用 的方式併入本文中。 亦參看囷32,在本實施例中,當電池盒233〇安裝至電池 室327中時,用於光源之電路徑(或電負載)可形成為自電池 盒2330之中央電極或前端454至燈模組2128之可壓縮正觸 點133且穿過光源101。電路逕自光源1〇1繼續至燈模組 2128之散熱片188、電池盒233〇之導體接腳424、下方開關 外殼2334之接觸環335、彈簧探針總成214〇、電路板2348 上之負載開關1006、電路板2348之前侧上之接地墊、彈簧 k針總成2138且最終至電池盒2330之負電極434。 此後將描述手電筒2300之功能及支援該等功能之電路。 手電请23 00之功能及支援該等功能之電路亦可用於手電筒 2100。 在本實施例中,手電筒2300包括五個預定義功能模式: 具有可變亮度之暗光(DIM)、具有可變閃爍頻率之閃燦光 (STROBE)、具有可變亮度之SOS模式(s〇s)、運動敏感信 遽模式(SIGNAL)及仗燈模式(NITE LITE)。應理解,可移 145907.doc -118· 201038127 除本實施例中所呈現之模式及/或可添加其他模式以形成 具有理想功能之手電筒。在此描述中,可交換使用閃爍及 頻閃。且’可交換使用夜燈及NITE LITE。 尾部帽蓋2370之後端較佳具有複數個圖符21 80以用作功 能模式選擇之指示。作為展示於圖3 1B中之實例,尾部帽 ' 蓋2370具有圍繞尾部帽蓋2370之後圓周2371均勻隔開之五 個模式相關聯圖符2370a 、 2370b 、 2370c 、 2370d及 ❹ 2370e °與DIM模式相關聯的圖符2370a定位於12點鐘方 向’與STROBE模式相關聯的圖符237〇b定位於12點鐘與3 點鐘方向之間’與SOS模式相關聯的圖符2370c定位於3點 釦與ό點鐘方向之間’與SIGNAL模式相關聯的圖符2370d 疋位於6點鐘與9點鐘方向之間,且與nitE LITE模式相關 聯的圖符2370e定位於9點鐘與12點鐘方向之間。每一對鄰 近圖付之間的間隔因此為360。除以5,即’ 72。。在其他實 施例中,圖符 2370a、2370b、2370c、2370d及 2370e不需 〇 要圍繞尾部帽蓋2370之後圓周2371均勻隔開。在其他實施 例中,圖符23 70a至23 70e之次序可在圖3 1C中或以某其他 次序重新配置。 手電筒2300可藉由按壓瞬時開關歷時預定時段同時手電 '筒在水平位置中而接通以使其進入新操作模式。新操作模 式由手電筒之位置判定。換言之,新操作模式由哪一者面 對預定義位置之圖符判定。在本實施例中,與面和點鐘 方向之特定圖符2180相關聯的模式被選擇為手電筒23〇〇進 入之新模式。與模式相關聯圖符2180之此介面簡化使用者 145907.doc -119- 201038127 之模式選擇程序。可在不必須執行-操作序列的情況下立 即選擇任何模式。 月,凡下立 在^實施例巾,圖符2180較佳經雷射雕刻以提供容易可 見之高對比度’即使在不良的照明條件下亦為如此。亦可 使用用於顯示圖符218G之其他手段。舉例而言,圖符編 可被喷漆、標記、層壓、絲網印刷、壓印、移印、機械雕 刻或熱傳遞/染料昇華。 另外,圖符2180可(例如)由構墨水或諸如背光之盆他技 術照明以使圖符2180在黑暗中發光。結果’圖符218〇在黑 暗中可見。且如圖31D中所示,尾部帽蓋237〇之密封件I" 可包括凸塊或肋狀物2399,其可與圖符218〇中之一者(例 如,DIM圖符237〇a)對準以幫助使用者在黑暗中確定特定 圖符2370 a之位置。 在組裝開關及尾部帽蓋總成2306之後,可將圖符218〇鋪 叹至手電筒23 00。若為此種狀況,則當舖設圖符2丨時, 彈簧探針總成2136、2138、2140之尖端可用作於定向之指• 11U 201038127 battery or rechargeable battery. Further, if a plurality of batteries are used, depending on the embodiment, the batteries may be electrically connected in parallel or in series. Other suitable portable power sources can also be used including, for example, high capacity storage capacitors. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 2324 includes a front portion 2125 that extends under the combined head and face cap 2112 such that the outer surface of the head assembly 21〇4 and the outer surface of the barrel 2324 are generally On the flush. The inner diameter of the front portion 2125 is smaller than the inner diameter of the remainder of the barrel 2324. Moreover, the outer diameter of at least a portion of the front portion 2125 can be smaller than the outer diameter of the remaining portion of the barrel 2324 such that when the flashlight 2300 is assembled, the outer portion of the head and face cap 2112 and the outer portion of the barrel 2324 are combined. A substantially uniform cylindrical surface can be formed. Alternatively, the combined head and face cap 2112 and barrel 2324 can have different shapes. The barrel 2324 is preferably made of aluminum, but other suitable metallic or non-metallic (e.g., plastic) materials may be used. Although the barrel 2324 is preferably made of aluminum, in the embodiment of the flashlight 2300 described below, the barrel 2324 does not act to electrically connect the light source 101 or the circuit board 2348 to the battery case 2330. As a result, the barrel 2324 does not form part of the main power source circuit of the light source 101 or the circuit board 2348. However, in other embodiments, the barrel 2324 can include a portion of the main power circuit of the light source 101 and/or the circuit board 2348, such as in the event that one or more batteries are used in place of the battery case 2330. In these implementations - the example, the body 2324 and other components preferably comprise a conductive material or include a path. In the illustrated embodiment, the barrel 2324 includes an outer thread 174 formed on the outer diameter of the front portion 2125, formed on the inner diameter of the front portion 2 125, 145907.doc-112-201038127, thread 2139, and formed In the internal control at the rear end of the internal screw 331 (best seen in Figure 29). The barrel 2324 of the present embodiment also includes a bad shoulder 182 formed at the rear end of the front portion 2125. The annular shoulder 182 acts as a stop for the shoulder ring 2126 disposed in the forward end of the barrel 2124. Figure 30A is an exploded perspective view of the head assembly 2104, the barrel 2324, the lamp module 2128, and the battery case 2330 of the flashlight 2300 of Figure 26. Referring to Figures 28 and 30A, the head assembly 2 104 can generally include a combination head and face cap 0 cover 2112, lens 116, and reflector 2118. The head assembly 2 10 4 and the combined head and face cap 2112, lens 116, reflector 2118, shoulder 2126, lamp module 2128, 〇 ring 114 have been fully described in conjunction with FIGS. 23 and 25A. And the components of the lip seal 2122. Other configurations of the head assembly 2104 can also be used. For example, in other embodiments, the head assembly 2104 can form part of a mechanical switch member to provide a user interface. Referring to FIG. 28, the lamp module 2128 is electrically coupled to the flashlight 23 as follows. The flashlight 2300 of the embodiment of the present invention includes a battery case 2330' including a compressible positive contact 133 that is electrically connected to the lamp module 2128. Positive electrode 454. After the current is transmitted through the light source, the ground connection is extended from the negative electrode of the light source through the heat sink housing 188 that acts as the negative contact of the lamp module 2128 and the shoulder of the connector pin 424 that is electrically coupled to the battery case 2330. Ring 2126. The ground path continues to the conductive ring 335 of the lower switch housing 2334 (best shown in FIG. 29), to the spring probe assembly 2140, and to the circuit board 2348, which includes a negative electrode coupled to the battery case 2330. The negative contact, thereby completing the circuit. Figure 29 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of the section of the flashlight 2300 of Figure 26 taken through the plane indicated by line 302-3 02, 145907.doc • 113 · 201038127. (However, battery case 2330 is not shown in cross-section in Figure 29.) The rear section of flashlight 2300 generally includes a switch and tail cap assembly 2306, as reflected in Figures 26 and 27. Figure 30B is an exploded perspective view of the switch and tail cap assembly 2306. Referring to Figures 29 and 30B, the switch and tail cap assembly 2306 of the present embodiment preferably includes a lower switch housing 2334, spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 2140, a circuit board 2348, a buckle cover 152, and an actuator 354. The upper switch is shouted 2360, such as a one-way valve sealing element 162, a switch 埠 seal 168, and a tail cap 2370. Spring probe assemblies 213 6, 213 8 and 214 0 have been fully described in connection with Figures 24 and 25B. The lower switch housing 2334 preferably includes three cylindrical passages 393 that are open to the front end of the lower switch housing 2334 for receiving and holding at least a portion of the plunger 2144 of each spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2140. Each of the channels 393 is coupled to a cylindrical chamber 395 that is axially aligned with the channel 393. Each cylindrical chamber 395 has a diameter greater than the passage diameter such that each chamber can receive and receive a barrel 2142 of each spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2u. In the present embodiment, the lower switch housing 2334 preferably comprises a non-conductive material such as plastic, but other suitable materials or material systems may be used. The spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 2140 are also pushed forward until their front ends engage the contacts described below. The channel 393 of the lower switch housing 2334 and thus the spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 214 are configured to align with the contacts on the bottom of the battery compartment 2330. When the battery case 2330 is mounted, the spring 145907.doc -114-201038127 spring probe assembly 2丨36 can be aligned with the bottom center contact 45i of the battery case 233〇, and the spring probe assembly 2138 can be coupled to the battery case 233. The bottom outer contact 434 is aligned. Alternatively, the spring probe assembly 214 can be aligned with the conductive ring 335 of the lower switch housing 2334. The conductive ring 335 can be further aligned with the rear end 429 of the connector pin 424 of the battery case 2330. In the present embodiment, the lower switch housing 2334 preferably comprises a non-conductive material such as plastic, although other suitable materials may be used. The spring probe assemblies 136 2136, 2138, 2140 are preferably made of metal to form part of the electrical path of the flashlight 2300 described later. The contact ring 33 5 (shown in Figures 29 and 30B), which is preferably made of metal, can be co-molded with the lower switch housing 2334 to provide a connector pin for the spring probe assembly 214 and the battery case 2330. The interface between the ends 429 after 424. Thus, a portion of the negative or ground path for the lamp module 2128 is formed. Circuit board 2348 preferably includes contacts on both sides. Circuit board 2348 can also include conductive vias that route through board 2348 to couple contacts on opposite sides. Alternatively, the wires can be routed around the board 2348 to couple the contacts on the opposite side. Circuit board 2348 can also include electronic components mounted thereon. In the present embodiment, the front side of the circuit board 2348 (which faces the lower switch housing 2334) includes three contact pads that are electrically coupled to the spring probe assemblies 2136, 2138, 2140, respectively. The rear side of circuit board 2348 (which faces upward switch housing 36A) includes contact pads that correspond to SWITCH 1020 and 4.5 VDC 1014 and are located at designated locations. Each pair of corresponding contacts on the front side and the rear side of the board 2348 are electrically connected via conductive vias or routing lines disposed in the board 2348. The electronic components assembled on the circuit boards 2348 145907.doc-115-201038127 and their functions will be described later in this specification. The upper switch housing 2360 includes a cylindrical passage 397 that allows the actuator 354 to slide therein. The annular rim of the switch 槔 seal 168 is held between the annular lip of the tail cap 237{) outside the flashlight rear end. When the user presses on the switch 埠 seal 168, the actuator 354 moves forward within the channel 397 and engages the buckle cover 152 such that the circuit board Μ"swITCH contact pad 1020 and 4.5 VDC contact pad 1〇14 on the rear side Electrically coupled via the buckle cover 152. The SWITCH contact pads 1〇2〇 and 4 5Vd on the rear side of the circuit board 2348 when the user releases the switch 埠 seal are no longer electrically coupled via the snap cover 152. In other embodiments, A non-mechanical switch such as a capacitor is used. The upper switch housing 2360 preferably includes a set of keys 361a, 361b, and 361c (shown in Figure 30B). The keys 361a, 361b, and 361c are intended to be inserted into the slots on the circuit board 2348, respectively. 349a, 3 49b and 349c are aligned with the upper switch housing 2360 and the circuit board 2348 at the desired relative positions. The short key 3 6 1 a on one side and the short key 3 61 b and the long key 3 61 c on the other side. The configuration forms a polarization bonding component. In the present embodiment, as best seen in Figure 30B, the upper switch housing 2360 preferably includes an alignment that projects forwardly within the mating recess 334a of the lower switch housing 2334. Component 360a. These mating components 360a, 334a can be used during assembly to assist alignment keys 361a, 361b, 361c with slots 349a, 349b, 349c formed in circuit board 2348 and in the bottom of lower switch housing 2334. Matching holes (not shown). Formed under The mating holes in the bottom of the switch housing 2334 are preferably sized to receive their respective 145907.doc • 116·201038127 keys to form an interference fit. In other embodiments, the male alignment features can be disposed on the lower switch housing 2334. The corresponding female component can be disposed on the upper switch housing 2360. In the present embodiment, the upper switch housing 236 and the actuator 354 preferably comprise a non-conductive material such as plastic. The switch housing seal 168 also preferably includes rubber. The flexible non-conductive material. The buckle cover 152 preferably comprises a conductive material such as metal. Other suitable materials may be used. A lip such as a lip may be provided at the interface between the barrel 2324 and the switch and the tail cap assembly 23〇6. The one-way valve of the edge seal 丨6 2 provides a watertight seal while allowing overpressure in the flashlight to be vented or vented to the atmosphere. However, other forms of sealing elements such as a 〇-ring may be used instead of the lip seal 1 62 to A watertight seal is formed. The lip seal 162 is preferably made of a non-conductive material such as rubber. The tail cap 2370 is preferably included before the tail cap 237 Threads 331 on the face (shown in Figures 29 and 31A) are used to mate with threads 329 on the inner surface of the rear portion of the barrel 2324. Other configurations of the switch and tail cap assembly 2306 can be used. The switch function can be included in the side button switch or the internal rotary head assembly switch, such as that used in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/353,396, filed on Jan. 14, 2009. In Figure 30A, battery compartment 2330 preferably contains batteries for powering the flashlight 2300 or other lighting device. After the battery is inserted into the battery case 2330, it can be inserted into the barrel 2324 of the flashlight together with the other components of the flashlight 23 (9). In the present embodiment, the central connector 145907.doc -117· 201038127 450 is used to provide a positive contact at both ends of the battery case 233 (), that is, a positive contact at the top end 454 thereof and at the bottom thereof Positive contact at center contact 45^. In the present embodiment, the spring probe 424 is used to provide a negative contact at both ends of the battery case, i.e., a negative contact at its top end 423 and a negative contact at its bottom 429. _ The battery case included in the exemplary flashlight 2300 is described in detail in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/145,12, filed on Jan. 16, 2009, to, et al. 233, the contents of this case are incorporated herein by reference. Referring also to 囷32, in the present embodiment, when the battery case 233 is mounted in the battery compartment 327, the electrical path (or electrical load) for the light source can be formed from the center electrode or front end 454 of the battery case 2330 to the lamp. The module 2128 can compress the positive contact 133 and pass through the light source 101. The electrical path continues from the light source 101 to the heat sink 188 of the lamp module 2128, the conductor pin 424 of the battery case 233, the contact ring 335 of the lower switch housing 2334, the spring probe assembly 214, and the load on the circuit board 2348. Switch 1006, ground pad on the front side of circuit board 2348, spring k pin assembly 2138 and ultimately to negative electrode 434 of battery case 2330. The function of the flashlight 2300 and the circuitry supporting the functions will be described hereinafter. The function of the 23 00 flashlight and the circuit supporting these functions can also be used for the flashlight 2100. In the present embodiment, the flashlight 2300 includes five predefined functional modes: dark light with variable brightness (DIM), flash light with variable blinking frequency (STROBE), SOS mode with variable brightness (s〇 s), motion sensitive signal mode (SIGNAL) and xenon mode (NITE LITE). It should be understood that the 145907.doc -118· 201038127 can be moved in addition to the modes presented in this embodiment and/or other modes can be added to form a flashlight having the desired function. In this description, flashing and strobe are used interchangeably. And 'exchangeable night lights and NITE LITE. The rear end of the tail cap 2370 preferably has a plurality of icons 218 to serve as an indication of the selection of the functional mode. As an example shown in FIG. 31B, the tail cap 'cover 2370 has five pattern associated icons 2370a, 2370b, 2370c, 2370d, and 370 2370e° evenly spaced around the trailing cap 2370 after the circumference 2371 is associated with the DIM mode. The associated icon 2370a is positioned at 12 o'clock. The icon 237〇b associated with the STROBE mode is positioned between 12 o'clock and 3 o'clock. The icon 2370c associated with the SOS mode is positioned at 3 o'clock. The icon 2370d associated with the SIGNAL mode is located between the 6 o'clock and 9 o'clock directions, and the icon 2370e associated with the nitE LITE mode is positioned at 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock. Between directions. The interval between each pair of neighbors is therefore 360. Divide by 5, ie '72. . In other embodiments, icons 2370a, 2370b, 2370c, 2370d, and 2370e need not be evenly spaced around circumference 2371 of tail cap 2370. In other embodiments, the order of icons 23 70a through 23 70e may be reconfigured in Figure 31C or in some other order. The flashlight 2300 can be turned on to enter the new mode of operation by pressing the momentary switch for a predetermined period of time while the flashlight 'cylinder is in the horizontal position. The new operating mode is determined by the position of the flashlight. In other words, the new operating mode is determined by which one of the icons of the predefined position is determined. In the present embodiment, the mode associated with the particular icon 2180 in the face and hour directions is selected as the new mode in which the flashlight 23 is entered. This interface associated with the pattern icon 2180 simplifies the mode selection procedure for the user 145907.doc -119- 201038127. Any mode can be selected immediately without having to perform a sequence of operations. In the month of the embodiment, the icon 2180 is preferably laser engraved to provide a high contrast that is easily visible, even under poor lighting conditions. Other means for displaying icon 218G can also be used. For example, the icon can be painted, marked, laminated, screen printed, stamped, pad printed, mechanically engraved or heat transferred/dye sublimed. Additionally, icon 2180 can be illuminated, for example, by a fountain or a technique such as a backlight to cause icon 2180 to illuminate in the dark. The result 'icon 218〇 is visible in black and dark. And as shown in FIG. 31D, the tail cap 237's seal I" may include a bump or rib 2399 that may be associated with one of the icons 218 (eg, DIM icon 237〇a) To help the user determine the position of a particular icon 2370 a in the dark. After assembling the switch and the tail cap assembly 2306, the icon 218 can be smattered to the flashlight 23 00. If this is the case, the tip of the spring probe assembly 2136, 2138, 2140 can be used as an orientation finger when the icon 2 is laid.
引。 S 在其他實施例中’圖符2180可置放於除尾部帽蓋237〇之 後圓周以外之處。舉例而言,圖符2180可置放於尾部帽蓋 2370之中部外圓周上。 在其他實施例中,可取決於所要功能模式之數目而使用 多於或少於五個之圖符。 因為在本實施例中圖符21 80較佳雕刻於尾部帽蓋237〇之 後圓周2371上,所以在上方開關外殼2360與電路板2348之 145907.doc -120· 201038127 間的鍵接部件用於固持相對於經雷射雕刻之圖符2180的電 路板2348之定向。 或者,若不使用鍵接部件,則可執行校準例行程序以將 圖符與電路板23料對準。若為此種狀況,則可在製造期間 執行校準。若在製造之後發生非故意旋轉,則可由電路板 • 2348執行一程序以重新對準圖符與電路板2348。 圖32為說明用於手電筒23〇〇之電路之方塊圖。該電路包 〇 括一電源2330、一光源2128及一電路板2348。該電路板 2348可包括電壓調節器電路及介面1〇〇4、負載開關電路 1006、控制器電路1008及加速計電路1〇1〇。 電路板2348亦可包括音訊介面及揚聲器518及振動器 52〇。此情形(例如)在聽覺或觸覺回應回應於命令之進入 (諸如,如下所述之一或多個模式之選擇)而為所要的情況 下可為理想的。代替將音訊介面及揚聲器518及振動器520 疋位於電路板23 48上,其中之一或兩者可在板外定位。換 ❹ 言之’音訊介面及揚聲器518及/或振動器520不需要安裝 於電路板2348上但可包括於手電筒300内之別處。 電路板2348可包括I/O墊以嚙合外部裝置。i/〇塾可包括 頂部+4.5VDC 1012、底部+4.5VDC 1014、GND 1016、 LED—OUT 1018及 SWITCH 1020。 亦參看圖30C,I/O墊頂部+4.5VDC 1012及GND 1016可 分別耦接至電池盒2330之中央觸點451及外觸點434。I/O 墊底部+4.5VDC 1014及SWITCH 1020可耦接至扣罩152。 當使用者按壓在開關埠密封件16 8上時,可向前推動致動 145907.doc -121 · 201038127 器354以嚙合扣罩152以閉合在SWITCH 1020與+4 5VDc 1014之間的開關。當使用者釋放開關埠密封件168時,開 關斷開且SWITCH 1020不再耦接至+4.5VDC 1014。 圖33A至圖33D中展示電路板2348之實施例之詳細電路 示意圖。 圖33A展示較佳電壓調節器電路1004之電路示意圖。恭 壓調節器電路1004可包括低壓降調節器1〇〇2,其可由以小 輸入-輸出差分電壓操作之DC線性電壓調節器實施。偉號 線1022為來自兩個二極體1024、1026之輸出,其可分別由 信號線SWITCH 1020及SW—ON 1046驅動。此級態較佳允 許來自信號線SWITCH 1020或SW—ON 1046之較高電壓啟 用低壓降調節器1002。 在較佳實施例中,低壓降調節器1 〇〇2之輸出可設定至 + 3.3V 1028以用作例如控制器電路1〇〇8之其他組件之♦ 源。在一實施例中,可使用市售獨立LDO調節器(例如, 由 Intersil Coperation製造之 ISL9003AIRUNZ)。應理解, 亦可採用其他類型之線性調節器電路。 來自電池之電源電壓位準(亦即,+4.5乂〇(:1012)可由控 制器電路1008經由信號線ADC_VBAT 1032監視。信號線 入0(:_¥8八1'1032可由分壓器自+4.5¥0(:1012產生。 I/O墊SWiTCH 1020可用於產生信號MOM 1048以用於在 MOM 1048低時作為使用者按壓在開關埠密封件168上之指 示發送至控制器電路1008。MOM 1048可由NPN雙極電晶 體1052產生。 145907.doc -122- 201038127 圖3 3B為較佳控制器電路1008之電路示意圖。控制器電 路1008可包括具有輸入及輸出連接之控制器1030。控制器 1030可經由信號線ADC_VBAT 1032、Z-VOUT 1034、γ_ VOUT 1036、X-VOUT 1038、SCK 1040、MISO 1042、 MOM 1048及RESET 1050接收輸入信號。控制器1030亦可 •經由信號線LOAD_ENABLE 1044及SW_ON 1046輸送輪出 信號。控制器1030之電源可由+3.3V 1028電源支援。 在一實施例中,控制器1030為具有嵌入式記憶體之市隹 〇 控制器,例如,ATtiny24,其為由Atmel Corporation製造 之8位元控制器。在另一實施例中,控制器1〇3〇可為微處 理器。在其他實施例中,控制器1030可為離散電路。熟習 此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他類型之控制器電路。 圖33C展示較佳負載開關電路1〇〇6之電路示意圖。在圖 33C之實施例中,負載開關可由NMOS 1054實施。PM〇s 1054之源極可耦接至頂部GND 1016’而NMOS 1054之及 q 極可耦接至LED_OUT 1018。NMOS 1054之閘極可輕接至 LOAD_ENABLE 1044。電力可自 LED—OUT 1 018 流動至 GND 10 16以形成可接通燈模組2128之電流之迴路的—部 分。 * 熟習此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他類型之驅動器及 負載開關電路。 圖3 3D展示較佳加速計電路1〇1〇之電路示意圖。加速計 電路 1010 可包括輸出 Z-VOUT 1034、Y-VOUT 1036 及 χ_ VOUT 1038,該等輸出亦可耦接至控制器電路1008以用於 145907.doc -123· 201038127 進一步處理。 加速計電路1010較佳包括一慣性感測器1〇58,其可自其 内部感測元件接收資訊且可根據來自内部感測元件之量測 來提供類比信號。慣性感測器1058可用於藉由提供在例如 相互正交之軸之三個軸(即,X、丫及z)上之加速度資訊來 置測地球靜態重力場。3軸加速計電路101 〇之電源VDD可 由+3.3V 1028電源支援。 若t貝性感測器1 〇58之Z軸指向地球之中心,則X及γ將具 有加速度零。然而,歸因於地球之重力,Z將經歷_1G之加 速度。若慣性感測器1058翻轉18〇。以使得Z背向地球,則χ 及Y將保持為零,但Z將具有+1G之加速度。 慣性感測器1 〇58可附接至電路板2348以使得X、Y及Z軸 相對於手電筒2300固定。在較佳實施例中,慣性感測器 1058在板2348上定向以使得z轴沿手電筒2300之縱軸延 伸。因而’當水平定位手電筒2300時,Z軸亦水平延伸。 在此位置中’當手電筒2300繞手電筒2300之縱軸向左或向 右旋轉至不同定向時,隨著在X及Y軸上之加速度之量值 在旋轉期間改變,關於X及Y之重力資訊可分別經由X- VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036發送至控制器1030以判定手電 筒2300之定向。換言之,可判定手電筒2300之定向。 亦可價測手電筒2300之相對角旋轉。當水平定位手電筒 2300時’ Z軸亦水平延伸。在此位置中,當X及γ繞手電筒 2300之縱轴向左或向右旋轉時,隨著在X及γ軸上之加速 度之量值在旋轉期間改變,關於X及Y之重力資訊可分別 145907.doc -124- 201038127 經由X-VOUT 1038及γ-νουτ 1036發送至控制器1030。相 對角旋轉可由控制器1030計算。控制器1〇30可使用X-VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036上之資訊以判定是否存在繞手 電筒2300之縱轴之旋轉。 在較佳實施例中,用於手電筒之開關可位於開關及尾部 帽蓋總成2106中。在此配置中,X及γ軸之起始定向未 知,因此可基於在起始定向中在X及γ軸上之地球重力場lead. S In other embodiments, the icon 2180 can be placed beyond the circumference of the trailing cap 237〇. For example, the icon 2180 can be placed on the outer circumference of the middle of the tail cap 2370. In other embodiments, more or less than five icons may be used depending on the number of desired functional modes. Since the icon 218 is preferably engraved on the circumference 2371 of the tail cap 237A in this embodiment, the keying member between the upper switch housing 2360 and the board 145907.doc-120·201038127 is used for holding. The orientation of the board 2348 relative to the laser-engraved icon 2180. Alternatively, if a keyed component is not used, a calibration routine can be performed to align the icon with the board 23. If this is the case, calibration can be performed during manufacturing. If unintentional rotation occurs after fabrication, a program can be executed by the board 2348 to realign the icon with the board 2348. Figure 32 is a block diagram showing the circuit for the flashlight 23A. The circuit package includes a power supply 2330, a light source 2128, and a circuit board 2348. The circuit board 2348 can include a voltage regulator circuit and interface 1〇〇4, a load switch circuit 1006, a controller circuit 1008, and an accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇. Circuit board 2348 can also include an audio interface and speaker 518 and vibrator 52A. This situation may be desirable, for example, in situations where an audible or tactile response is responsive to the entry of a command (such as the selection of one or more modes as described below). Instead of placing the audio interface and speaker 518 and vibrator 520 on circuit board 23 48, one or both of them can be positioned off-board. The audio interface and speaker 518 and/or vibrator 520 need not be mounted on circuit board 2348 but may be included elsewhere in flashlight 300. Circuit board 2348 can include an I/O pad to engage an external device. The i/〇塾 can include top +4.5VDC 1012, bottom +4.5VDC 1014, GND 1016, LED_OUT 1018 and SWITCH 1020. Referring also to Fig. 30C, the I/O pad top + 4.5 VDC 1012 and GND 1016 can be coupled to the center contact 451 and the outer contact 434 of the battery case 2330, respectively. The bottom of the I/O pad +4.5 VDC 1014 and the SWITCH 1020 can be coupled to the buckle cover 152. When the user presses on the switch 埠 seal 16 8 , the actuation 145907.doc - 121 · 201038127 354 can be pushed forward to engage the buckle 152 to close the switch between the SWITCH 1020 and the +4 5VDc 1014. When the user releases the switch 埠 seal 168, the switch is opened and the SWITCH 1020 is no longer coupled to +4.5 VDC 1014. A detailed circuit schematic of an embodiment of circuit board 2348 is shown in Figures 33A-33D. FIG. 33A shows a circuit diagram of a preferred voltage regulator circuit 1004. The voltage regulator circuit 1004 can include a low dropout regulator 1〇〇2 that can be implemented by a DC linear voltage regulator operating with a small input-output differential voltage. The wei wire 1022 is an output from two diodes 1024, 1026 that can be driven by signal lines SWITCH 1020 and SW-ON 1046, respectively. This level preferably allows the lower voltage regulator from the signal line SWITCH 1020 or SW-ON 1046 to enable the low dropout regulator 1002. In the preferred embodiment, the output of the low dropout regulator 1 〇〇2 can be set to +3.3V 1028 for use as a source for other components such as controller circuit 1〇〇8. In one embodiment, a commercially available stand-alone LDO regulator (e.g., ISL9003AIRUNZ manufactured by Intersil Coperation) can be used. It should be understood that other types of linear regulator circuits can also be employed. The power supply voltage level from the battery (ie, +4.5 乂〇 (: 1012) can be monitored by the controller circuit 1008 via the signal line ADC_VBAT 1032. The signal line is input to 0 (: _¥8 八 1'1032 can be divided by a voltage divider + 4.5¥0 (:1012 is generated. The I/O pad SWiTCH 1020 can be used to generate the signal MOM 1048 for transmission to the controller circuit 1008 as an indication that the user is pressing on the switch 埠 seal 168 when the MOM 1048 is low. MOM 1048 It can be generated by an NPN bipolar transistor 1052. 145907.doc -122- 201038127 Figure 3 3B is a circuit diagram of a preferred controller circuit 1008. The controller circuit 1008 can include a controller 1030 having input and output connections. Input signals are received via signal lines ADC_VBAT 1032, Z-VOUT 1034, γ_VOUT 1036, X-VOUT 1038, SCK 1040, MISO 1042, MOM 1048, and RESET 1050. Controller 1030 can also be delivered via signal lines LOAD_ENABLE 1044 and SW_ON 1046 The signal is output. The power supply to the controller 1030 can be supported by a +3.3 V 1028 power supply. In one embodiment, the controller 1030 is a market controller with embedded memory, such as ATtiny 24, which is by Atmel Corporati. In another embodiment, the controller 1〇3〇 can be a microprocessor. In other embodiments, the controller 1030 can be a discrete circuit. Those skilled in the art should understand that Other types of controller circuits can also be used.Figure 33C shows a circuit diagram of a preferred load switching circuit 1〇〇6. In the embodiment of Figure 33C, the load switch can be implemented by NMOS 1054. The source coupling of PM〇s 1054 Connected to the top GND 1016' and the NMOS 1054 and q poles can be coupled to LED_OUT 1018. The gate of NMOS 1054 can be connected to LOAD_ENABLE 1044. Power can flow from LED_OUT 1 018 to GND 10 16 to form a switchable The part of the circuit of the current of the lamp module 2128. * Those skilled in the art should understand that other types of drivers and load switch circuits can be used. Figure 3 3D shows a schematic diagram of a preferred accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇. The accelerometer circuit 1010 can include outputs Z-VOUT 1034, Y-VOUT 1036, and χ_VOUT 1038, which can also be coupled to the controller circuit 1008 for further processing by 145907.doc -123. 201038127. Accelerometer circuit 1010 preferably includes an inertial sensor 1 〇 58 that can receive information from its internal sensing component and can provide an analog signal based on measurements from internal sensing components. The inertial sensor 1058 can be used to condition the earth's static gravitational field by providing acceleration information on, for example, three axes of mutually orthogonal axes (i.e., X, 丫, and z). The 3-axis accelerometer circuit 101 has a power supply VDD that can be supported by a +3.3V 1028 power supply. If the Z axis of the t-beat sensor 1 〇 58 points to the center of the earth, X and γ will have acceleration zero. However, due to the gravity of the Earth, Z will experience an acceleration rate of _1G. If the inertial sensor 1058 is flipped 18 turns. So that Z is facing away from the Earth, then χ and Y will remain at zero, but Z will have an acceleration of +1G. The inertial sensor 1 〇 58 can be attached to the circuit board 2348 such that the X, Y, and Z axes are fixed relative to the flashlight 2300. In the preferred embodiment, the inertial sensor 1058 is oriented on the plate 2348 such that the z-axis extends along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 2300. Thus, when the flashlight 2300 is positioned horizontally, the Z axis also extends horizontally. In this position, 'when the flashlight 2300 is rotated left or right around the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 2300 to a different orientation, as the magnitude of the acceleration on the X and Y axes changes during rotation, the gravity information about X and Y The controller 1030 can be sent to the controller 1030 via X-VOUT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036, respectively, to determine the orientation of the flashlight 2300. In other words, the orientation of the flashlight 2300 can be determined. The relative angular rotation of the flashlight 2300 can also be measured. When the flashlight 2300 is positioned horizontally, the 'Z axis' also extends horizontally. In this position, when X and γ are rotated left or right around the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 2300, as the magnitude of the acceleration on the X and γ axes changes during the rotation, the gravity information about X and Y can be respectively 145907.doc -124- 201038127 is sent to controller 1030 via X-VOUT 1038 and γ-νουτ 1036. The relative angular rotation can be calculated by controller 1030. Controller 1〇30 can use information on X-VOUT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 to determine if there is a rotation about the longitudinal axis of flashlight 2300. In the preferred embodiment, the switch for the flashlight can be located in the switch and tail cap assembly 2106. In this configuration, the initial orientation of the X and γ axes is unknown, so it can be based on the Earth's gravitational field on the X and γ axes in the initial orientation.
計算起始值。一旦建立其起始定向,可進行後續角量測以 追縱手電筒2300之旋轉。 較佳的是,手電筒2300大致水平地定位以供使用者在旋 轉時獲得較高解析度(亦即,X及γ軸之旋轉之較好感測)。 當Ζ軸相對於水平方向傾斜較遠時,.可發生旋轉誤差。在 操作中,較佳的疋,手電筒2300相對於水平方向固持至一 角度。若傾斜大於30。,則較佳的是,監視ζ軸且忽略旋轉 輸入直至手電筒2300傾斜回+/· 3〇。窗内為止。然而,在不 同實施例中,上文角度可減小或增加。 在較佳實施財,慣性感測Β1㈣可為市售微機電系統 _MS),例如,LIS394AL,其為由灯製 &之3軸加速计。$習此項技術者應瞭解,亦可採用其他 類型之慣性感測器電路。 燈模組2128上之可變亮度可藉由以高於人眼可制之頻 率的頻率改變燈模組2128上之作用時間循環來判定。燈模 組2128上之作用時間循環可由負載開關電路祕之輸出上 之尚狀態及低狀態的序列產生,豸貞載_電路屬之輸 145907.doc -125· 201038127 出可由控制器刪與其他組件一起驅動。若導電之時間週 期較長,則燈模組2128較亮。另一方面,若導電之時間週 期較短,則燈模組2128較暗。 燈模組2128上之可變閃爍速率亦 <干』蜡由以由人眼可偵測 之頻率改變燈模組2128上之作用拄& (作用蚪間循環來判定。支援可 變閃爍速率之電路可與支援先前 夂伖无則所插述之可變亮度之電路 相同。 作為組合,燈餘2128上具村變亮度^卿式或且 有可變亮度之閃爍光可藉由以由人眼可_之頻率形成燈 模組2128上之作用時間循環來基 傾衣采產生。在低循環期間,燈模 組2128切斷’而在高循環期間’燈模組2128可具有且高於 人眼可债測之頻率的頻率之作用時間循環。換言之^低 頻率作用時間循環之高週期内存在高頻率作用時間循環: 此功能可由控制器1008執行。 如上所指示’較佳的是’手電筒测可在多種模式中摔 作。現進-步論述此等模式之操作及存取。圖34為說明手 電筒細可存取且執行各種模式之較佳操作方式助的流 程圖。 當手電筒2則被切斷27()4時,電路板2348仍可由電池盒 2330供電。因此,手電筒23_續監視手電筒2300之位^ 及運動同時_瞬時開關2168之位置。若開關2168被壓下 27〇6,則手電筒23GG在正常模式中接通2708。 田手^•同2300在正常模式中接通謂㈣,可自記憶體 2710載人預设強度資訊以供控制器提供控制信號來控 145907.doc -126, 201038127 制燈模組⑽上之亮度。在較佳實施例中,記憶體可職 入於控制器刪中之EE_。預設強纟資訊彳為在切斷 手電筒23GG之前的最後使用強度。或者,預設強度資訊可 為預定設定(例如,最大強度)。其他強度可為預定的。 在自記憶體2710載入預設強度資訊之後,若手電筒23〇〇 在接通時未固持在水平位置中或若開關168未被持續壓下 歷時多於預定時段的時段2712,則手電筒23〇〇在正常模式 ❹ 中繼續2714。在一實施例中,預定時段為一秒。可使用其 他時段。在此階段,手電筒2300用作具有穩定亮度之正常 手電筒且可在第二次壓下開關168時切斷。 另一方面,若手電筒2300在切斷時固持在水平位置中同 時開關168被持續壓下歷時多於預定時段的時段^?,則 手電筒2300可進入至新操作模式中。 可將新操作模式指定為以下實例中之任一者:具有可變 亮度之暗光(DIM)、具有可變閃爍頻率之閃爍光 〇 (STROBE)、具有可變亮度之SOS模式(sos)、運動敏感信 號模式(SIGNAL)或夜燈模式(NITE LITE)。新操作模式由 • 與新模式相關聯的圖符判定。若特定圖符面向上或朝12點 鐘方向,同時開關168被持續壓下168歷時多於預定時段的 •時段2712且手電筒2300在接通時固持在水平位置中,則選 擇與特定圖符相關聯的模式2716。 舉例而言,若如圖3 1B中所示DIM圖符2370a面向上,則 在步驟2716之後,選擇DIM功能模式。另一方面,舉例而 。,若SOS圖符2370c面向上,則在步驟2716之後,選擇 145907.doc -127- 201038127 SOS功能模式。此介面簡化使用者之模式選擇程序。任何 模式可It由使所要模式相關聯圖符面向預定義位置來直接 選擇以使得使用者不需要猜測或記住操作序列。 §手電同2300進入新功能模式2718時,可自記憶體2710 載入預設強度資訊以供控制器1〇08提供控制信號來控制燈 . 模組2128上之壳度。預設強度資訊可為在切斷手電筒23 之前的最後使用強度。或者,預設強度資訊可為預定設定 (例如,最大強度)。其他強度可為預定的。 在本貫施例中,在當前模式為DIM模式、str〇be模 0 式、SOS模式或SIGNAL模式時,在切斷手電筒23〇〇之前 的最後使用強度用作預設強度。另一方面,若當前模式為 NITE LITE模式,則最大強度用作預設強度。 此刻,若開關168被釋放2720,則手電筒23〇〇將以預設 強度設定在當前功能模式繼續2722直至手電筒23〇〇由指定 方法切斷為止。舉例而言’ Μ下且接著釋放開關168, 則手電筒2300可將此序列辨識為關斷命令且手電筒以⑽將 被切斷。 〇 右手電筒2300繞其投射主軸2310向左或向右旋轉2724同 時開關168仍被持續壓下272() ’則旋轉量可由控制器刪 計算且執行調整2 7 2 6。舉例而言,若當前操作模式為刪 模式’則手電筒2300之亮度可基於所計算之旋轉量來變化 · 2726。另一方面,若當前操作模式為str〇be模式,則作 用時間循環之頻率可基於所計算之旋轉量來變化㈣。 在較佳實施財,在旋轉手電筒23〇〇之前,將手電筒亮 145907.doc -128- 201038127 度設定為儲存於記憶體中之強度資訊。當手電筒2300向左 或向右%轉10日f ’若當前操作模式為模式、模式 或SIGNAL模式,則將手電筒亮度設定為最大值。而當手 電筒2300向左或向右旋轉45。及45。以上時,將手電筒亮度 設定為最小值。換言之,當手電筒2300自10。向左或向右 •旋轉至45。時,手電筒亮度可自最大值至最小值線性地改 變。 ❹ *田月;操作模式為STROBE模式,則當手電筒2300向左 或向右旋轉10。時,將手電筒頻率設定為最大值。而當手 電筒2300向左或向右旋轉“。及45。以上時,將手電筒頻率 設定為最小值。換言之,當手電筒23〇〇自1〇。向左或向右 旋轉至45。時,手電筒頻率可自最大值至最小值線性地改 變。 因為模式選擇係基於起動時之圖符位置,所以沿手電筒 2300之投射主軸旋轉筒身僅用於模式調整。因此,調整可 〇 #由向左旋轉或向右旋轉來執行。模式之調整為對稱的且 跨越縱向穿過手電筒2300之投射主轴2310之虛擬垂直面鏡 射,因此,此特徵幫助具有慣用左手或慣用右手偏好之使 用者。 •在本實施例中,最大亮度藉由將具有100%作用時間循 %之脈衝電流提供至燈模組2128來執行且最小亮度具有 5%之作用時間循環。 若發現適當亮度(用於DIM、s〇s或SIGNAL模式)或頻率 (用於STROBE模式)同時手電筒23〇〇向左或向右旋轉 145907.doc -129· 201038127 2724,則開關168可被釋放2728且此時存在之亮度或頻率 可儲存於s己憶體中且執行選定模式功能273〇。手電筒 可留存此亮度或頻率位準直至下一次儲存新設定為止。 另一方面’若開關168被釋放2728且當前模式為signal 楔式,則運動敏感信號操作可藉由偵測是否存在沿手電筒 23 00之技射主軸23 1〇之向左或向右旋轉來執行273〇。若偵 測到旋轉,則可接通手電筒23〇〇。若手電筒23〇〇返回至先 前位置,則可切斷手電筒2300。換言之,手電筒23〇〇可藉 由將其向左或向右旋轉且接著將其旋轉回而在接通與切斷 之間雙態切換。 手電筒2300可藉由指定方法切斷2734。舉例而言,若壓 下且接著釋放開關168,則手電筒2300可將此序列辨識為 關斷命令2732且手電筒2300將被切斷2734。 热習此項技術者應瞭解,圖14中所說明之流程圖7〇2為 實例,且亦可採用其他類型之操作。 圖34中所示之操作流程27〇2可由儲存於控制器1〇〇8之記 憶體中之軟體實施。因此,可程式化控制器1〇〇8以基於自 3軸加速計電路1010之輸出接收之信號來控制操作序列。 當控制器1008自加速計電路1010之輸出χ_ν〇υτ 1〇38及γ_ VOUT 1036接收資訊時,控制器1〇〇8可基於此資訊來改變 其執行序列。 亦了程式化控制器1〇〇8以基於自加速計電路1〇1〇之輸出 接收之信號控制穿過燈模組2128之電力流。當控制哭1〇 自χ-ν〇υτ腦及MT1GW_,編囊 145907.doc •130- 201038127 可基於儲存於控制器1008中 號中之一些。 之軟體之執行來改變其輪出 信 可引起加速計電路1010之輸出之改變的手電筒測之直 他類型之移動亦可用作手電筒23〇〇改變特徵之命令。因 此,本發料限於㈣與控制器咖介接之本文中所描述 之移動。Calculate the starting value. Once the initial orientation is established, a subsequent angular measurement can be performed to track the rotation of the flashlight 2300. Preferably, the flashlight 2300 is positioned generally horizontally for the user to obtain a higher resolution (i.e., better sensing of the rotation of the X and gamma axes) when rotated. When the Ζ axis is inclined farther from the horizontal direction, a rotation error may occur. In operation, preferably, the flashlight 2300 is held at an angle relative to the horizontal. If the tilt is greater than 30. Preferably, the axis is monitored and the rotation input is ignored until the flashlight 2300 is tilted back to +/·3〇. Up to the window. However, in various embodiments, the above angles may be reduced or increased. In a preferred implementation, the inertial sensing Β 1 (4) may be a commercially available MEMS (MS), for example, LIS 394 AL, which is a 3-axis accelerometer made of a lamp & It should be understood by those skilled in the art that other types of inertial sensor circuits can also be used. The variable brightness on the lamp module 2128 can be determined by varying the duty cycle on the lamp module 2128 at a frequency that is higher than the frequency that can be produced by the human eye. The active time cycle on the lamp module 2128 can be generated by the sequence of the state of the load switch circuit and the state of the low state. The load of the circuit is 145907.doc -125· 201038127 and can be deleted by the controller and other components. Drive together. If the time period of conduction is longer, the light module 2128 is brighter. On the other hand, if the time period of conduction is short, the lamp module 2128 is dark. The variable blink rate on the light module 2128 is also <dry" wax is determined by varying the effect on the light module 2128 at a frequency detectable by the human eye. The circuit can be the same as the circuit that supports the variable brightness that was previously inserted. As a combination, the flashing light with a brightness of 2128 on the lamp or a variable brightness can be used by the person. The frequency of the eye can form a duty cycle on the lamp module 2128 for the base to be produced. During the low cycle, the lamp module 2128 is turned off 'while during the high cycle' the lamp module 2128 can have and exceed the person The frequency of the frequency of the frequency of the debt can be measured. In other words, the high frequency of the low frequency action time cycle is present in the high frequency action time cycle: this function can be performed by the controller 1008. As indicated above, the 'better' is the flashlight test. It can be dropped in a variety of modes. The operation and access of these modes are discussed in a step-by-step manner. Figure 34 is a flow chart illustrating the preferred operation of the flashlight with fine accessibility and execution of various modes. When cutting off 27() 4, The circuit board 2348 can still be powered by the battery case 2330. Therefore, the flashlight 23_ continues to monitor the position of the flashlight 2300 and the position of the simultaneous _ momentary switch 2168. If the switch 2168 is depressed 27 〇 6, the flashlight 23GG is connected in the normal mode. Pass 2708. Tian hand ^• with 2300 in the normal mode is connected to the fourth (four), from the memory 2710 manned preset strength information for the controller to provide control signals to control 145907.doc -126, 201038127 lighting module (10) In the preferred embodiment, the memory can be used in the EE_ deleted by the controller. The preset strong information is the last used intensity before the flashlight 23GG is cut. Alternatively, the preset intensity information can be Predetermined setting (eg, maximum intensity). Other intensities may be predetermined. After loading the preset intensity information from the memory 2710, if the flashlight 23 is not held in the horizontal position when the switch is turned on or if the switch 168 is not The period 2312, which lasts more than the predetermined period of time, is continuously depressed, and the flashlight 23 continues in the normal mode 27 2714. In an embodiment, the predetermined period of time is one second. Other periods may be used. At this stage, the flashlight 23 00 is used as a normal flashlight with stable brightness and can be turned off when the switch 168 is pressed a second time. On the other hand, if the flashlight 2300 is held in the horizontal position when it is turned off, the switch 168 is continuously pressed for more than the predetermined time. The time period ^?, the flashlight 2300 can enter the new operating mode. The new operating mode can be specified as any of the following examples: dim light with variable brightness (DIM), flicker with variable flicker frequency STROBE, SOS mode with variable brightness (sos), motion sensitive signal mode (SIGNAL) or night light mode (NITE LITE). The new operating mode is determined by • the icon associated with the new mode. Selecting a particular icon is associated if the particular icon is facing up or toward the 12 o'clock direction while the switch 168 is continuously depressed 168 for more than a predetermined period of time period 2712 and the flashlight 2300 is held in the horizontal position when it is turned "on" Union mode 2716. For example, if the DIM icon 2370a faces up as shown in Figure 31B, then after step 2716, the DIM function mode is selected. On the other hand, for example. If the SOS icon 2370c faces up, after step 2716, select the 145907.doc -127- 201038127 SOS function mode. This interface simplifies the user's mode selection process. Any mode can be directly selected by having the desired mode associated icon face a predefined location so that the user does not need to guess or remember the sequence of operations. § When the flashlight enters the new function mode 2718 with the 2300, the preset intensity information can be loaded from the memory 2710 for the controller 1 to provide a control signal to control the lamp. The shell on the module 2128. The preset intensity information may be the last used intensity before the flashlight 23 is cut. Alternatively, the preset intensity information may be a predetermined setting (e.g., maximum intensity). Other strengths may be predetermined. In the present embodiment, when the current mode is the DIM mode, the str〇be mode, the SOS mode, or the SIGNAL mode, the last use intensity before the flashlight 23 is turned off is used as the preset intensity. On the other hand, if the current mode is NITE LITE mode, the maximum intensity is used as the preset intensity. At this point, if the switch 168 is released 2720, the flashlight 23 will be set at the preset intensity in the current functional mode to continue 2722 until the flashlight 23 is turned off by the specified method. For example, by squatting and then releasing switch 168, flashlight 2300 can recognize this sequence as a shutdown command and the flashlight will be severed at (10).右 The right flashlight 2300 rotates left or right around its projection spindle 2310 by 2724 and the switch 168 is still depressed 272()'. The amount of rotation can be calculated by the controller and the adjustment 2 7 2 6 is performed. For example, if the current mode of operation is a delete mode', the brightness of the flashlight 2300 can be varied based on the calculated amount of rotation. On the other hand, if the current mode of operation is str〇be mode, the frequency of the time loop can be varied based on the calculated amount of rotation (4). In a preferred implementation, the flashlight is illuminated 145907.doc -128 - 201038127 degrees to the intensity information stored in the memory before the flashlight 23 is rotated. When the flashlight 2300 is turned left or right by 10 days f ′ If the current operation mode is mode, mode or SIGNAL mode, the flashlight brightness is set to the maximum value. And when the flashlight 2300 is rotated 45 to the left or right. And 45. In the above case, set the brightness of the flashlight to the minimum value. In other words, when the flashlight 2300 is from 10. Left or right • Rotate to 45. The flashlight brightness can be changed linearly from maximum to minimum. ❹ *Tian Yue; when the operation mode is STROBE mode, the flashlight 2300 is rotated 10 to the left or right. Set the flashlight frequency to the maximum value. When the flashlight 2300 is rotated to the left or right by ". and 45. or more, the flashlight frequency is set to a minimum value. In other words, when the flashlight 23 is turned from 1 〇. Turn left or right to 45. When the flashlight frequency It can be changed linearly from the maximum value to the minimum value. Because the mode selection is based on the icon position at start-up, the rotating spindle along the projection spindle of the flashlight 2300 is only used for mode adjustment. Therefore, the adjustment can be rotated to the left or Rotating to the right is performed. The mode is adjusted to be symmetrical and mirrored across the virtual vertical plane of the projection spindle 2310 longitudinally across the flashlight 2300, thus, this feature helps users with left-handed or right-handed preferences. In the example, the maximum brightness is performed by providing a pulse current having 100% of the action time to the lamp module 2128 and the minimum brightness is 5% of the action time cycle. If appropriate brightness is found (for DIM, s〇s or SIGNAL mode) or frequency (for STROBE mode) while the flashlight 23 is rotated 145907.doc -129· 201038127 2724 to the left or right, the switch 168 can be released 2728 and The brightness or frequency present may be stored in the suffix and the selected mode function 273 〇. The flashlight may retain the brightness or frequency level until the next time the new setting is stored. On the other hand 'if switch 168 is released 2728 and The current mode is a signal wedge, and the motion sensitive signal operation can be performed by detecting whether there is a left or right rotation of the technical spindle 23 1 手 along the flashlight 23 00. If the rotation is detected, The flashlight 23 is turned on. If the flashlight 23 is returned to the previous position, the flashlight 2300 can be turned off. In other words, the flashlight 23 can be connected by rotating it to the left or right and then rotating it back. The two-state switching between the pass and the cut. The flashlight 2300 can be cut 2734 by a specified method. For example, if the switch 168 is depressed and then released, the flashlight 2300 can recognize this sequence as the shutdown command 2732 and the flashlight 2300 Will be cut off 2734. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the flow chart 7〇2 illustrated in Figure 14 is an example and other types of operations may be employed. The operational flow 27〇2 shown in Figure 34 may be The software stored in the memory of the controller 1〇〇8 is implemented. Thus, the programmable controller 1〇〇8 controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of the 3-axis accelerometer circuit 1010. When the controller 1008 When the outputs χ_ν〇υτ 1〇38 and γ_VOUT 1036 of the accelerometer circuit 1010 receive information, the controller 1〇〇8 can change its execution sequence based on this information. Also, the stylized controller 1〇〇8 is based on self- The signal received by the output of the accelerometer circuit 1控制 controls the power flow through the lamp module 2128. When the control is crying 1〇自χ-ν〇υτ brain and MT1GW_, the capsule 145907.doc •130- 201038127 can be stored based on Some of the numbers in the controller 1008. The execution of the software to change its round-trip signal can cause a change in the output of the accelerometer circuit 1010. The type of movement can also be used as a command to change the characteristics of the flashlight 23〇〇. Accordingly, the present disclosure is limited to (iv) the movement described herein in connection with the controller coffee.
圖35為說明用於在夜燈操作模式中操作手電筒·之方 法1110的流程W。比圖⑽所提供之方法詳細地展示用於 在夜燈操作模式中操作手電筒2300之圖35中所示之方法 1110。當選擇夜燈模式時,步驟9G2因此對應於圖34中之 步驟2718。當手電筒2300在步驟902中進入夜燈模式時, 控制器1GG8較佳經組態以使得手電筒23⑽之光源最初以怪 疋7C度提供光。 在手電筒2300在步驟9〇2中進入夜燈模式之後,在步驟 1912中’彳程式化控制器⑽8以將命令輸出至負載開關 1006、音讯介面及揚聲器518及/或振動器520以提供已選 擇且進入夜燈模式之視覺、音訊及/或觸覺提示。步驟 1912中所提供之此提示為有利的,因為在本實施例中,在 缺乏此提示時,在計時器在步驟19〇8期滿之前光源之亮度 中將不存在直接操作改變。因此,在步驟1912中提供視 覺、音讯或觸覺提示將向使用者通知夜燈模式之選擇且較 々使用者滿意地利用該手電筒2300。 視覺提示可為手電筒切斷及接著再次接通之簡單閃光。 或者’其可為一系列兩個或兩個以上之閃光。為了在步驟 145907.doc -131 - 201038127 1912中提供音訊提示’除視覺提示以外或代替視覺提示, 可程式化控制器1008以經由音訊介面及揚聲器518(見圖Μ) 輸出某序狀,聲或提供不同音調之,聲,該音訊介面及 揚聲器518與控制器ι_通信。另—方面,觸覺提示可經 由振動器520(見圖32)來提供,該振動器52〇與控制器忉⑽ 通信。 一旦在步驟1912中執行視覺、音訊或觸覺提示,則可在 步驟1904中重6又且開始計時器。計時器用於判定在手電筒 開始變暗之前的時段。較佳地’每當預定義量值之碰撞由 控制器1008基於來自加速計1〇1〇之一或多個輸入感測到 時,便重設計時器,以使得在步驟9〇2中進入夜燈模式之 後,僅在手電筒2300保持靜止歷時預定義之預設時段(諸 如,15或30秒)後方允許計時器期滿且光源1〇1之亮度變 暗。因此,只要手電筒繼續以足夠力來回移動以引起加速 度之必要改變,則手電筒23〇〇將不變暗。 在某些實施例中,可需要允許使用者將額外時間添加至 计時器,藉此延長穿過步驟1908所需的時間量而不需要控 制器1008感測足夠量值之加速度以在步驟1916中使光源 101之冗度變暗。在圖32中所示之實施例中,程式化控制 器1008以容許使用者調整計時器。在所說明之實施例中, 一旦在步驟902中進入夜燈模式,使用者便可在其不釋放 瞬時開關的情況下調整計時器。另一方面,一旦使用者釋 放瞬時開關’則其不再可調整計時器。 在較佳實施例中,在步驟1904中最初設定計時器在30秒 145907.doc -132- 201038127 之時段内期滿。若在進入夜燈模式之後的任何時間釋放瞬 時開關168而不調整計時器,則控制器1〇〇8將簡單地在步 驟1916中使光源ίο!之亮度變暗之前在步驟19〇8中等待計 時器在預6又時段流逝之後期滿。然而,如上所註明,較佳 每當控制器1008感測到手電筒23〇〇以足夠力移動時便重設 • 计時态。其繼續至步驟1908以使計時器期滿。 另一方面,若控制器在步驟272〇中判定未釋放瞬時開關 0 168,則使用者可調整計時器之預設時段,藉此在步驟916 中光源101之冗度變暗之前在無移動的情況下延遲必須流 逝之時段。舉例而言,在所說明之實施例中,若在步驟 2724中’控制器丨刪判定手電筒2則已繞其投射絲31〇 7左或向右旋轉同時瞬時開關168已被持續壓下,則旋轉 量可2控制器1008計算且計時器19〇6基於該旋轉量來調 正。每當手電筒2300向左或向右旋轉且接著旋轉回中央 時,計時器可逐漸增加(例如}1 5秒或3〇秒。換言之,若額 〇 外等待時間為所要的,則可重複步驟2724、1906,只要在 步驟2728中判定瞬時開關保持壓下。 . 旦計時器已增加所要量’則使用者可釋放瞬時開關。 當在步驟2728中偵測到瞬時開關之釋放時,計時器將開始 •難直至在步驟歷中判定其已期滿為止。如前所述較 =每當偵測到足夠量之力時便重設計時器(現重設至經調 整之計時器預設定)以致容許計時器僅在手電筒保持靜止 (或相對靜止)歷時經調整之時段之情況下期滿。 雖然》十時②較佳對於每—向左或向右旋轉僅調整^秒至 145907.doc -133- 201038127 3〇秒^目對小時段,但計時器可在步驟⑽中逐漸增加了 任何量,包括(例如)〗分鐘或5分鐘之時段。 作為每田手電筒向左或左右旋轉時便在步驟_中將計 時器調整了遞增量之替代’在步驟19〇6中所執行之計時器 調整亦可基於手電筒2鳩之旋轉量來執行。舉例而言,計 時器可在手電筒旋轉至少15。且小於3〇。時增加15秒且在 手電筒2300向左或向右旋轉3〇。或3〇。以上時增加3時、。在 2他實施方案中,可使用其他時間或角度。舉例而言計 4器可在手電筒2300向左或向右旋轉至少15。且小於%。時 增加額外五分鐘且計時器可在手電筒测向左或向右旋轉 30°或30°以上時增加額外十分鐘。 在另實施方案中,當在步驟1906中增加計時器時提供 視覺、音訊或觸覺提示。較佳地,提示對應於添加至計時 器之時間量或計時器之經調整時段,以使得該使用者知曉 計時器已增加多少。 一旦計時器在步驟1908中期滿,則手電筒23〇〇之光源 1〇1之亮度可在步驟1916中減小。在本實施例中,手電筒 2300之光源1〇1可逐漸變暗直至達到其最低亮度。在另一 實施例中,手電筒23〇〇之光源1〇1可逐漸變暗直至最終其 完全切斷。 —旦手電筒2300在步驟1916中已變暗,則其可持續提供 最低(或其他預設)亮度直至手電筒23 〇〇在步驟1918中债測 到碰撞為止,此時’手電筒2300之亮度可增加至儲存於記 憶體中之亮度位準1920。在本實施例中,將手電筒23〇〇之 145907.doc •134- 201038127 光源1(H之亮度設定至先前已由使用者自暗淡模式儲存於 記憶體中之亮度位準。然而,在其他實施例中’可將手電 筒2300之光源101之亮度簡單地調整至其最高亮度位準。 . 一旦売度已在步驟1920中增加,在步驟1906中將調整計時 器,則在步驟1910中將計時器重設至經調整之時段或重設 至預汉時奴。例行程序接著返固至步驟272〇且接著至步驟 1908,其中控制器1008監視重設計時器是否已期滿。且, 0 較佳每當偵測到足夠量值之移動時便重設計時器以使得手 電筒2300之光源1〇1之亮度僅在手電筒23〇〇保持靜止或不 夠快速地移動時變暗。 如先δ圖32及圖33D所描述,加速計電路1〇1〇具有 亦可耦接至控制器電路1008之輸出。加速計電路1〇1〇可安 裝於電路板2348上,其中,其ζ軸沿手電筒23〇〇之縱軸延 伸。§手電筒2300在水平位置中時,若手電筒23〇〇繞其縱 軸310順時針或逆時針旋轉,則可改變又及丫軸上之加速度 〇 之量值,且可將關於χ及υ之重力資訊分別經由χ-νουτ 1038及Y-VOUT 1036發送至控制器ι008。控制器1〇〇8可使 用來自X-VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036之資訊以判定是否存 在繞手電筒2300之縱軸31〇之旋轉。當手電筒23〇〇在水平 位置中時,若手電筒23〇〇向上傾斜約45。,則Ζ軸上之加速 度之里值將改變’且關於Ζ之重力資訊可經由ζ_ν〇υτ 1034發送至控制器1〇〇8。控制器1〇〇8可使用來自 1034之資訊以判定是否存在手電筒23〇〇之向上傾斜及是否 需要額外等待時間。手電筒23〇〇可偵測碰撞或滾動(或χ_ 145907.doc •135- 201038127 ¥011丁 103 8及丫-¥0111: 103 6上之資訊改變)且使用此資訊以 判定手電筒2300是否應保持為夜燈。 燈模組2128上之亮度可藉由將燈模組2128上之作用時間 循環改變至高於人眼可偵測之頻率的頻率來判定。燈模組 2128上之作用時間循環可由LOAD_ENABLE 1044信號上之 高狀態及低狀態之序列產生,該LOAD_ENABLE 1044信號 由控制器1008驅動。信號LOAD_ENABLE 1044上之高狀態 及低狀態之此序列以及負載電路徑上之其他分量可使 NMOS 1054交替導電及不導電。當每一循環中之導電時間 之百分比在100%時,燈模組2128將處於其最高亮度。另 一方面,當每一循環中之導電時間之百分比接近〇%時, 燈模組2128將處於其最低亮度。 圖35中所示之操作流程900可由儲存於控制器1008之記 憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器1008以基於自加速計 電路1010之輸出接收之信號控制操作序列。當控制器1008 自加速計電路1010之X-VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036接收資 訊時,控制器1008可基於該資訊改變其執行序列。 亦可程式化控制器1008以基於自加速計電路1010之輸出 接收之信號控制穿過燈模組2128之電力流。當控制器1008 自X-VOUT 1038及Y-VOUT 1036接收資訊時,控制器1008 可基於儲存於控制器1008中之軟體之執行改變其輸出信號 中之一些0 圖36A及圖36B說明手電筒2300之鎖定特徵之流程圖 1145、1162。在手電筒2300被切斷1146之後,可在某些條 145907.doc -136- 201038127 件下(諸如’在儲存於錢包、手套箱或工具箱中之手電筒 2300之移動的條件下)意外地按下開關丨6^開關之意 外按下可接通手電筒2300且電力將損失。 鎖疋特徵1145、1162將藉由對手電筒2300執行操作序列 以進入至鎖定模式中而防止手電筒23〇〇之意外接通。一旦 手電筒2300在鎖定模式中,則將忽略開關168上之所有後 續按壓直至執行另一操作序列以使手電筒23〇〇解除鎖定為 止0 ❹ — 鎖疋特徵1145在步驟1146處開始。若手電筒2300被接通 當投射主軸310在大體上垂直方向上指向上1148繼之以在 大體上垂直方向上指向下同時開關】6 8被持續壓下1〗5 〇, 則手電筒2300將該序列解譯為鎖定之命令。在本實施例 中,一旦開關168被釋放1152,則手電筒2300確認鎖定命 令1154且進入至鎖定模式中1156。接著完成進入鎖定模式 1145之操作ι158。而在另一實施例中,一旦開關ι68被釋 〇 放1152 ’則手電筒2300可在不確認鎖定命令U54的情況下 直接進入至鎖定模式中1156。 在本實施例中,手電筒2300藉由進行閃爍來確認鎖定命 令Π54。或者,手電筒23〇〇可藉由除視覺回應以外或代替 : 視覺回應提供聽覺或觸覺回應來確認鎖定命令115 4。 一旦手電筒23 00被鎖定1156,則退出鎖定模式之唯一方 式為經由退出鎖定模式之操作1162來進行。操作1162在步 驟1160處開始。若投射主軸31〇在大體上垂直方向上指向 上繼之以在大體上垂直方向上指向下1164同時開關168被 145907.doc •137· 201038127 持續壓下1166 ’則手電筒2300將該序列解譯為退出鎖定模 式之命令。一旦開關168被釋放1168,則手電筒23〇〇自鎖 定釋放(或解除鎖定)1170。在本實施例中,手電筒23〇〇確 解除鎖疋狀悲1172且在步驟1174完成退出鎖定模式操作 1162。在另一實施例中,一旦手電筒2300自鎖定釋放(或 : 解除鎖定)1170,則在不執行確認解除鎖定狀態之步驟 - 1172的情況下完成退出鎖定模式之操作1丨62。在一實施例 一旦退出鎖定模式之操作1162完成1174,便隨後接通 手電筒2300。一旦手電筒2300被鎖定1156,則在手電筒 〇 2300接收到解除鎖定命令之前,手電筒23〇〇不可由開關 168上之按壓及釋放序列開啟。 在本實施例中,手電筒2300藉由進行閃爍來確認解除鎖 定命令1172。或者,手電筒2300可藉由除視覺回應以外或 代替視覺回應提供聽覺或觸覺回應來確認解除鎖定命令 1172。 或者’可引起加速計電路1〇1〇之輸出x_v〇UT 1038及Y-VOUT ΙΟ%或Ζ-νουτ 1〇34之改變的手電筒23〇〇之其他類 〇 型的移動亦可用作手電筒2300進入或退出鎖定模式之命 令。 , 圖37為說明手電筒23〇〇之另一鎖定特徵U76之流程圖。 操作在步驟1190處開始。若手電筒2300切斷1178,則在手 電筒2300接收到鎖定命令之前,手電筒23〇〇可由開啟命令 (諸如,開關168上之按壓及釋放序列)開啟,手電筒23〇〇之 光源可開始產生光且手電筒23〇〇可進入至預設使用者操作 145907.doc •138- 201038127 模式中。 若手電筒2 3 0 0切斷丨丨7 8且若開關【6 8以三次按壓且釋放 之序列按壓且釋放1180,則手電筒23〇〇將該序列解譯為鎖 .定之命令。在本實施例中,手電筒23〇〇確認鎖定命令HU 且進入至鎖疋模式中1184。或者,一旦手電筒23〇〇接收到 鎖疋命令,則手電筒23 00可在無確認丨丨82之步驟的情況下 直接進入至鎖定模式中1184。一旦手電筒23 〇〇被鎖定 〇 1184,則在手電筒2300接收到解除鎖定命令之前,手電筒 2300不可由開關168上之按壓及釋放序列開啟。 當手電筒2300被鎖定1184時,若開關168以三次按壓且 釋放之序列按壓且釋放丨i 86,則手電筒23 〇〇將該序列解譯 為解除鎖定或釋放之命令,且手電筒23〇〇隨後解除鎖定 1188且退出鎖定模式1192。在一實施例中’ 一旦完成退出 鎖定模式之操作1192,便隨後接通手電筒2300。 在本實施例中,手電筒2300藉由進行閃爍來確認鎖定命 Q 令1182。或者,手電筒2300可藉由除視覺回應以外或代替 視覺回應提供聽覺或觸覺回應來確認解除鎖定命令丨丨82。 如先前結合圖33D所描述,加速計電路loio可包括可輕 接至控制器電路1〇〇8之輸出χ_ν〇υτ 1038、Y-VOUT 1036 . &Z_V0UT 1034。加速計電路1〇1〇可安裝於電路板2348 上’其中’其Z軸沿手電筒2300之縱軸延伸。當手電筒 2300垂直指向上時,z軸上之加速度之量值將為_1G。當手 電筒23 00垂直指向下時,z軸上之加速度之量值將為 + 1G。可將關於z之重力資訊經由z-VOUT 1034發送至控制 145907.doc •139- 201038127 器 1008 。 控制器1008可使用Z-VOUT 1034上之資訊以判定手電筒 2 3 0 0指向上抑或指向下以判定鎖定是否為所要的。 圖36A及圖36B中所示之操作流程圖U45、1162可由儲 存於控制器1008之記憶體中之軟體實施。可程式化控制器 1008以基於自加速計電路1〇1〇之輪出接收之信號來控制操 作序列。當控制器1008自加速計電路1〇1〇之ζ_ν〇υτ 1〇34Fig. 35 is a flowchart W for explaining a method 1110 for operating a flashlight in a night light operation mode. The method 1110 shown in Figure 35 for operating the flashlight 2300 in the nightlight mode of operation is shown in detail in the method provided by Figure (10). When the night light mode is selected, step 9G2 thus corresponds to step 2718 in Fig. 34. When the flashlight 2300 enters the night light mode in step 902, the controller 1GG8 is preferably configured such that the light source of the flashlight 23 (10) initially provides light at a level of 7C. After the flashlight 2300 enters the night light mode in step 9A2, the program controller (10) 8 is programmed to output the command to the load switch 1006, the audio interface and the speaker 518 and/or the vibrator 520 to provide the selected one in step 1912. And enter the visual, audio and/or tactile cues of the night light mode. This prompt provided in step 1912 is advantageous because in this embodiment, in the absence of this prompt, there will be no direct operational change in the brightness of the light source before the timer expires at step 19〇8. Accordingly, providing a visual, audio or tactile cue in step 1912 will inform the user of the selection of the night light mode and utilize the flashlight 2300 more satisfactorily than the user. The visual cue can be a simple flash of the flashlight being turned off and then turned back on. Or ' it can be a series of two or more flashes. In order to provide an audio prompt in steps 145907.doc-131 - 201038127 1912, in addition to or instead of the visual cue, the programmable controller 1008 can output a sequence, sound or via the audio interface and speaker 518 (see FIG. The different tones are provided, and the audio interface and speaker 518 are in communication with the controller ι_. Alternatively, the tactile cue can be provided via a vibrator 520 (see Figure 32) that communicates with the controller (10). Once the visual, audio or tactile cues are performed in step 1912, the timer can be re-started in step 1904. The timer is used to determine the time period before the flashlight begins to dim. Preferably, whenever a collision of a predefined magnitude is sensed by the controller 1008 based on one or more inputs from the accelerometer 1〇1, the timer is reset to cause entry in step 9〇2 After the night light mode, the timer is allowed to expire and the brightness of the light source 1〇1 is darkened only after the flashlight 2300 remains stationary for a predetermined preset period of time (such as 15 or 30 seconds). Therefore, as long as the flashlight continues to move back and forth with sufficient force to cause the necessary change in acceleration, the flashlight 23 will not dim. In some embodiments, it may be desirable to allow the user to add additional time to the timer, thereby extending the amount of time required to pass through step 1908 without requiring controller 1008 to sense an acceleration of sufficient magnitude to be at step 1916. The redundancy of the light source 101 is made dark. In the embodiment shown in Figure 32, the controller 1008 is programmed to allow the user to adjust the timer. In the illustrated embodiment, once the night light mode is entered in step 902, the user can adjust the timer without releasing the momentary switch. On the other hand, once the user releases the momentary switch ', it can no longer adjust the timer. In the preferred embodiment, the timer is initially set to expire in step 1904 for a period of 30 seconds 145907.doc -132 - 201038127. If the momentary switch 168 is released at any time after entering the night light mode without adjusting the timer, the controller 1〇〇8 will simply wait in step 19〇8 before dimming the brightness of the light source ίο! in step 1916. The timer expires after the 6th period has elapsed. However, as noted above, it is preferred that the controller 1008 resets the timekeeping state whenever the flashlight 23 is sensed to move with sufficient force. It continues to step 1908 to expire the timer. On the other hand, if the controller determines in step 272 that the momentary switch 0 168 is not released, the user can adjust the preset period of the timer, whereby in step 916 the redundancy of the source 101 is darkened before it becomes dark. In the case of a delay, the period of time must elapse. For example, in the illustrated embodiment, if the controller flashes the determination flashlight 2 around its projection wire 31〇7 left or right while the momentary switch 168 has been continuously depressed, in step 2724, then The amount of rotation can be calculated by the controller 1008 and the timer 19〇6 is adjusted based on the amount of rotation. The timer may be incremented each time the flashlight 2300 is rotated to the left or right and then rotated back to the center (eg, 1 15 seconds or 3 seconds). In other words, if the waiting time outside the forehead is desired, step 2724 may be repeated. 1906, the user may release the momentary switch as long as it is determined in step 2728 that the momentary switch remains depressed. The timer has increased the desired amount. When the release of the momentary switch is detected in step 2728, the timer will begin. • Difficult until it is determined in the step calendar that it has expired. As mentioned above, the timer is reset every time a sufficient amount of force is detected (now reset to the adjusted timer preset) to allow The timer expires only if the flashlight remains stationary (or relatively stationary) for a period of time adjusted. Although "10:2 is better for each - left or right rotation only adjusts ^ seconds to 145907.doc -133- 201038127 3 〇 seconds ^ eye to hour, but the timer can be gradually increased by any amount in step (10), including (for example) 〖minutes or 5 minutes. As each flashlight rotates left or left and right in step _ Lieutenant The timer adjusts the increment of the offset. The timer adjustment performed in step 19〇6 can also be performed based on the amount of rotation of the flashlight 2鸠. For example, the timer can be rotated at least 15 and less than 3 inches in the flashlight. It is increased by 15 seconds and rotated 3 〇 or 3 向 to the left or right in the flashlight 2300. When the above is increased by 3 Hz, in the other embodiment, other time or angle can be used. For example, the device can be used in The flashlight 2300 is rotated left or right by at least 15 and less than %. An additional five minutes is added and the timer can be added for an additional ten minutes when the flashlight is rotated to the left or right by 30 or more. Providing a visual, audio or tactile cue when the timer is incremented in step 1906. Preferably, the cue corresponds to an amount of time added to the timer or an adjusted period of the timer to cause the user to know that the timer has increased Once the timer expires at step 1908, the brightness of the light source 1〇1 of the flashlight 23 can be reduced in step 1916. In this embodiment, the light source 1〇1 of the flashlight 2300 can be gradually dimmed until Da Its minimum brightness. In another embodiment, the light source 〇1 of the flashlight 23 can be gradually darkened until it is finally completely cut off. Once the flashlight 2300 has been darkened in step 1916, it can continue to provide the lowest ( Or other presets) brightness until the flashlight 23 债 detects the collision in step 1918, at which time the brightness of the flashlight 2300 can be increased to the brightness level 1920 stored in the memory. In this embodiment, the flashlight is 23〇〇 145907.doc • 134- 201038127 Light source 1 (H brightness is set to the brightness level previously stored in the memory by the user in dim mode. However, in other embodiments 'flashlight 2300 can be used The brightness of the light source 101 is simply adjusted to its highest brightness level. Once the enthalpy has been incremented in step 1920, the timer will be adjusted in step 1906, then the timer will be reset to the adjusted period or reset to the pre-Han slave in step 1910. The routine then reverts to step 272 and then proceeds to step 1908 where controller 1008 monitors whether the reset timer has expired. Moreover, 0 is preferably reset every time a sufficient amount of movement is detected to cause the brightness of the light source 1 〇 1 of the flashlight 2300 to dim only when the flashlight 23 〇〇 remains stationary or does not move quickly enough. As described in δ, FIG. 32 and FIG. 33D, the accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇 has an output that can also be coupled to the controller circuit 1008. The accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇 can be mounted on the circuit board 2348 with its x-axis extending along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 23〇〇. §When the flashlight 2300 is in the horizontal position, if the flashlight 23 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise about its longitudinal axis 310, the magnitude of the acceleration 又 on the 丫 axis can be changed, and the gravity about χ and υ can be The information is sent to controller ι008 via χ-νουτ 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 respectively. Controllers 1 〇〇 8 can use information from X-VOUT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 to determine if there is a rotation about the longitudinal axis 31 of the flashlight 2300. When the flashlight 23 is in the horizontal position, if the flashlight 23 is tilted upward by about 45. Then, the value of the acceleration on the x-axis will change 'and the gravity information about Ζ can be sent to the controller 1 〇〇8 via ζ_ν〇υτ 1034. Controller 1〇〇8 can use information from 1034 to determine if there is an upward tilt of flashlight 23 and if additional waiting time is required. The flashlight 23〇〇 can detect collision or rolling (or _ _ 145907.doc • 135- 201038127 ¥ 011 Ding 103 8 and 丫-¥0111: 103 6 on the information change) and use this information to determine whether the flashlight 2300 should remain Night light. The brightness on the light module 2128 can be determined by varying the duty cycle on the light module 2128 to a frequency that is higher than the frequency detectable by the human eye. The active time cycle on lamp module 2128 can be generated by a sequence of high and low states on the LOAD_ENABLE 1044 signal, which is driven by controller 1008. This sequence of high and low states on signal LOAD_ENABLE 1044 and other components on the load electrical path can cause NMOS 1054 to alternately conduct and not conduct. When the percentage of conduction time in each cycle is 100%, the lamp module 2128 will be at its highest brightness. On the other hand, when the percentage of conduction time in each cycle is close to 〇%, the lamp module 2128 will be at its lowest brightness. The operational flow 900 shown in Figure 35 can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 1008. Programmable controller 1008 controls the sequence of operations based on signals received from the output of self-accelerating circuit 1010. When controller 1008 receives information from X-VOUT 1038 and Y-VOUT 1036 of accelerometer circuit 1010, controller 1008 can change its execution sequence based on the information. The programmable controller 1008 can also control the flow of power through the light module 2128 based on signals received from the output of the accelerometer circuit 1010. When the controller 1008 receives information from the X-VOUT 1038 and the Y-VOUT 1036, the controller 1008 can change some of its output signals based on the execution of the software stored in the controller 1008. FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B illustrate the flashlight 2300. Flowchart 1145, 1162 of the locking feature. After the flashlight 2300 is severed 1146, it may be accidentally pressed under certain bars 145907.doc -136- 201038127 (such as 'under the condition of the movement of the flashlight 2300 stored in the wallet, glove box or tool case) The accidental depression of the switch 丨6^ switch can turn on the flashlight 2300 and the power will be lost. The lock feature 1145, 1162 will prevent the flashlight 23 from being accidentally turned on by performing an operational sequence by the flashlight 2300 to enter the lock mode. Once the flashlight 2300 is in the locked mode, all subsequent presses on the switch 168 will be ignored until another sequence of operations is performed to unlock the flashlight 23 为 to 0 ❹ - the lock feature 1145 begins at step 1146. If the flashlight 2300 is turned on when the projection spindle 310 is directed upward in the substantially vertical direction 1148 and then directed downward in the substantially vertical direction while the switch 6 8 is continuously depressed 1 5 5 〇, the flashlight 2300 will sequence the Interpreted as a locked command. In the present embodiment, once switch 168 is released 1152, flashlight 2300 asserts lock command 1154 and enters lock mode 1156. Then, the operation ι158 of entering the lock mode 1145 is completed. In yet another embodiment, once switch ι 68 is released 1152', flashlight 2300 can directly enter lock mode 1156 without confirming lock command U54. In the present embodiment, the flashlight 2300 confirms the lock command Π 54 by blinking. Alternatively, the flashlight 23 can confirm the lock command 115 4 by or in addition to the visual response: the visual response provides an audible or tactile response. Once the flashlight 23 00 is locked 1156, the only way to exit the lock mode is via operation 1162 of the exit lock mode. Operation 1162 begins at step 1160. If the projection spindle 31 is directed in a substantially vertical direction to follow the vertical direction 1164 in the substantially vertical direction while the switch 168 is continuously depressed 1166 by 145907.doc • 137· 201038127, the flashlight 2300 interprets the sequence as Exit the lock mode command. Once the switch 168 is released 1168, the flashlight 23 is self-locked to release (or unlock) 1170. In the present embodiment, the flashlight 23 does not release the lock lag 1172 and completes the exit lock mode operation 1162 at step 1174. In another embodiment, once the flashlight 2300 is released from lock release (or: unlocked) 1170, the operation 1 丨 62 of exiting the lock mode is completed without performing the step - 1172 of confirming the unlock state. In an embodiment, once operation 1162 of the exit lock mode is completed 1174, flashlight 2300 is then turned "on". Once the flashlight 2300 is locked 1156, the flashlight 23 cannot be turned on by the press and release sequence on the switch 168 until the flashlight 300 2300 receives the unlock command. In the present embodiment, the flashlight 2300 confirms the unlock command 1172 by blinking. Alternatively, flashlight 2300 can confirm unlock command 1172 by providing an audible or tactile response in addition to or in lieu of a visual response. Or other types of movements of the flashlight 23 that can cause the output of the accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇 and Y-VOUT 10% or Ζ-νουτ 1〇34 can also be used as the flashlight 2300. Enter or exit the lock mode command. 37 is a flow chart illustrating another locking feature U76 of the flashlight 23〇〇. Operation begins at step 1190. If the flashlight 2300 is turned off 1178, the flashlight 23 can be turned on by an open command (such as a press and release sequence on the switch 168) before the flashlight 2300 receives the lock command, and the light source of the flashlight 23 can begin to generate light and the flashlight 23〇〇 can be entered in the preset user operation 145907.doc •138- 201038127 mode. If the flashlight 2300 is turned off 丨丨7 8 and if the switch [6 8 is pressed in three cycles and released in sequence and released 1180, the flashlight 23 解 interprets the sequence as a lock. In the present embodiment, the flashlight 23 confirms the lock command HU and enters the lock mode 1184. Alternatively, once the flashlight 23 receives the lock command, the flashlight 23 00 can directly enter the lock mode 1184 without the step of the check 丨丨 82. Once the flashlight 23 is locked 〇 1184, the flashlight 2300 cannot be turned on by the press and release sequence on the switch 168 until the flashlight 2300 receives the unlock command. When the flashlight 2300 is locked 1184, if the switch 168 is pressed in a sequence of three presses and release and the 丨i 86 is released, the flashlight 23 解 interprets the sequence as a command to unlock or release, and the flashlight 23 is subsequently released. Lock 1188 and exit lock mode 1192. In an embodiment, once the operation 1192 of the exit lock mode is completed, the flashlight 2300 is subsequently turned "on". In the present embodiment, the flashlight 2300 confirms the lock command 1182 by blinking. Alternatively, flashlight 2300 can confirm unlock command 丨丨82 by providing an audible or tactile response in addition to or in lieu of a visual response. As previously described in connection with Figure 33D, the accelerometer circuit loio may include outputs χ_ν〇υτ 1038, Y-VOUT 1036 . & Z_V0UT 1034 that may be tapped to the controller circuit 1〇〇8. The accelerometer circuit 1 〇 1 〇 can be mounted on the circuit board 2348 where the Z axis extends along the longitudinal axis of the flashlight 2300. When the flashlight 2300 is pointing vertically up, the magnitude of the acceleration on the z-axis will be _1G. When the flashlight 23 00 is pointing vertically downward, the magnitude of the acceleration on the z-axis will be + 1G. Gravity information about z can be sent via z-VOUT 1034 to control 145907.doc • 139- 201038127 1008 . The controller 1008 can use the information on the Z-VOUT 1034 to determine if the flashlight 2 3 0 0 points up or down to determine if the lock is desired. The operational flowcharts U45, 1162 shown in Figures 36A and 36B can be implemented by software stored in the memory of the controller 1008. The programmable controller 1008 controls the sequence of operations based on the signals received by the self-accelerating circuit 1〇1〇. When the controller 1008 is from the accelerometer circuit 1〇1〇〇_ν〇υτ 1〇34
接收資訊時,控制器1〇〇8可基於此資訊來改變使用者偏好 (或參數設定)。 預期一種多模式可攜式電子照明裝置。該裝置包含—控 制器及一使用者介面。該控制器經組態以實施複數個操作 模式。該使用者介面經組態以將命令輸人至該控制器。該 使用者介面可具有-位置敏感介m,命令經由料 攜式電子照明裝置之至少一預定義位置而輸入。 預期-種可攜式照明裝置。該可攜式照明裝置經组鵰 使用-可攜式電源操作。該可攜式照明裝置包含:一Upon receiving the information, the controller 1 8 can change the user preferences (or parameter settings) based on this information. A multi-mode portable electronic lighting device is contemplated. The device includes a controller and a user interface. The controller is configured to implement a plurality of modes of operation. The user interface is configured to input commands to the controller. The user interface can have a position sensitive interface m that is commanded to be input via at least one predefined location of the portable electronic lighting device. Expected - a portable lighting device. The portable lighting device is operated by a group-operated power supply. The portable lighting device comprises: a
源^主電源電路,其用於將該光源電連接至該可攜式 源’該主電源電路包括一與該光源申聯電安置之電子電 開關’·—慣性感测器,其用於谓測該可攜式照 數個預定位置及移,其電糾至 電源。該控制器包括一輸出,該輸 ^ 過該主電源電路中之電子電源門關;#用於控制 作梦“ 冑子電源開關及光源之電力流的控彳 :…中,亥控制器經組態以基於該可攜式昭明裝 個預定位置或移動來控制穿過該電子電源開關之電: 145907.doc -140* 201038127 流。 預期-種㈣多模式可攜式電子照明裝置之方法。該方 法包含以下步驟:判定該可攜式照明裝置是否已定位於複 數個狀位置中之-者中;及在㈣到複數個預定位置中 之一者時進入至新操作模式中。 雖然在前述揭示内容中已呈現經改良之手電筒及其各別 組件之各種實施例’但熟f此項技術者可預期許多修改、 更改、替代實施例及替代材料,且可利用該等修改、更 改、替代實施例及替代材料來實現本發明之各種態樣。舉 例而言,本文中所描述之電力控制電路及短路保護電路; 一起用於手電筒中或可獨立地加以採用。此外,短路保護 電路可用於不同於手電筒之可再充電電子裝置中。因此, 應清楚地理解,此描述僅藉由實例進行且不作為對如下所 主張的本發明之範疇的限制。 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1為例示性手電筒之平面圖; 圖2為沿由102-102所指示之平面所截取的圖手電筒 之橫載面圖; 圖3為穿過由1〇2_ 1〇2所指示之平面所截取的圖i之手電 筒之前區段的放大橫截面圖; 圖4為穿過由102-102所指示之平面所截取的圖1之手電 筒之後區段的放大橫截面圖; 圖5A為圖1之手電筒之頭部總成及筒身之一部分的分解 透視圖;圖5B為圖1之手電筒之開關及尾部帽蓋總成部分 145907.doc -141- 201038127 的分解透視圖; 圖6為可再充電電池組之分解透視圖; 圖7為說明圖6之電池組之内部及外部電連接的示意圖; 圖8為說明根據本發明之一實施例之電子電路之間的關 係之電路圖; 圖9A至圖9G為圖8中所示之電路之不同組件的示意性電 路圖; 圖10A至圖10K為說明根據本發明之不同態樣之手電筒 的操作的流程圖; 圖11為另一例示性手電筒之平面圖; 圖12為沿由302-302所指示之平面所截取的圖u之手電 筒之橫截面圖; 圖13為穿過由302-302所指示之平面所截取的圖u之手 電筒之前區段的放大橫截面圖; 圖14為穿過由302-302所指示之平面所截取的圖1丨之手 電筒之後區段的放大橫截面圖; 圖15A為圖11之手電筒之頭部總成及筒身之一部分的分 解透視圖;圖15B為圖U之手電筒之開關及尾部帽蓋總成 部分的分解透視圖; 圖16A為電池盒之透視圖; 圖16B為圖16A之電池盒之分解透視圖; 圖17為說明圖16之電池盒之内部及外部電連接的示意 圖; 圖18為說明根據本發明之另一實施例之電子電路之間的 145907.doc -142- 201038127 關係之電路圖; 圖19A至圖19D為圖18中所示之電路之不同組件的示竟 性電路圖; 圖20為以相對於圖3中所包括之橫截面之9〇。截取之圖1 的手電筒之燈模組之橫截面圖; 圖20A為保持套環之側視圖,且圖2〇b為穿過保持套产 之縱向橫截面圖;a main power supply circuit for electrically connecting the light source to the portable source. The main power supply circuit includes an electronic electric switch disposed with the light source. The inertial sensor is used for the measurement. The portable photo is taken at a predetermined position and moved, and the electric power is corrected to the power source. The controller includes an output, and the electronic power gate in the main power circuit is turned off; # is used to control the control of the power flow of the dice power switch and the light source: ... The state controls the electricity passing through the electronic power switch based on the portable position or movement of the portable display: 145907.doc -140* 201038127 Flow. The method of the intended (four) multi-mode portable electronic lighting device. The method includes the steps of: determining whether the portable lighting device has been positioned in a plurality of positions; and entering the new operating mode when (4) to one of the plurality of predetermined positions. Various embodiments of the improved flashlight and its various components have been presented in the context, but many modifications, alterations, alternative embodiments and alternatives are contemplated by the skilled artisan, and such modifications, alterations, and alternatives may be utilized. Examples and alternative materials are used to implement various aspects of the invention. For example, the power control circuit and short circuit protection circuit described herein are used together in a flashlight or can be used independently In addition, the short circuit protection circuit can be used in a rechargeable electronic device other than a flashlight. Therefore, it should be clearly understood that the description is made by way of example only and not as a limitation of the scope of the invention as claimed. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 is a plan view of an exemplary flashlight; Figure 2 is a cross-sectional view of the flashlight taken along the plane indicated by 102-102; Figure 3 is a cross-section indicated by 1〇2_1〇2 FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a section of the flashlight of FIG. 1 taken through the plane indicated by 102-102; FIG. 5A is a view of the front section of the flashlight of FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the head assembly and the barrel of the flashlight; FIG. 5B is an exploded perspective view of the switch and tail cap assembly portion 145907.doc-141-201038127 of the flashlight of FIG. 1; FIG. 7 is a schematic view illustrating internal and external electrical connections of the battery pack of FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a circuit diagram illustrating a relationship between electronic circuits according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. To Figure 9 G is a schematic circuit diagram of the different components of the circuit shown in FIG. 8; FIGS. 10A through 10K are flowcharts illustrating the operation of the flashlight according to various aspects of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a plan view of another exemplary flashlight; Figure 12 is a cross-sectional view of the flashlight of Figure u taken along the plane indicated by 302-302; Figure 13 is an enlarged cross-section of the previous section of the flashlight of Figure u taken through the plane indicated by 302-302. Figure 14 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the section of the flashlight of Figure 1 taken through the plane indicated by 302-302; Figure 15A is a portion of the head assembly of the flashlight of Figure 11 and a portion of the barrel Figure 15B is an exploded perspective view of the switch and the tail cap assembly portion of the flashlight of Figure U; Figure 16A is a perspective view of the battery case; Figure 16B is an exploded perspective view of the battery case of Figure 16A; Figure 17 FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing the relationship between 145907.doc-142-201038127 between electronic circuits according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 19A to FIG. 19D are diagrams for explaining the internal and external electrical connections of the battery case of FIG. For the electricity shown in Figure 18 Actually shows the circuit diagram of various components; FIG. 20 is a relative 9〇 in FIG. 3 includes a cross-section of the. 1A is a cross-sectional view of the lamp module of the flashlight of FIG. 1; FIG. 20A is a side view of the retaining collar, and FIG. 2B is a longitudinal cross-sectional view through the retaining sleeve;
圖21為例示性手電筒之平面圖; 圖22為沿由102-102所指示之平面所截取的圖21之手带 筒之橫截面圖; 圖23為穿過由102-102所指示之平面所截取的圖2ι之手 電筒之前區段的放大橫截面圖; 圖24為穿過由1〇2_102所指示之平面所截取的圖η之手 電筒之後區段的放大橫截面圖;Figure 21 is a plan view of an exemplary flashlight; Figure 22 is a cross-sectional view of the hand strap of Figure 21 taken along the plane indicated by 102-102; Figure 23 is taken through the plane indicated by 102-102 Figure 2 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the section of the flashlight of Figure 2 taken through the plane indicated by 1〇2_102;
圖25A為圖21之手電筒之頭部總成及筒 解透視圖; 身之—部分的分 中自蓋總成部分的分 圖25B為圖21之手電筒之開關及尾部 解透視圖; 圖25C為可再充電電池組之透視圖; 圖2 6為另一例示性手電筒之平面圖. 圖27為沿由302-302所指 筒之橫截面圖; 不之平面所戴取的圖26之手電 圖28為穿過由302-302所指示之卓& 取的圖26之手 十面所戴 電筒之前區段的放大橫截面圖; 145907.doc -143- 201038127 圖29為穿過由302-302所指示 電筒之後區段的放大橫截面圖; 之平面所截取 的圖26之手 一部分的分 圖30A為圖26之手電筒之頭部總成及筒身之 解透視圖; 圖30B為圖26之手電筒之間關 解透視圖,· ]及尾編總成部分的分 圖30C為電池盒之透視圖; 圖3 1A為尾部帽蓋總成之側視圖,· 圖31B為展示圖符之尾部帽蓋總成之後視圖; 圖31C為展示圖符之替代尾部帽蓋總成之後視圖; 圖31D為展示開關上之凸塊之尾部帽蓋總成; 圖32為說明根據本發明之另— I另實細例之電子電路之間的 關係之電路圖; 圖33A至圖33D為圖32中舶Λ 〒所不之電路之不同組件的示意 性電路圖;及 圖34圖35、圖36Α、圖36Β及圖37為說明根據本發明 之不同態樣之手電筒的操作的流程圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 100 101 104 106 108 110 手電筒 光源 頭部總成 開關及尾部蓋帽總成 刻花表面 投射主軸/縱軸 U59〇7d〇C -144- 201038127Figure 25A is a perspective view of the head assembly and the barrel of the flashlight of Figure 21; Figure 25B is a partial view of the body of the cover assembly. Figure 25B is a perspective view of the switch and tail of the flashlight of Figure 21; FIG. 26 is a plan view of another exemplary flashlight. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the cylinder indicated by 302-302; FIG. 26 is a flashlight of FIG. An enlarged cross-sectional view of the section before the flashlight worn by the hand of Figure 26 taken through the indications of 302-302; 145907.doc -143- 201038127 Figure 29 is taken through 302-302 An enlarged cross-sectional view of the section following the flashlight; a portion of the hand of FIG. 26 taken at the plane of FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the head assembly and the barrel of the flashlight of FIG. 26; FIG. 30B is a flashlight of FIG. Fig. 30C is a perspective view of the battery case; Fig. 3 1A is a side view of the tail cap assembly, and Fig. 31B is a tail cap of the display icon. Rear view of the assembly; Figure 31C is a rear view of the replacement tail cap assembly of the display; Figure 31D is a view The rear cap assembly of the bump on the switch; Fig. 32 is a circuit diagram showing the relationship between the electronic circuits according to another embodiment of the present invention; Figs. 33A to 33D are the same as Fig. 32 Schematic diagram of the different components of the circuit; and Figures 34, 35, 36, 36, and 37 are flow diagrams illustrating the operation of the flashlight in accordance with various aspects of the present invention. [Main component symbol description] 100 101 104 106 108 110 Flashlight Light source Head assembly Switch and tail cap assembly Engraved surface Projection spindle / longitudinal axis U59〇7d〇C -144- 201038127
112 帽蓋 113 唇緣 114 〇形環 115 環形凹槽 116 透鏡 117 環形凹部 118 反射器 119 環形肩狀物 120 保持套環 121 反射輪廓 122 〇形環 123 環形凹槽 124 筒身 125 前部分 126 肩式環 127 電池室 128 燈模組 129 下方絕緣體 130 可再充電電池組 131 内螺紋 132 扣環 133 可壓縮正觸點 134 下方開關外殼 135 第二電路板/耳狀物 145907.doc -145. 201038127 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 148a 148b 149 149a、149b、149c、 149d 150 151 152 153 154 155 接觸接腳 LED/外壁 接觸接腳 第一電路板 接觸接腳 下方總成 接觸接腳彈簧 上方總成 接觸接腳彈簧 上方絕緣體 接觸接腳彈簧 上方正觸點 電路板 狹槽 固體部分 散熱片 狹槽 波形彈簧 接觸環 扣罩 央片 致動器 上方負觸點/接地觸點 145907.doc -146- 201038127 156 接觸接腳彈簧/盤簧 157 爽片 158 接觸接腳彈簧/盤簧 160 上方開關外殼 ^ 161 環形凹部 161a、 161b、 161c、 161d 鍵 162 唇緣密封件/單向閥 163 第一區域 164 内尾部帽蓋區段 165 螺紋 166 充電環/鎖定螺母 167 第二區域 168 開關埠密封件 169 張開區域 〇 170 外尾部帽蓋區段 171 環形凹部 172 内螺紋 173 圓周鎖定突出部 ' 174 外螺紋 175 背面 176 翼片 177 彈簀夾片 178 凹部 145907.doc -147- 201038127 145907.doc 179 肩狀物 180 肩狀物 181 肋狀物/鎖定突出部 182 環形肩狀物 183 後端 186 唇緣 187 接觸表面 188 散熱片外殼 189 前區域 190 金屬充電觸點 191 後區域 192 負充電觸點/接地充電環 193 鍵槽/圓柱形通道 194 絕緣環 195 圓柱形腔室 196 耳狀物 197 圓柱形通道 198 狹槽 199 辱緣 201 後端 210 帽蓋總成 211 末端帽蓋 212 外環頂部觸點/+5 VDC外環觸點 212a 夾片 doc -148- 201038127 214 通用頂部正觸點 214a 炎片 214b 頂部正觸點 215a 點線 • 215b 點線 : 216 頂部正觸點 216a 夾片 218 電池組彈簣 o ^ 230 外殼 231 壁 232 凹部 233 凹口 240 組裝電路板 241 板邊緣區 242a、242b、242c 前電觸點 244a、244b、244c c# 後電觸點 260 可再充電電池 262 正端子/正電極 : 264 負端子/負電極 ' 270 末端帽蓋總成 271 保持壁 272 電池組彈簧 274 底部負觸點 274a 電路板夹片 145907.doc -149- 201038127 274b 中央觸點/突部 276 底部中環觸點/内環觸點 276a 炎片 278 底部外環觸點 278a 夾片 279 後端帽蓋 280 指引部件 281 導引件 282 導引件 283 導引件 284 狹槽 289a 點線 289b 點線 290 相對突出部 291 孔 300 手電筒 306 開關及尾部帽蓋總成 308 刻花表面 310 投射主軸 324 筒身 325 前部分 327 電池室 329 螺紋 330 電池盒 145907.doc - 150- 201038127 331 螺紋 334 下方開關外殼 334a 配合凹部 335 導電環 ’ 338 接觸接腳 ’ 340 接觸接腳 344 接觸接腳彈簧 346 接觸接腳彈簧 ^ 348 電路板 349a、349b、349c 狹槽 354 致動器 360 上方開關外殼 360a 對準部件 361a、361b、361c 鍵 364 内尾部帽蓋區段 〇 365 螺紋 393 圓柱形通道 395 圓柱形腔室 397 圓柱形通道 399 唇緣 410 前端或燈端外殼總成 411 前外殼 411a、411b、411c 叉形物 412 燈正觸點 145907.doc -151 - 201038127 413 突出部 413a 、413b、413c、 活葉 413d 414 孔/前交又觸點 414a 突出部 415 孔 416 彈簧 417、 418 彈簧 419 接腳 423 頂端 424 連接器接腳 429 連接器接腳之後端 430 後端或尾端外殼總成 431 後外殼 431a 、431b 、 431c 叉形物 432 後交叉觸點 432a 突出部 434 外環觸點 436 孔 437 > 438 彈簧 439 凹部 450 中央連接器 451 後盤或觸點 452 中央孔 145907.doc -152- 201038127 454 正電極 461 點線 462 、 464 、 466 電池槽 462a、464a ' 466a 電池 463 點線 465 點線 467 點線 502 充電系統 0 ^ 504 電池保護電路 506 MOSFET驅動器及負載開關電路 508 LDO線性調節器電路 510 控制器電路 512 加速計電路 514 磁力計電路/磁阻感測電路 516 + 5VDC信號線 Q 518 音訊介面及揚聲器 520 振動器 522 信號線V_CELL+ 524 信號線VLOAD • 530 金屬氧化物半導體場效電晶體 (PMOS) 532 源極/信號線 534 NPN雙極電晶體 536 充電保護電路 145907.doc -153- 201038127112 Cap 113 Lip 114 Cylinder ring 115 Annular groove 116 Lens 117 Annular recess 118 Reflector 119 Annular shoulder 120 Retaining collar 121 Reflecting profile 122 Cylinder ring 123 Annular groove 124 Cylinder 125 Front part 126 Shoulder Ring 127 Battery compartment 128 Lamp module 129 Lower insulator 130 Rechargeable battery pack 131 Internal thread 132 Buckle 133 Compressible positive contact 134 Lower switch housing 135 Second circuit board / ear 145907.doc -145. 201038127 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 148a 148b 149 149a, 149b, 149c, 149d 150 151 152 153 154 155 Contact pin LED / outer wall contact pin First board contact pin under the assembly contact The upper part of the foot spring contacts the contact spring above the insulator contact pin spring above the positive contact circuit board slot solid part heat sink slot wave spring contact ring buckle cover central piece actuator upper negative contact / ground contact 145907. Doc -146- 201038127 156 Contact pin spring / coil spring 157 chip 158 contact pin spring / coil spring 160 upper switch housing ^ 161 ring Recesses 161a, 161b, 161c, 161d Key 162 Lip Seal / Check Valve 163 First Area 164 Inner Tail Cap Section 165 Thread 166 Charging Ring / Locking Nut 167 Second Area 168 Switch 埠 Seal 169 Open Area 〇 170 outer tail cap section 171 annular recess 172 internal thread 173 circumferential locking projection '174 external thread 175 back 176 tab 177 magazine clip 178 recess 145907.doc -147- 201038127 145907.doc 179 shoulder 180 Shoulder 181 rib/locking projection 182 annular shoulder 183 rear end 186 lip 187 contact surface 188 heat sink housing 189 front region 190 metal charging contact 191 rear region 192 negative charging contact / ground charging ring 193 Keyway/cylindrical channel 194 Insulation ring 195 Cylindrical chamber 196 Ear 197 Cylindrical channel 198 Slot 199 Insult 201 Back end 210 Cap assembly 211 End cap 212 Outer ring top contact / +5 VDC outside Ring contact 212a clip doc -148- 201038127 214 universal top positive contact 214a inflammation sheet 214b top positive contact 215a dotted line • 215b dotted line: 21 6 Top positive contact 216a Clip 218 Battery pack 篑 o ^ 230 Housing 231 Wall 232 Recess 233 Notch 240 Assembly circuit board 241 Board edge areas 242a, 242b, 242c Front electrical contacts 244a, 244b, 244c c# Post-touch Point 260 Rechargeable battery 262 Positive terminal / Positive electrode: 264 Negative terminal / Negative electrode ' 270 End cap assembly 271 Retaining wall 272 Battery pack spring 274 Bottom negative contact 274a Board clip 145907.doc -149- 201038127 274b Center contact/protrusion 276 Bottom middle ring contact/inner ring contact 276a Inflamed piece 278 Bottom outer ring contact 278a Clip 279 Rear end cap 280 Guide member 281 Guide 282 Guide 283 Guide 284 Slot 289a Dotted line 289b Dotted line 290 Relative protrusion 291 Hole 300 Flashlight 306 Switch and tail cap assembly 308 Engraved surface 310 Projection spindle 324 Barrel 325 Front section 327 Battery compartment 329 Thread 330 Battery compartment 145907.doc - 150 - 201038127 331 Thread 334 lower switch housing 334a mating recess 335 conductive ring '338 contact pin' 340 contact pin 344 contact pin spring 34 6 contact pin spring ^ 348 circuit board 349a, 349b, 349c slot 354 actuator 360 upper switch housing 360a alignment member 361a, 361b, 361c key 364 inner tail cap section 〇 365 thread 393 cylindrical channel 395 cylinder Shape chamber 397 cylindrical passage 399 lip 410 front end or lamp end housing assembly 411 front housing 411a, 411b, 411c fork 412 lamp positive contact 145907.doc -151 - 201038127 413 protrusions 413a, 413b, 413c, Leaf 413d 414 hole/front intersection and contact 414a protrusion 415 hole 416 spring 417, 418 spring 419 pin 423 top end 424 connector pin 429 connector pin rear end 430 rear or rear end housing assembly 431 Housing 431a, 431b, 431c fork 432 rear cross contact 432a projection 434 outer ring contact 436 hole 437 > 438 spring 439 recess 450 central connector 451 rear disc or contact 452 central aperture 145907.doc -152- 201038127 454 positive electrode 461 point line 462, 464, 466 battery slot 462a, 464a ' 466a battery 463 point line 465 point line 467 point line 502 Charging System 0 ^ 504 Battery Protection Circuit 506 MOSFET Driver and Load Switch Circuitry 508 LDO Linear Regulator Circuit 510 Controller Circuit 512 Accelerometer Circuit 514 Magnetometer Circuit / Magnetoresistive Sensing Circuit 516 + 5VDC Signal Line Q 518 Audio Interface and Speaker 520 Vibrator 522 Signal line V_CELL+ 524 Signal line VLOAD • 530 Metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor (PMOS) 532 Source/signal line 534 NPN bipolar transistor 536 Charging protection circuit 145907.doc -153- 201038127
538 信號線V—WALL—. ADAPTER 540 信號線 544 充電電路 548 輸入信號線VCHARGE 550 PMOS 554 二極體 558 負載開關 560 内部電源電壓信號VB AT 562 電壓保護電路 564 内部信號線CO 568 反相器 570 NPN雙極電晶體 572 PMOS/負載開關 582 > 584 二極體 586 信號線 588 低壓降調節器 590 輸出線 602 控制器 604 信號線ADC_DC_ ZOUT 606 信號線ADC_DC — YOUT 608 信號線ADC_DC_ XOUT 610 信號線PD 612 信號線ADC_X-G 614 信號線ADC_Y-G 145907.doc - 154- 201038127538 Signal line V—WALL—. ADAPTER 540 Signal line 544 Charging circuit 548 Input signal line VCHARGE 550 PMOS 554 Diode 558 Load switch 560 Internal power supply voltage signal VB AT 562 Voltage protection circuit 564 Internal signal line CO 568 Inverter 570 NPN Bipolar Transistor 572 PMOS/Load Switch 582 > 584 Diode 586 Signal Line 588 Low Dropout Regulator 590 Output Line 602 Controller 604 Signal Line ADC_DC_ ZOUT 606 Signal Line ADC_DC — YOUT 608 Signal Line ADC_DC_ XOUT 610 Signal Line PD 612 signal line ADC_X-G 614 signal line ADC_Y-G 145907.doc - 154- 201038127
616 信號線ADC_Z-G 618 信號線ST 620 信號線S/R/MOSI 622 信號線LAMP—DRIVE—MISO 624 信號線DISABLE_CHARGE 626 信號線 CHARGE DISABLE 628 信號線CHG/輸入PD 630 信號線1_WIRE 634 信號線RESET 640 慣性感測器 642 PNP雙極電晶體 644 信號線+VCOMPASS 646 參考電壓REF COMPASS 652 信號線 654 NPN雙極電晶體 660 磁力計 662 電壓輸出OUTX+ 664 電壓輸出OUTX- 666 電壓輸出OUTY+ 668 電壓輸出OUTY- 670 電壓輸出OUTY+ 672 電壓輸出OUTY- 678 負輸入 680 運算放大器 145907.doc -155- 201038127616 Signal line ADC_Z-G 618 Signal line ST 620 Signal line S/R/MOSI 622 Signal line LAMP—DRIVE—MISO 624 Signal line DISABLE_CHARGE 626 Signal line CHARGE DISABLE 628 Signal line CHG/Input PD 630 Signal line 1_WIRE 634 Signal line RESET 640 Inertial Sensor 642 PNP Bipolar Transistor 644 Signal Line +VCOMPASS 646 Reference Voltage REF COMPASS 652 Signal Line 654 NPN Bipolar Transistor 660 Magnetometer 662 Voltage Output OUTX+ 664 Voltage Output OUTX- 666 Voltage Output OUTY+ 668 Voltage Output OUTY - 670 Voltage Output OUTY+ 672 Voltage Output OUTY- 678 Negative Input 680 Operational Amplifier 145907.doc -155- 201038127
682 運算放大器 686 電阻器 688 電容器 1002 低壓降調節器 1004 電壓調節器電路 1006 負載開關電路 1008 控制器電路 1010 3軸加速計電路 1012 頂部+4.5VDC 1014 底部+4.5VDC 1016 頂部GND 1018 LED_OUT 1020 SWITCH接觸墊 1022 信號線 1024 ' 1026 二極體 1028 + 3.3V電源 1030 控制器 1032 信號線ADC 一 VBAT 1034 信號線Z-VOUT 1036 信號線Y-VOUT 1038 信號線X-VOUT 1040 信號線SCK 1042 信號線MISO 1044 信號線 LOAD_ENABLE 145907.doc -156· 201038127682 Operational Amplifier 686 Resistor 688 Capacitor 1002 Low Dropout Regulator 1004 Voltage Regulator Circuit 1006 Load Switch Circuit 1008 Controller Circuit 1010 3-Axis Accelerometer Circuit 1012 Top +4.5VDC 1014 Bottom +4.5VDC 1016 Top GND 1018 LED_OUT 1020 SWITCH Contact Pad 1022 Signal Line 1024 ' 1026 Diode 1028 + 3.3V Power Supply 1030 Controller 1032 Signal Line ADC One VBAT 1034 Signal Line Z-VOUT 1036 Signal Line Y-VOUT 1038 Signal Line X-VOUT 1040 Signal Line SCK 1042 Signal Line MISO 1044 signal line LOAD_ENABLE 145907.doc -156· 201038127
1046 1048 1050 1052 1054 1058 2100 2104 2106 2108 2112 2117 2118 2121 2122 2124 2125 2126 2128 2130 2134 2136 、 2138 、 2140 2139 2142 信號線SW_ON 信號線MOM 信號線RESET NPN雙極電晶體 NMOS 慣性感測器 手電筒 頭部總成 開關及尾部帽蓋總成 刻花表面 組合頭部及面部帽蓋 環形凹部 反射器 反射輪靡 密封元件 筒身 前部分 肩式環 燈模組 可再充電電池組 下方開關外殼 彈簀探針總成 内螺紋 筒身 145907.doc -157- 201038127 2144 柱塞 2148 電路板 2160 上方開關外殼 2164 内尾部帽蓋區段 2170 外尾部帽蓋區段 2176 翼片 2177 彈簧夾片 2180 圖符 2300 手電筒 2306 開關及尾部帽蓋總成 2308 刻花表面 2324 筒身 2330 電池盒/電源 2334 下方開關外殼 2348 電路板 2360 上方開關外殼 2370 尾部帽蓋 2370a、2370b、 圖符 2370d ' 2370e 2371 後圓周 2399 肋狀物 145907.doc -158-1046 1048 1050 1052 1054 1058 2100 2104 2106 2108 2112 2117 2118 2121 2122 2124 2125 2126 2128 2130 2134 2136 2138, 2140 2139 2142 Signal line SW_ON Signal line MOM Signal line RESET NPN bipolar transistor NMOS inertial sensor flashlight head Assembly switch and tail cap assembly engraved surface combination head and face cap ring concave reflector reflector rim sealing element barrel front part shoulder ring lamp module rechargeable battery pack lower switch housing magazine probe Assembly internal thread barrel 145907.doc -157- 201038127 2144 Plunger 2148 Circuit board 2160 Upper switch housing 2164 Inner tail cap section 2170 Outer tail cap section 2176 Tab 2177 Spring clip 2180 Icon 2300 Flashlight 2306 Switch and tail cap assembly 2308 engraved surface 2324 barrel 2330 battery box / power supply 2334 lower switch housing 2348 circuit board 2360 upper switch housing 2370 tail cap 2370a, 2370b, icon 2370d ' 2370e 2371 rear circumference 2399 rib 145907.doc -158-
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14512009P | 2009-01-16 | 2009-01-16 | |
| US12/502,237 US20110012534A1 (en) | 2009-07-14 | 2009-07-14 | Portable lighting devices |
| US12/505,555 US20110012535A1 (en) | 2009-07-14 | 2009-07-20 | Portable lighting devices |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| TW201038127A true TW201038127A (en) | 2010-10-16 |
Family
ID=42340052
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| TW099101153A TW201038127A (en) | 2009-01-16 | 2010-01-15 | Portable lighting devices |
Country Status (8)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP2387691A4 (en) |
| JP (1) | JP5647150B2 (en) |
| CN (1) | CN102369392A (en) |
| AR (1) | AR075142A1 (en) |
| AU (1) | AU2010204998A1 (en) |
| MX (1) | MX2011007625A (en) |
| TW (1) | TW201038127A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2010083047A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (27)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US9366400B2 (en) * | 2010-11-17 | 2016-06-14 | Guangdong Jetfast Portable Lighting Co., Ltd. | Illumination lamp with integrated switch and alarm |
| TW201243208A (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2012-11-01 | Pin-Han Yu | Emergency rescue flashlight |
| CN202215947U (en) * | 2011-09-01 | 2012-05-09 | 深圳市超维实业有限公司 | dynamic glow stick |
| NL2010170C2 (en) * | 2012-06-22 | 2013-12-24 | Steinar Holding B V | LANTERN WITH SECURITY AGAINST SHINES IN AN UNWANTED DIRECTION. |
| JP6165245B2 (en) | 2012-06-27 | 2017-07-19 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Method and apparatus for automatically adapting the light output of a lighting unit |
| DE102012014407A1 (en) * | 2012-07-19 | 2014-01-23 | Wabco Gmbh | Device for detecting and processing sensor measured values and / or for controlling actuators |
| FR2993957B1 (en) * | 2012-07-27 | 2014-07-25 | Zedel | PORTABLE ELECTRIC LAMP WITH A POWER CURRENT CONTROL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A POWER CURRENT OF SUCH A LAMP |
| KR101209025B1 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2012-12-11 | 박기주 | Led illumination lamp |
| CN102867392A (en) * | 2012-08-30 | 2013-01-09 | 樊荣 | Portable danger alarm |
| CN103836364B (en) * | 2012-11-27 | 2016-09-07 | 深圳市海洋王照明工程有限公司 | Emergency survival torch |
| GR1008131B (en) * | 2013-02-25 | 2014-03-06 | Ιωαννης-Πετρος Αγαπητου Ζαγορας | A multi-application submarine led characterised by fixed inclination angle (0-80 deg) and the optional use of a gyroscopic sensor |
| GB201319692D0 (en) * | 2013-11-07 | 2013-12-25 | Worlds Apart Ltd | Lighting means |
| CN103727405B (en) * | 2014-01-13 | 2017-12-12 | 深圳市朗恒电子有限公司 | Suitable for the lighting device of outdoor exercises |
| JP6835588B2 (en) * | 2014-02-28 | 2021-02-24 | シグニファイ ホールディング ビー ヴィSignify Holding B.V. | Methods and devices for controlling the luminaire based on the measured force and / or the movement of the associated luminaire. |
| JP2015220204A (en) * | 2014-05-21 | 2015-12-07 | ソニー株式会社 | Lighting device and display device |
| EP2947371A1 (en) * | 2014-05-22 | 2015-11-25 | Leys | Portable light |
| JP6232508B2 (en) * | 2015-11-27 | 2017-11-15 | ジェントス株式会社 | Portable lighting fixtures |
| RU169098U1 (en) * | 2016-04-19 | 2017-03-03 | Вячеслав Петрович Тигров | ELECTRIC LANTERN |
| JP2018021779A (en) * | 2016-08-02 | 2018-02-08 | 株式会社日本マイクロニクス | Probe card, and checkup method |
| CN107205302A (en) * | 2017-06-30 | 2017-09-26 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Control method, device and the smart machine of Intelligent flashlight |
| TWI694758B (en) * | 2017-07-03 | 2020-05-21 | 仁寶電腦工業股份有限公司 | Electronic device |
| CN107327695B (en) * | 2017-07-14 | 2023-02-21 | 广州巴兰仕机械有限公司 | Hand-held preset inflator control device |
| CN107559698B (en) * | 2017-09-15 | 2019-12-10 | 永康市正硕信息科技有限公司 | LED lamp |
| CN108401339A (en) * | 2018-03-23 | 2018-08-14 | 杨松 | Lighting system and method for controlling illuminating lamp |
| CN110207030B (en) * | 2019-04-24 | 2020-05-26 | 温州市仿浩电子科技有限公司 | Electric torch |
| US10928051B1 (en) * | 2019-12-23 | 2021-02-23 | Streamlight, Inc. | Tail switch arrangement for a light |
| RU2759081C1 (en) * | 2020-12-16 | 2021-11-09 | Евгений Александрович Шнитов | Apparatus for controlling the level of the light flux of a street lamp |
Family Cites Families (13)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US4959637A (en) * | 1989-08-07 | 1990-09-25 | National Safety Devices, Inc. | Emergency signaling device |
| US5406300A (en) * | 1991-12-12 | 1995-04-11 | Avix, Inc. | Swing type aerial display system |
| US5383280A (en) * | 1992-11-20 | 1995-01-24 | Mcdermott; Kevin | Direction indicator for navigation |
| JPH11285083A (en) * | 1998-03-31 | 1999-10-15 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Remote control device |
| US6249089B1 (en) * | 1998-10-09 | 2001-06-19 | Frederick Bruwer | Intelligent electrical device comprising microchip |
| JP3806285B2 (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2006-08-09 | ヤマハ株式会社 | Light-emitting toy and body condition recording / judgment system using light-emitting toy |
| EP1855267B1 (en) * | 2000-01-11 | 2013-07-10 | Yamaha Corporation | Apparatus and method for detecting performer´s motion to interactively control performance of music or the like |
| JP2001325801A (en) * | 2000-05-16 | 2001-11-22 | Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd | Cylindrical guide light device |
| US6626728B2 (en) * | 2000-06-27 | 2003-09-30 | Kenneth C. Holt | Motion-sequence activated toy wand |
| US20070171082A1 (en) * | 2004-04-13 | 2007-07-26 | Melnik Michael A | Flashlight with sos and energy saver features |
| US7579782B2 (en) * | 2004-12-07 | 2009-08-25 | Mag Instrument, Inc. | Circuitry for portable lighting devices and portable rechargeable electronic devices |
| JP2007130182A (en) * | 2005-11-09 | 2007-05-31 | Toshiba Corp | Lighting control device, lighting control system, lighting control method, and lighting control program |
| US20080272928A1 (en) * | 2007-05-03 | 2008-11-06 | Shuster Gary S | Signaling light with motion-sensing light control circuit |
-
2010
- 2010-01-15 TW TW099101153A patent/TW201038127A/en unknown
- 2010-01-15 JP JP2011546265A patent/JP5647150B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2010-01-15 CN CN2010800095459A patent/CN102369392A/en active Pending
- 2010-01-15 MX MX2011007625A patent/MX2011007625A/en active IP Right Grant
- 2010-01-15 WO PCT/US2010/000103 patent/WO2010083047A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2010-01-15 AU AU2010204998A patent/AU2010204998A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-01-15 EP EP10731939.4A patent/EP2387691A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2010-01-18 AR ARP100100105A patent/AR075142A1/en unknown
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| EP2387691A1 (en) | 2011-11-23 |
| WO2010083047A1 (en) | 2010-07-22 |
| AR075142A1 (en) | 2011-03-09 |
| MX2011007625A (en) | 2011-08-08 |
| EP2387691A4 (en) | 2015-11-25 |
| CN102369392A (en) | 2012-03-07 |
| JP2012515424A (en) | 2012-07-05 |
| AU2010204998A1 (en) | 2011-08-04 |
| JP5647150B2 (en) | 2014-12-24 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| TW201038127A (en) | Portable lighting devices | |
| US11149909B2 (en) | Portable lighting devices | |
| US9512991B2 (en) | Portable lighting devices | |
| US20110012535A1 (en) | Portable lighting devices | |
| US20110012534A1 (en) | Portable lighting devices | |
| CN1954172B (en) | Apparatus and method for aligning a substantial point source of light with a reflector structure | |
| US10371327B2 (en) | Rechargeable lighting devices | |
| US20110122609A1 (en) | customizable torch | |
| US8148917B2 (en) | Flashlight | |
| US8157407B2 (en) | Long-range, handheld searchlight | |
| US9255696B2 (en) | Lighting devices | |
| US20140328054A1 (en) | Modular flash light with magnetic connection | |
| US7517109B2 (en) | Flashlight with rotary head brightness control and detachable tailcap mount | |
| EP2319096A1 (en) | Led module | |
| JP2014505327A (en) | Portable lighting device with reconfigurable user interface | |
| CN101300450A (en) | flashlight | |
| KR100402345B1 (en) | Compact Flashlight Using High Brightness Light Emitting Diode | |
| KR20200121156A (en) | Portable light | |
| CN104373911A (en) | Headlights and battery covers for headlights |